Samsung

A3 Color Copier
CLX-9201/9251/9301 series
CLX-9201ND/NA,
CLX-9251ND/NA, CLX-9301NA
(Ver 3.2)
SERVICE MANUAL
A3 Color Copier Contents
1. Precautions
2. Product Specifications and Description
3. Disassembly and Reassembly
4. Troubleshooting
5. System Diagram
6. Reference Information
Refer to the service manual in the GSPN (see the rear cover) for more information.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Contents
Contents
1. Precautions ........................................................................................................................................1 − 1
1.1. Safety warning ..........................................................................................................................1 − 1
1.2. Caution for safety ......................................................................................................................1 − 2
1.2.1. Toxic material...............................................................................................................1 − 2
1.2.2. Electric shock and fire safety precautions ...........................................................................1 − 2
1.2.3. Handling precautions .....................................................................................................1 − 4
1.2.4. Assembly and Disassembly precautions .............................................................................1 − 4
1.2.5. Disregarding this warning may cause bodily injury ..............................................................1 − 5
1.3. ESD precautions ........................................................................................................................1 − 6
2. Product Specifications and Description ....................................................................................................2 − 1
2.1. Product Overview ......................................................................................................................2 − 1
2.2. Specifications............................................................................................................................2 − 2
2.2.1. General Specification .....................................................................................................2 − 2
2.2.2. Print Specifications ........................................................................................................2 − 3
2.2.3. Controller and Software specification ................................................................................2 − 6
2.2.4. Scan specification ........................................................................................................ 2 − 10
2.2.5. Copy specification ....................................................................................................... 2 − 12
2.2.6. Fax specification ......................................................................................................... 2 − 14
2.2.7. Paper Handling specification.......................................................................................... 2 − 18
2.2.8. Supplies..................................................................................................................... 2 − 21
2.2.9. Maintenance Parts ....................................................................................................... 2 − 21
2.2.10. Option....................................................................................................................... 2 − 22
2.3. Machine External View............................................................................................................. 2 − 24
2.4. Feeding System ....................................................................................................................... 2 − 28
2.4.1. Feeding System Overview............................................................................................. 2 − 28
2.4.2. Main Components and functions .................................................................................... 2 − 29
2.4.3. Cassette (Tray 1,2,3,4).................................................................................................. 2 − 33
2.4.4. Pick-Up Unit .............................................................................................................. 2 − 34
2.4.5. Registration Unit ......................................................................................................... 2 − 35
2.4.6. MPF(Multi-Purpose Feeder) Unit ................................................................................... 2 − 36
2.5. Image Creation........................................................................................................................ 2 − 37
2.5.1. Printing process overview ............................................................................................. 2 − 37
2.5.2. Imaging Unit .............................................................................................................. 2 − 38
2.5.2.1. Imaging Unit Overview .................................................................................. 2 − 38
2.5.2.2. Drum drive .................................................................................................. 2 − 39
2.5.2.3. Developer Unit ............................................................................................. 2 − 40
2.5.3. ITB (Intermediate Transfer Belt) Unit.............................................................................. 2 − 42
2.5.3.1. ITB Unit overview ........................................................................................ 2 − 42
i Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved.

Contents
2.5.3.2. Transfer belt drive ......................................................................................... 2 − 43

2.5.3.3. Transfer belt cleaning..................................................................................... 2 − 44
2.6. Fuser unit ............................................................................................................................... 2 − 45
2.6.1. Fuser unit overview ..................................................................................................... 2 − 45
2.6.2. Fuser Unit drive .......................................................................................................... 2 − 46
2.6.3. Fuser unit temperature control........................................................................................ 2 − 47
2.7. Laser scanning unit (LSU) ......................................................................................................... 2 − 48
2.7.1. LSU overview............................................................................................................. 2 − 48
2.7.2. Laser Scanning Optical path .......................................................................................... 2 − 49
2.7.3. Laser synchronizing detectors ........................................................................................ 2 − 50
2.7.4. Automatic line position adjustment ................................................................................. 2 − 51
2.7.5. Shutter Mechanism ...................................................................................................... 2 − 54
2.8. Drive System .......................................................................................................................... 2 − 55
2.8.1. Drive Motors .............................................................................................................. 2 − 55
2.8.2. Main Drive Unit (OPC, DEVE, ITB, T1 DIS/ENG) ........................................................... 2 − 57
2.8.3. Pick Up Drive............................................................................................................. 2 − 58
2.8.4. Regi/ MP Drive........................................................................................................... 2 − 59
2.8.5. Feed Drive ................................................................................................................. 2 − 60
2.8.6. Fuser/Exit Drive.......................................................................................................... 2 − 61
2.8.7. Waste Toner Container Drive ......................................................................................... 2 − 62
2.8.8. Toner Supply Drive...................................................................................................... 2 − 62
2.9. Scanner System ....................................................................................................................... 2 − 63
2.9.1. Scanner System Overview............................................................................................. 2 − 63
2.9.2. Scanning System Components ....................................................................................... 2 − 63
2.10. Duplex Automatic Document Feeder(DADF)................................................................................ 2 − 66
2.10.1. DADF overview.......................................................................................................... 2 − 66
2.10.2. Electrical parts location ................................................................................................ 2 − 67
2.10.3. DADF Drive System .................................................................................................... 2 − 68
2.10.3.1. DADF Original Drive Assembly ...................................................................... 2 − 69
2.10.3.2. DADF Registration (Regi) Drive Assembly........................................................ 2 − 70
2.10.3.3. DADF Feed Drive Assembly ........................................................................... 2 − 70
2.10.3.4. DADF Exit Drive Assembly............................................................................ 2 − 71
2.10.3.5. Original Return Drive .................................................................................... 2 − 71
2.11. Hardware Configuration ............................................................................................................ 2 − 72
2.11.1. Main Controller .......................................................................................................... 2 − 75
2.11.2. Operation Panel (OPE) controller ................................................................................... 2 − 79
2.11.3. ADF PBA .................................................................................................................. 2 − 82
2.11.4. SMPS (Switching Mode Power Supply) board .................................................................. 2 − 83
2.11.5. Fuser Drive Board (FDB).............................................................................................. 2 − 85
2.11.6. HVPS board ............................................................................................................... 2 − 86
Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved. ii

Contents
2.11.7. Eraser PBA ................................................................................................................ 2 − 87

2.11.8. Fuser PBA ................................................................................................................. 2 − 87
2.11.9. Waste Sensor PBA....................................................................................................... 2 − 88
2.11.10. CRUM PBA ............................................................................................................... 2 − 88
2.11.11. Deve CRUM Joint PBA ............................................................................................... 2 − 88
2.11.12. Toner CRUM Joint PBA .............................................................................................. 2 − 89
2.11.13. ITB Encoder PBA ....................................................................................................... 2 − 89
2.11.14. Scan Joint PBA ........................................................................................................... 2 − 90
2.11.15. Charge Coupled Device Module(CCDM) PBA.................................................................. 2 − 91
2.11.16. White-LED(WLED) CTL PBA ...................................................................................... 2 − 92
2.11.17. White-LED(WLED) AL FRONT PBA ............................................................................ 2 − 92
2.12. DCF Unit ............................................................................................................................... 2 − 93
2.13. Finisher ................................................................................................................................. 2 − 99
2.14. Wireless LAN Option ............................................................................................................. 2 − 102
3. Disassembly and Reassembly ................................................................................................................3 − 1
3.1. Precautions when replacing parts ..................................................................................................3 − 1
3.1.1. Precautions when assembling and disassembling .................................................................3 − 1
3.1.2. Precautions when handling PBA.......................................................................................3 − 1
3.1.3. Releasing Plastic Latches ................................................................................................3 − 2
3.2. Maintenance .............................................................................................................................3 − 3
3.2.1. Machine Cleaning for maintenance ...................................................................................3 − 3
3.2.1.1. Cleaning the ACR/CTD sensor window...............................................................3 − 3
3.2.1.2. Cleaning the LSU window ................................................................................3 − 4
3.2.1.3. Cleaning the transfer roller................................................................................3 − 5
3.2.1.4. Cleaning the scan glass.....................................................................................3 − 5
3.2.2. Replacing the maintenance part ........................................................................................3 − 6
3.2.2.1. Drum Unit .....................................................................................................3 − 6
3.2.2.2. Developer Unit ...............................................................................................3 − 7
3.2.2.3. ITB Cleaner ...................................................................................................3 − 9
3.2.2.4. ITB Unit........................................................................................................3 − 9
3.2.2.5. Fuser unit .................................................................................................... 3 − 11
3.2.2.6. Transfer roller............................................................................................... 3 − 11
3.2.2.7. Pick-Up_Reverse_Forward roller ..................................................................... 3 − 12
3.2.2.8. MP Pick up_Reverse_Forward roller................................................................. 3 − 13
3.2.2.9. DADF Pick-up roller Assy .............................................................................. 3 − 14
3.2.2.10. DADF friction pad ........................................................................................ 3 − 14
3.3. Replacing the main SVC part ..................................................................................................... 3 − 15
3.3.1. Left Cover.................................................................................................................. 3 − 15
3.3.2. Rear Cover................................................................................................................. 3 − 15
3.3.3. HVPS board ............................................................................................................... 3 − 16
iii Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved.

Contents
3.3.4. Temperature Sensor ..................................................................................................... 3 − 16

3.3.5. LSU.......................................................................................................................... 3 − 17
3.3.6. OPE Unit ................................................................................................................... 3 − 18
3.3.7. Main board................................................................................................................. 3 − 21
3.3.8. SMPS Fan.................................................................................................................. 3 − 22
3.3.9. SMPS board ............................................................................................................... 3 − 23
3.3.10. FDB board ................................................................................................................. 3 − 23
3.3.11. Fuser-Duct Fan ........................................................................................................... 3 − 24
3.3.12. Main board shield........................................................................................................ 3 − 24
3.3.13. Main Drive unit........................................................................................................... 3 − 25
3.3.14. Fuser/Exit Drive unit.................................................................................................... 3 − 25
3.3.15. Pick-up Drive unit ....................................................................................................... 3 − 26
3.3.16. Feed Drive unit ........................................................................................................... 3 − 26
3.3.17. Regi_MP Drive unit..................................................................................................... 3 − 27
3.3.18. Toner Supply Drive unit................................................................................................ 3 − 27
3.3.19. Waste toner container Drive unit..................................................................................... 3 − 28
3.3.20. Auto Size sensor ......................................................................................................... 3 − 28
3.3.21. Exit Unit.................................................................................................................... 3 − 29
3.3.22. Side Unit ................................................................................................................... 3 − 30
3.3.22.1. Fuser out sensor ............................................................................................ 3 − 31
3.3.22.2. Duplex sensor and Curl sensor ......................................................................... 3 − 32
3.3.22.3. MP unit ....................................................................................................... 3 − 33
3.3.23. Fuser unit................................................................................................................... 3 − 37
3.3.24. Pick-up Unit and sensor ................................................................................................ 3 − 40
3.3.25. Feed sensor ................................................................................................................ 3 − 40
3.3.26. Feed Unit................................................................................................................... 3 − 41
3.3.27. Registration Unit ......................................................................................................... 3 − 42
3.3.28. DADF Unit ................................................................................................................ 3 − 43
3.3.28.1. DADF Cover................................................................................................ 3 − 44
3.3.28.2. DADF Open Cover........................................................................................ 3 − 46
3.3.28.3. DADF Stacker .............................................................................................. 3 − 46
3.3.28.4. DADF main board......................................................................................... 3 − 46
3.3.28.5. DADF motor_solenoid_clutch ......................................................................... 3 − 47
3.3.28.6. DADF Regi_Cover_Detect sensor .................................................................... 3 − 49
3.3.28.7. DADF Exit Idle sensor ................................................................................... 3 − 49
3.3.28.8. DADF Exit sensor ......................................................................................... 3 − 50
3.3.28.9. DADF Length_Width sensor ........................................................................... 3 − 50
3.3.29. Scanner Unit............................................................................................................... 3 − 51
3.3.29.1. Scanner joint board........................................................................................ 3 − 51
3.3.29.2. Scan glass .................................................................................................... 3 − 52
Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved. iv

Contents
3.3.29.3. APS sensor .................................................................................................. 3 − 53

3.3.29.4. FR module ................................................................................................... 3 − 54
3.3.29.5. Scanner Assy................................................................................................ 3 − 55
3.3.30. Side Cover Open Switch ............................................................................................... 3 − 56
3.3.31. Front Cover Open Switch.............................................................................................. 3 − 56
3.3.32. Replacing the HDD...................................................................................................... 3 − 57
3.3.33. DCF (Double Cassette Feeder) ....................................................................................... 3 − 58
3.3.33.1. DCF main board ........................................................................................... 3 − 58
3.3.33.2. DCF Feed Motor ........................................................................................... 3 − 59
3.3.33.3. DCF Pick Up Motor....................................................................................... 3 − 59
3.3.34. Finisher ..................................................................................................................... 3 − 60
3.3.34.1. Finisher Main Motor ...................................................................................... 3 − 60
3.3.34.2. Finisher Board .............................................................................................. 3 − 63
4. Troubleshooting ..................................................................................................................................4 − 1
4.1. Control panel ............................................................................................................................4 − 1
4.1.1. Introducing the display screen and useful buttons ................................................................4 − 2
4.2. Understanding the status LED ......................................................................................................4 − 4
4.3. Updating Firmware ....................................................................................................................4 − 5
4.3.1. Updating from the Printer Control Panel ............................................................................4 − 5
4.3.2. Updating from the Network ............................................................................................4 − 7
4.4. Service Mode (Tech Mode)........................................................................................................ 4 − 10
4.4.1. Entering/Exiting Service Mode ...................................................................................... 4 − 10
4.4.2. Service Mode Menu Tree ............................................................................................. 4 − 11
4.4.3. Information ................................................................................................................ 4 − 15
4.4.3.1. General ....................................................................................................... 4 − 15
4.4.3.2. Supply Status ............................................................................................... 4 − 15
4.4.3.3. Software Version........................................................................................... 4 − 16
4.4.3.4. Service Hours ............................................................................................... 4 − 16
4.4.3.5. Fault Log..................................................................................................... 4 − 16
4.4.3.6. Print Reports ................................................................................................ 4 − 17
4.4.3.7. Export Reports.............................................................................................. 4 − 18
4.4.4. Maintenance Counts..................................................................................................... 4 − 19
4.4.4.1. Fault Count ................................................................................................. 4 − 19
4.4.4.2. Jam Count ................................................................................................... 4 − 19
4.4.4.3. Part Replacement Count ................................................................................. 4 − 20
4.4.4.4. Finisher Handling Count................................................................................. 4 − 21
4.4.5. Diagnostics ................................................................................................................ 4 − 22
4.4.5.1. Engine Diagnostics........................................................................................ 4 − 22
4.4.5.2. Fax Diagnostics ............................................................................................ 4 − 28
4.4.5.3. Scanner Diagnostics....................................................................................... 4 − 30
v Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved.

Contents
4.4.5.4. Adjustment .................................................................................................. 4 − 32

4.4.5.5. ACS (Auto Color Sensing) ............................................................................. 4 − 38
4.4.5.6. Image Management ...................................................................................... 4 − 39
4.4.6. Service Functions ........................................................................................................ 4 − 44
4.4.6.1. Main Memory Clear ...................................................................................... 4 − 44
4.4.6.2. Hard Disk Maintenance .................................................................................. 4 − 44
4.4.6.3. Count Setting of Large Page ........................................................................... 4 − 44
4.4.6.4. Toner Save .................................................................................................. 4 − 44
4.4.6.5. Port ............................................................................................................ 4 − 45
4.4.6.6. Debug Log................................................................................................... 4 − 45
4.4.6.7. Capture Log ................................................................................................. 4 − 45
4.4.6.8. System Recovery .......................................................................................... 4 − 47
4.4.6.9. TR Control Mode ......................................................................................... 4 − 50
4.4.6.10. User Data Management ................................................................................. 4 − 51
4.4.7. SFE (Special Feature Enablement) .................................................................................. 4 − 52
4.5. Error Code and Troubleshooting ................................................................................................. 4 − 53
4.5.1. Ax-xxxx type error code ............................................................................................... 4 − 63
4.5.2. Cx-xxxx type error code ............................................................................................... 4 − 89
4.5.3. H1-xxxx type (DCF) error code.................................................................................... 4 − 119
4.5.4. H2-xxxx (Finisher) type error code ............................................................................... 4 − 131
4.5.5. Mx-xxxx type error code............................................................................................. 4 − 144
4.5.6. Sx-xxxx type error code.............................................................................................. 4 − 164
4.5.7. U1-xxxx type (Fuser) error code................................................................................... 4 − 184
4.5.8. U2-xxxx type (LSU) error code .................................................................................... 4 − 196
4.5.9. U3-xxxx type error code ............................................................................................. 4 − 199
4.6. Image quality problems and solutions ........................................................................................ 4 − 204
4.6.1. Vertical Black Band ................................................................................................... 4 − 207
4.6.2. Vertical White Band, Light Band .................................................................................. 4 − 208
4.6.3. Horizontal periodic Black Band or Dot .......................................................................... 4 − 210
4.6.4. Horizontal periodic Light/Dark Band or Dot ................................................................... 4 − 211
4.6.5. Foggy Image ............................................................................................................ 4 − 212
4.6.6. Light Image.............................................................................................................. 4 − 213
4.6.7. Blurred Image........................................................................................................... 4 − 214
4.6.8. Incorrect color registration ......................................................................................... 4 − 215
4.6.9. Uneven pitch and jitter image ...................................................................................... 4 − 216
4.6.10. Skewed image........................................................................................................... 4 − 217
4.6.11. Blank copy............................................................................................................... 4 − 218
4.6.12. Poor fusing performance ............................................................................................. 4 − 219
4.6.13. Stain on the paper back side......................................................................................... 4 − 220
4.7. Adjusting the LSU skew error .................................................................................................. 4 − 221
Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved. vi

Contents
4.8. Adjusting the DADF skew....................................................................................................... 4 − 223

4.9. Troubleshooting Guide ........................................................................................................... 4 − 224
5. System Diagram..................................................................................................................................5 − 1
6. Reference Information..........................................................................................................................6 − 1
6.1. Tools for Troubleshooting............................................................................................................6 − 1
6.2. Glossary...................................................................................................................................6 − 3
6.3. Polaris Training Frequently Asked Questions ..................................................................................6 − 9
vii Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved.

1. Precautions
1. Precautions
In order to prevent accidents and damages to the equipment please read the precautions listed below carefully before
servicing the product and follow them closely.
1.1. Safety warning
1) Only to be serviced by a factory trained service technician.

High voltages and lasers inside this product are dangerous. This product should only be serviced by a factory trained
service technician.
2) Use only Samsung replacement parts.

There are no user serviceable parts inside the product. Do not make any unauthorized changes or additions to the
product as these could cause the product to malfunctions and create an electric shocks or fire hazards.
3) Laser Safety Statement

The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR, chapter 1 Subchapter J for
Class I(1) laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC
60825-1. Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The laser system and printer are designed so
there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance
or prescribed service condition.
• Wavelength: 800 nm
• Beam divergence
- Paraller: 11 degrees
- Perpendicular: 35 degrees
• Maximum power of energy output: 12 mW
WARNING
Never operate or service the product with the protective cover removed from Laser/Scanner assembly. The reflected
beam, although invisible, can damage your eyes.
When using this product, these basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce risk of fire, electric
shock, and personal injury.
4) Lithium battery not replaceable by user
Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved. 1-1

1. Precautions
1.2. Caution for safety
1.2.1. Toxic material
This product contains toxic materials that could cause illness if ingested.
1) Please keep imaging unit and toner cartridge away from children. The toner powder contained in the imaging unit and
toner cartridge may be harmful, and if swallowed, you should contact a doctor.
1.2.2. Electric shock and fire safety precautions
Failure to follow the following instructions could cause electric shock or potentially cause a fire.
1) Use only the correct voltage, failure to do so could damage the product and potentially cause a fire or electric shock.
2) Use only the power cable supplied with the product. Use of an incorrectly specified cable could cause the cable to
overheat and potentially cause a fire.
3) Do not overload the power socket, this could lead to overheating of the cables inside the wall and could lead to a fire.
4) Do not allow water or other liquids to spill into the product, this can cause electric shock. Do not allow paper clips, pins
or other foreign objects to fall into the product, these could cause a short circuit leading to an electric shock or fire hazard.
5) Never touch the plugs on either end of the power cable with wet hands, this can cause electric shock. When servicing
the product, remove the power plug from the wall socket.
6) Use caution when inserting or removing the power cord. When removing the power cord, grip it firmly and pull. The
power cord must be inserted completely, otherwise a poor contact could cause overheating leading to a fire.
7) Take care of the power cable. Do not allow it to become twisted, bent sharply around corners or power cable may be
damaged. Do not place objects on top of the power cable. If the power cable is damaged it could overheat and cause a
fire. Exposed cables could cause an electric shock. Replace the damaged power cable immediately, do not reuse or
repair the damaged cable. Some chemicals can attack the coating on the power cable, weakening the cover or exposing
cables causing fire and shock risks.
1-2 Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved.

1. Precautions
8) Ensure that the power sockets and plugs are not cracked or broken in any way. Any such defects should be repaired
immediately. Take care not to cut or damage the power cable or plugs when moving the machine.
9) Use caution during thunder or lightning storms. Samsung recommends that this machine be disconnected from the
power source when such weather conditions are expected. Do not touch the machine or the power cord if it is still
connected to the wall socket in these weather conditions.
10) Avoid damp or dusty areas, install the product in a clean well ventilated location. Do not position the machine near a
humidifier or in front of an air conditioner. Moisture and dust built up inside the machine can lead to overheating and
cause a fire or cause parts to rust.
11) Do not position the product in direct sunlight. This will cause the temperature inside the product to rise possibly leading
to the product failing to work properly and in extreme conditions could lead to a fire.
12) Do not insert any metal objects into the machine through the ventilator fan or other part of the casing, it could make
contact with a high voltage conductor inside the machine and cause an electric shock.
13) When replacing the SMPS board, please wait 5 minutes after unplugging the power cord, then replace it. You
can get a shock by the electric discharge.

1. Precautions
1.2.3. Handling precautions
The following instructions are for your own personal safety to avoid injury and so as not to damage the product.
1) Ensure the product is installed on a level surface, capable of supporting its weight. Failure to do so could cause
the product to tip or fall.
2) The product contains many rollers, gears and fans. Take great care to ensure that you do not catch your fingers, hair or
clothing in any of these rotating devices.
3) Do not place any small metal objects, containers of water, chemicals or other liquids close to the product which if spilled
could get into the machine and cause damage or a shock or fire hazard.
4) Do not install the machine in areas with high dust or moisture levels, beside on open window or close to a humidifier or
heater. Damage could be caused to the product in such areas.
5) Do not place candles, burning cigarettes, etc on the product, These could cause a fire.
6) Ensure that the machine is installed and used in proper area to meet the temperature and humidity specifications.
• If the machine is stored at below zero Celsius for a long time, do not use the machine instantly after movement. It
can malfunction. Take care of the machine storage. If the machine is stored at below zero Celsius for a long time,
keep the machine at room temperature and install it.
1.2.4. Assembly and Disassembly precautions
1) Replace parts carefully and always use Samsung parts. Take care to note the exact location of parts and also cable
routing before dismantling any part of the machine. Ensure all parts and cables are replaced correctly. Please carry out
the following procedures before dismantling the product or replacing any parts.
2) Ensure that power is disconnected before servicing or replacing any electrical parts.
3) Disconnect interface cables and power cables.
4) Only use approved spare parts. Ensure that part number, product name, any voltage, current or temperature rating
are correct.
5) When removing or re-fitting any parts do not use excessive force, especially when fitting screws into plastic.
6) Take care not to drop any small parts into the machine.
7) Handling of the OPC Drum
• The OPC Drum can be irreparably damaged if it exposed to light. Take care not to expose the OPC Drum either
to direct sunlight or to fluorescent or incandescent room lighting. Exposure for as little as 5 minutes can damage
the surface of the photoconductive properties and will result in print quality degradation. Take extra care when
servicing the product. Remove the OPC Drum and store it in a black bag or other lightproof container. Take
care when working with the Covers (especially the top cover) open as light is admitted to the OPC area and can
damage the OPC Drum.
• Take care not to scratch the green surface of OPC Drum Unit. If the green surface of the Drum Cartridge is
scratched or touched the print quality will be compromised.

1. Precautions
1.2.5. Disregarding this warning may cause bodily injury
1) Be careful with the high temperature part.

The fuser unit works at a high temperature. Use caution when working on the printer. Wait for the fuser unit to
cool down before disassembly.
2) Do not put fingers or hair into the rotating parts.

When operating a printer, do not put hand or hair into the rotating parts (Paper feeding entrance, motor, fan, etc.).
If do, you can get harm.
3) When you move the printer, use safe lifting and handling techniques.
This printer is heavy. Use the lifting handles located on each side of the machine. Back injury could be caused if
you do not lift carefully.
4) Ensure the printer is installed safely.

Ensure the printer is installed on a level surface, capable of supporting its weight. Failure to do so could cause the
printer to tip or fall possibly causing personal injury or damaging the printer.
5) Do not install the printer on a sloping or unstable surface. After installation, double check that the printer is stable.

1. Precautions
1.3. ESD precautions
Certain semiconductor devices can be easily damaged by static electricity. Such components are commonly called
“Electrostatically Sensitive (ES) Devices” or ESDs. Examples of typical ESDs are: integrated circuits, some field effect
transistors, and semiconductor “chip” components. The techniques outlined below should be followed to help reduce the
incidence of component damage caused by static electricity.
CAUTION
Be sure no power is applied to the chassis or circuit, and observe all other safety precautions.
1) Immediately before handling a semiconductor component or semiconductor-equipped assembly, drain off any
electrostatic charge on your body by touching a known earth ground. Alternatively, employ a commercially available
wrist strap device, which should be removed for your personal safety reasons prior to applying power to the unit
under test.
2) After removing an electrical assembly equipped with ESDs, place the assembly on a conductive surface, such as
aluminum or copper foil, or conductive foam, to prevent electrostatic charge buildup in the vicinity of the assembly.
3) Use only a grounded tip soldering iron to solder or desolder ESDs.
4) Use only an “anti-static” solder removal device. Some solder removal devices not classified as “anti-static” can
generate electrical charges sufficient to damage ESDs.
5) Do not use Freon-propelled chemicals. When sprayed, these can generate electrical charges sufficient to damage ESDs.
6) Do not remove a replacement ESD from its protective packaging until immediately before installing it. Most
replacement ESDs are packaged with all leads shorted together by conductive foam, aluminum foil, or a comparable
conductive material.
7) Immediately before removing the protective shorting material from the leads of a replacement ESD, touch the protective
material to the chassis or circuit assembly into which the device will be installed.
8) Maintain continuous electrical contact between the ESD and the assembly into which it will be installed, until
completely plugged or soldered into the circuit.
9) Minimize bodily motions when handling unpackaged replacement ESDs. Normal motions, such as the brushing together
of clothing fabric and lifting one’s foot from a carpeted floor, can generate static electricity sufficient to damage an ESD.

2.1. Product Overview
• Printing Speed (Mono/Color)

• CLX-9301 series
- Up to 30 ppm in A4 (30 ppm in Letter)
- Up to 15 ppm in A3 (15 ppm in 11x17)
• CLX-9251 series
- Up to 25ppm in A4 (25 ppm in Letter)
• CLX-9201 series
- Up to 20 ppm in A4 (20 ppm in Letter)
• Processor
• Dual Core 1GHz
• Memory
• 1GB DDR3 SDRAM

2.2. Specifications
Product Specifications are subject to change without notice.
2.2.1. General Specification
Item Specfication
• ND model : Platen cover model.
Configuration
• NA model : DADF model.
Operating 10 to 32 °C (50 to 90 °F)
Temperature
Storage -20 to 40 °C (-4 to 104 °F)
Operating 20 to 80% RH
Humidity
Storage 10 to 90% RH
• CLX-9301 series : 50 /52 dB
Printing Simplex /
• CLX-9251 series : 49 /51 dB
Duplex
• CLX-9201 series : 48/ 50 dB
Acoustic Noise • CLX-9301 series : 53 /55 dB
Level (Sound Copying Simplex /
• CLX-9251 series : 53 /55 dB
Power / Pressure) Duplex
• CLX-9201 series : 53/ 55 dB
Standby (Fuser off) 30 dB
Sleep 27 dB
Europe : AC 220-240V(-10%~6%) / 4A
Input Voltage USA : AC 110~127V (-10%~6%) / 10A
Power Supply
Korea : AC 220-240V(-10%~6%) / 4A
Rated Frequency 50 / 60 Hz
Ready 100 Watt
AVG. (Normal
Power 800 Watt
Operation)
Consumption
Max/Peak < 1500 Watt max
Sleep/Power Off 3 Watt / 0 Watt
• 560 x 600 x 787.3 mm (22 x 23.6 x 31 inches) (includes Platen Cover)
• 560 x 600 x 844.3 mm (22 x 23.6 x 33.2 inches) (includes DADF)
Dimension (W x D
Set (mm) • 560 x 600 x 1046.6 mm (22 x 23.6 x 41.2 inches) (includes Platen Cover,
x H)
Stand)
• 560 x 600 x 1106.3 mm (22 x 23.6 x 43.6 inches) (includes DADF, DCF)
• Basic machine (includes developer unit) : 67.6 Kg (149 lb)
• Platen Cover : 2.4 Kg (5.3 lb)
• DADF : 4.9 Kg (10.8 lb)
• DCF : 19.5 Kg (43 lb)
Weight Set (Kg)
• Stand : 12 Kg (26.5 lb)
• Job Separator : 1.5 Kg (3.3 lb)
• Inner Finisher : 8.5 Kg (18.7 lb)
• Drum Unit and Toner Cartridges : 6.5 Kg (14.3 lb)

Item Specfication
Reliability & Recommended • CLX-9301 series : 7,500 sheets/month
Service Printing Volume • CLX-9251 series : 5,000 sheets/month
(AMPV)
• CLX-9201 series : 3,500 sheets/month
Max. Monthly 100,000 sheets/month
Print Volume
2.2.2. Print Specifications
Item Specification
• CLX-9301 series
• B&W : Up to 30 ppm in A4 (30 ppm in Letter)
• Color : Up to 30 ppm in A4 (30 ppm in Letter)
• B&W : Up to 15 ppm in A3 (15 ppm in 11X17)
• Color : Up to 15 ppm in A3 (15 ppm in 11X17)
• CLX-9251 series
Engine Speed Simplex • Color : Up to 25 ppm in A4 (25 ppm in Letter)
• CLX-9201 series
• Color : Up to 20 ppm in A4 (20 ppm in Letter)

Item Specification
• CLX-9301 series
• [Basic (Without 2nd EXIT)]
- B&W : Up to 21 ipm in A4 (21 ipm in Letter)
- Color : Up to 21 ipm in A3 (21 ipm in 11×17)
• [With 2nd EXIT (Option)]
• CLX-9251 series
Duplex - Color : Up to 9 ipm in A3 (9 ipm in 11×17)
• CLX-9201 series
• CLX-9301 series : Less than 9/11 sec (B&W/Color)
From Ready • CLX-9251 series : Less than 9.5/11.5 sec (B&W/Color)
• CLX-9201 series : Less than 10/12.5 sec (B&W/Color)
FPOT (B&W and
Color)
From Sleep • CLX-9251 series : Less than 28/30 sec (B&W/Color)
From Coldboot Less than 100/100 sec (B&W/Color)
Optical 600 x 600 dpi
• Normal : 2400*600 dpi Effective Output (600 x 600 x 2bit)
Resolution
Enhanced • Best : 9600*600 dpi Effective Output (600 x 600 x 4bit)
• High Quality : Real 1200*1200 dpi

Item Specification
Printer Languages PCL5Ce, PCL6Ce, PostScript Level3C, TIFF, PDF 1.4, JPEG
Fonts PCL:93 scalable, 1 bitmap, OCR-A, OCR-B, PS:136
Downloadable Fonts Yes (PCL & PS3 S/W Font)
Secure Printing Yes
Delayed No
(Shceduled)
Printing
Print Job (with
HDD ) Proof printing No
Spool Yes
Stored Printing Yes
Form overlays No
USB Memory Direct Print Jpeg, Tiff, PDF, Samsung PRN, TXT

2.2.3. Controller and Software specification
Item Specification
MPU Chorus4N Dual Core 1GHz
Processor
Image Processor Embedded in Chorus4N
Std. 1GB DDR3 SDRAM
DRAM
Max. 1GB DDR3 SDRAM
Memory Expansion N.A.
320GB HDD Standard
NOTE
HDD Partition Map

- Mandatory, 157GB for users, EXT3 file system
Storage
HDD_DOC partition is available for the user data storage.
[Windows]
• Windows 2000/ XP(32/64bit)/ 2003(32/64bit)/ Vista(32/64bit)/ 2008/ Win7/
2008 R2(64 only)
[Linux]
• RedHat Enterprise Linux WS 4, 5 (32/64bit)
• Fedora 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13 (32/64bit)
• SuSE Linux 10.1 (32bit)
Supporting OS
Printer driver • OpenSuSE 10.2 10.3, 11.0, 11.1, 11.2 (32/64bit)
• Mandriva 2007, 2008, 2009, 2009.1, 2010 (32/64bit)
• Ubuntu 6.06, 6.10, 7.04, 7.10, 8.04 8.10, 9.04, 9.10, 10.04 (32/64bit)
• SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10, 11 (32/64bit)
• Debian 4.0, 5.0 (32/64bit)
[Mac]
• Mac OS X 10.5 ~ 10.7
Default Driver PCL6 (For Windows), PS (for Mac, Linux)

Item Specification
• [Windows]
• Watermark, Overlay, N-up printing, Poster printing
• Duplex, Quality, Color mode (Color, Gray scale)
Driver feature • Support Color spec., Device color, color management
• [Mac/Linux]
• N-up printing, Duplex, Quality
• Color mode (Color, Gray scale)
WHQL
(Windows Windows 2000/ XP(include 64bit)/ 2003/ Vista/ 2008/ Win7/ 2008 R2(64 only)
Hardware Quality
Labs)
23 countries( Arabic/ Portuguese Brazilian/ Simplified Chinese / Traditional
Language Chinese/ Czech/ Danish/ Dutch/ Greek/ English/ Finnish/ French/ German/ Hebrew/
Localization Hungarian/ Italian/ Korea/ Norweigian/ Polish/ Portuguese / Russian/ Spanish /
Swedish /Turkish)
Status Monitor
Yes (Windows Only)
(Lite SM)
TWAIN Yes
WIA No
[Windows]
• Windows 2000/ XP(32/64bit)/ 2003(32/64bit)/ Vista(32/64bit)/
2008(32/64bit)/ Win7/ 2008 R2(64 only)
[Linux]
• RedHat Enterprise Linux WS 4, 5 (32/64bit)
Scan driver • Fedora 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13 (32/64bit) - SuSE Linux 10.1 (32bit)
Supporting OS • OpenSuSE 10.2 10.3, 11.0, 11.1, 11.2 (32/64bit)
• Mandriva 2007, 2008, 2009, 2009.1, 2010 (32/64bit)
• Ubuntu 6.06, 6.10, 7.04, 7.10, 8.04 8.10, 9.04, 9.10, 10.04 (32/64bit)
• SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10, 11 (32/64bit)
• Debian 4.0, 5.0 (32/64bit)
[Mac]
• Mac OS X 10.5 ~ 10.6
Scan Manager Yes (Win, Mac)
Scan Assistant Yes (Win, Mac)
PC-FAX No
Network-FAX Yes (Win, Mac)
Samsung Easy
Yes (Win, Mac)
Printer Manager
Application
Network Set IP, SWAS 5.0 & SWS 2.0 SWAS Plug-In : Job Accounting, Storage management,
Management Cloning, Remote Install
HDD File
No
Management S/W
AnyWeb Print Yes
SmarThru Smarthru Office, SmarThru Workflow(Optional)

■ Interface
Item Specification
Parallel (IEEE 1284) No
Type A, Host High-Speed USB 2.0 Host (2-port)
USB
Type B, Device Hi-Speed USB 2.0 Peripheral (1-port)
Wired LAN Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base TX
Wireless LAN No
Foreign Device Interface Optional
■ Network Interface
Item Specification
• Microsoft Windows 2000/ XP(32/64bits)/ 2003(32/64bits)/ Vista(32/64bits)/
Win7
[Mac]
• Mac OS X 10.5 ~ 10.6
[Linux]
• RedHat 8 ~ 9
Network OS • Fedora Core 1~4
• Madrake 9.2 ~ 10.1
• SuSE 8.2 ~ 9.2
[Novell]
• Netware 5.x, 6.x(TCP/IP Only)
[Others]
• Unix(HP-UX,Solaris,SunOS, SCO)
TCP/IPv4, HTTP, SNMPv1/v2c/v3, LDAP, SMTP, SSL/TLS, IPSec, DNS,WINS,
TCP/IP
SLP, Bonjour, SSDP,DDNS, DHCP/BOOTP,IPv6
IPX/SPX No
Network Protocols Ether Talk No
NetBIOS over
Yes
TCP/IP
Others HTTPS, LDAPS, IPSec, 802.1x
Static IP Yes
Auto IP Yes
IP Addressing
BOOTP Yes
DHCP Yes

■ Memory (HDD) Management

Item Specification
Type No
Stored Job Type No
Box Management Max. Number of
No
Boxes
Box Size No
Creation No
Rename No
Move & Copy No
Delete No
Document Search No
Management
Display detail
No
information
Select No
Auto Delete Time
No
Setting
Email Yes
Client Yes
Memory to i-Fax No
Server Yes
Multi Destination No
Copies Yes
Duplex Printing Yes
Color Mode Yes
Memory to Print
Autofit Yes
Setting
Paper Supply Yes
Binding Space 1-50mm left, right, top, bottom (PC Print only)
Erase Edge No
Immediate Yes
Image Overwrite
On-Demand Yes
Supported Job
Print / Copy / Scan / Fax
Type
Data Encrytion
Cryptography AES
Key length 256bit

2.2.4. Scan specification
Item Specification
Scan method Color CCDM-MMT
Compatibility TWAIN(N/W)
Color Mode Mono / Gray / Color
B/W (Lineart, ScanToEmail/SMB/FTP : 45ipm @ 300dpi (A4 LEF standard)
Halftone) PC scan : 15 sec @300dpi (P4-3GHz, 1G, NW 100M, A4 LEF Standard)
ScanToEmail/SMB/FTP : 45ipm @ 300dpi (A4 LEF Standard)
Scan Speed Gray
PC scan : 20 sec @300dpi (P4-3GHz, 1G, NW 100M, A4 LEF Standard)
ScanToEmail/SMB/FTP : 45ipm @ 300dpi (A4 LEF Standard)
Color
PC scan : 30 sec @300dpi (P4-3GHz, 1G, NW 100M, A4 LEF Standard)
Optical 600 x 600 ppi
Resolution
Enhanced 4,800 x 4,800 ppi
Halftone 256 levels
Max. Document
Max.297mm (11.7")
Width
Effective Scan
Scan Size Max 291mm
Width
Max. Document
Max.432mm
Length
Color 24 bits
Scan Depth • 1bit for Linearity & Halftone
Mono
• 8Bits for Gray scale
Multi-page Scan Platen & DADF
HDD Yes (Shared Folder)
USB Yes
Email Yes
Client Yes (N/W)
Scan-to SMB Yes
FTP Yes
HTTP(S) No
WebDAV No
Multi Destination No
User Based Individual (Fax+Email+Server) : 500
Email, Fax, Server
Group : (Fax+Email) : 499
Searching
Address Book Editing
Basic Feature Deleting
Grouping
import, export

Item Specification
Mixed Document Yes
Scan Preset No
Delayed Send No
Job Done notice No
Scan Setting
Recent Yes
OCR No
Job Build Yes
Book Scan No

2.2.5. Copy specification
Item Specification
• CLX-9301 series
• B&W Simplex: up to 30 cpm in A4 & Letter
• Color Simplex: up to 30 cpm in A4 & Letter
• B&W Duplex: up to 21 cpm in A4 & Letter
• Color Duplex: up to 21 cpm in A4 & Letter
• CLX-9251 series
SDMC (Single • B&W Simplex: up to 25 cpm in A4 & Letter
Document • Color Simplex: up to 25 cpm in A4 & Letter
Multiple Copy) • B&W Duplex: up to 17 cpm in A4 & Letter
• CLX-9201 series
Copy Speed • B&W Simplex: up to 20 cpm in A4 & Letter
(DADF) • Color Simplex: up to 20 cpm in A4 & Letter
• B&W Duplex: up to 14 cpm in A4 & Letter
• CLX-9301 series
• Simplex-to-Duplex(1-2): up to 21 cpm in A4 & Letter
• Duplex -to-Duplex(2-2): up to 16 cpm in A4 & Letter
MDMC (Multiple • CLX-9251 series
Document • Simplex-to-Duplex(1-2): up to 17 cpm in A4 & Letter
Multiple Copy) • Duplex -to-Duplex(2-2): up to 16 cpm in A4 & Lette
• CLX-9201 series
• Simplex-to-Duplex(1-2): up to 14 cpm in A4 & Letter
• Duplex -to-Duplex(2-2): up to 14 cpm in A4 & Letter
• CLX-9301 series : Less than 6/8 seconds (from platen, B&W/Color)
From Ready • CLX-9251 series : Less than 7/8 seconds (from platen, B&W/Color)
• CLX-9201 series : Less than 7.5/8.5 seconds (from platen, B&W/Color)
FCOT (B&W and
Color)
From Sleep • CLX-9251 series : Less than 25/27 seconds (from platen, B&W/Color)
From Coldboot Less than 100/100 seconds (from platen, B&W/Color)
Zoom Range 25% ~ 400% in 1% increments (Platen/DADF)
Multi Copy 1~9999
• Platen: Scan 600 x 600 dpi, Printing 600 x 600 x 2bit
Text
• DADF : Scan 600 x 600 dpi, Printing 600 x 600 x 2bit
• Platen: Scan 600 x 600dpi, Printing 600 x 600 x 2bit
Text/Photo
• DADF : Scan 600 x 600dpi, Printing 600 x 600 x 2bit
Original Type Magazine No
Photo
Copied Original

Item Specification
Map
• Platen: Scan 600 x 600dpi, Printing 600 x 600 x 2bit
Light Original
• DADF : Scan 600 x 600dpi, Printing 600 x 600 x 2bit
Original Type Factory Default Color Copy Text/Photo (Mixed) Mode
Auto Color Yes
Full Color Yes
Color Setting Twin Color No
Single Color No
B&W Yes
Platen 297 x 432 mm (11.7" x 17")
Max. Original Size
DADF 297 x 432 mm (11.7" x 17")
Multi Copy 1~9999
Automatic Paper
Yes
Selection
Manual Paper
Yes
Selection
Multi-page Copy Platen & DADF
Using Platen
• 1→1Sided
• 1→2Sided (Output : Book, Calendar)
Basic Copy Using DADF
Duplex Copy
• 1→1Sided
• 1→2Sided (Output: Book, Calendar)
• 2→1Sided (Original: Book, Calendar)
• 2→2Sided (Original: Book, Calendar, Output: Book, Calendar)
Darkness Control 11 Levels
Collation Copy Yes
* Zoom Range : 25% to 400% in Platen and DADF
Reduce & Enlarge * Preset: [Original(100%)] [Auto Fit] … 25%, 50%, 150%, 200%, 400%
[Custom:25-400%)]
Proof Copy No
N-Up 2up ~ 32 up
ID Card Copy Yes (Platen only)
Poster Copy No
Clone Copy No
Other Features (Image Repeat)
Booklet No
Covers Yes
Transparencies No
Book Copy Yes (Platen only)
Scan to Document No

Item Specification
Margin Shift No
Book Center Erase Yes
Form Copy No
Watermark Copy Yes
Stamp Yes
Image Job Program Yes
Adjust Auto, Erase(4 levels), Enhance(2 levels)
Background
Job Build Yes
Rotation Copy No
Mirror No
2.2.6. Fax specification
Item Specification
Compatibility ITU-T G3, Super G3
Communication System PSTN/PABX
Modem Speed 33.6 Kbps
TX Speed 3 sec (Mono/Standard/ECM-MMR, ITU-T G3 No.1 Chart,A4)
Compression MH/MR/MMR/JBIG/JPEG
Color Fax Yes
ECM Yes
Std 203*98 dpi
Fine 203*196 dpi
Resolution (Mono) S.Fine Photo No
S.Fine 300*300 dpi
Ultra Fine 600*600 dpi
Std 1.5sec/LTR
Scan speed Fine 4sec/LTR
S.Fine Depends on Document
Handset No
On hook Dial Yes
Search Yes (Phone Book)
Speed Dial 500 locations
Telephone Group Dial Max. 100 Groups (Max. locations per 1 Group : 100 locations)
Features TAD I/F Yes
Tone/Pulse Yes
Pause Yes
Auto Redial Yes
Redial Yes

Item Specification
Distinctive Ring No
Caller ID Yes
External Phone
Yes
Interface
Mail Box No
Voice Request No
TTI Yes
RTI Yes
Polling No
Earth/Recall No
Auto Reduction Yes
SMS No
Multi-send Same as Group Dial Capacity.
Functions Delayed Send Yes
Memory RX Yes
Secure Rx Yes
Time Secured Fax Yes
Relay
Transmission No
(ITU-T Mail Box)
Priority
No
Transmission
Batch
No
Transmission
Searching Yes
Storing Yes
Editing Yes
Address Book
Deleting Yes
Basic Feature
Grouping Yes
Chaining No
import, export Yes
Search condition No
Favorites Button No
Address Book Curent Sending
Advanced , Receiving Tel Yes(Curent Sending )
number
LDAP Yes

Item Specification
Check the Success
Yes
or Fail & Error
Re-Faxing from
memory in case of Yes
Sending fax failed Fax
Management Re-Faxing in case
Yes
of failed page.
Delete in memory
after sending Yes
completely
Separator Sheet No
Insert the stamp Yes(Option -On,Off) Rx Time ,ID, Page
Fax Receiving Number of Printing
No
Feature/ Printing Copies
the Rx Document
Revers order
No
printing
tray selection Yes
Tx/Rx Journal Yes
Report & List Print Confirmation 2 type(Image TCR or w/o Image TCR)
out Auto Dial List No
System Data List No
Ring Volume Yes (7 steps and mute)
Key Volume Yes (7 steps and mute)
Sound Control
Speaker Yes (7 steps and mute)
Alarm Volume Yes (7 steps and mute)
Junk Fax barrier No
Security Receive Yes
Battery Backup Permanently stored on HDD
Send Yes
Duplex
Receive Yes
Receive Mode Fax, TEL, Ans/Fax
Battery Backup HDD Store, 500 jobs
Fax Forward to FAX No
Fax Forward to e-mail Yes
Broadcasting up to 505 locations
Cover page No

Item Specification
HDD Yes
USB No
Fax No
Email Yes
Fax-to Client No
SMB Yes
FTP Yes
HTTP(S) No
Multi-destination No

2.2.7. Paper Handling specification
Item Specification
• 1,140 sheets @ 20 lb or 80g/m²
Standard Capacity • 520-sheet cassette Tray (20 lb or 80g/m²) x 2
• 100-sheet MP tray (20 lb or 80g/m²)
Max. Input
MP + Tray x 4 2,180 sheets @ 20lb or 80g/m²
Capacity
Max. Size 297 x 432 mm (11.7" x 17"), Banner
Printing Min. Size 98 x 148 mm (3.85"x5.83")
Margin(T/B/L/R) 4.2+/-1.5mm
Capacity • Plain Paper: 100 sheets @ 80 g/m²
• Envelopes: 10 sheets @ 75 g/m²
• Labels: 20 sheets @ 120~150 g/m²
• Thick Paper: 10 sheets @ 176 g/m²
Media sizes 98 x 148 mm ~ 297 x 432 mm (3.87 x 5.8" ~ 11.7 x 17")
Banner Size Printing : 297 mm x 1200 mm
MP Tray
Media type Printer Default, Plain Paper, Thick Paper, Thin Paper, Bond Paper, Color Paper,
CardStock, Labels, Envelope, Preprinted, Letterhead, Recycled Paper, Cotton,
Archive, Glossy
Media weight • 16~47lb (60 ~ 176 g/m²) : Simplex, Duplex
Sensing • Paper Empty Detect: Yes
• Paper Size Detect: No
Capacity 520 sheets @ 20lb (80g/m²) X 2
Legder, A3, Letter, Legal, Oficio, Folio, A3, A4, JIS B5, ISO B5, Executive, A5,
Media sizes
Statement, Custom
Plain Paper, Thin Paper, Bond, Punched, Pre-Printed, Recycled, CardStock,
Media types
Letterhead, Thick, Cotton, Colored, Archive, Glossy
• Plain Paper: 71~90g/m² (19~24 lb), (Duplex : 19~24lb)
• Thick Paper: 91~105g/m² (25~28 lb), (Duplex : 25~28lb)
• Heavy Weight 1 Paper : 106~120g/m²
• Extra Heavy Weight 1 Paper : 176 ~ 216g/m²
Standard Cassette • Thin Paper: 60~70g/m² (16~18 lb)
Tray Media weight • Bond Paper: 105~120g/m² (28~32 lb)
• Punched Paper: 71~90g/m² (19~24 lb)
• Pre-Printed : 75~90g/m² (20~24 lb)
• Recycled : 60~90g/m² (16~24 lb)
• CardStock : 105~163g/m² (28~43lb)
• Letterhead : 71~90g/m² (19~24lb)
• Cotton paper : 75~90g/m² (20~24lb)
• H/W Install Detect: Yes
• Paper Empty & Low Level Detect: Yes
Sensing
• Paper Type Detect: No
• Paper Size Detect: Yes

Item Specification
Capacity 520 sheets @ 20lb (80g/m²) x 2
Legder, A3, Letter, Legal, Oficio, Folio, A4, JIS B5, ISO B5, Executive, A5,
Media sizes
Statement, Custom
Media types
• Plain Paper: 71~90g/m²(19~24 lb), (Duplex : 19~24lb)
• Thick Paper: 91~105g/m²(25~28 lb), (Duplex : 25~28lb)
• Extra Heavy Weight 1 Paper : 176 ~ 216g/m²
Optional Cassette • Thin Paper: 60~70g/m²(16~18 lb)
Tray Media weight • Bond Paper: 105~120g/m²(28~32 lb)
• Punched Paper: 71~90g/m²(19~24 lb)
• Pre-Printed : 75~90g/m²(20~24 lb)
• Recycled : 60~90g/m²(16~24 lb)
• CardStock : 105~163g/m² (28~43lb)
• Letterhead : 71~90g/m² (19~24lb)
• Cotton paper : 75~90g/m² (20~24lb)
• H/W Install Detect: Yes
• Paper Empty & Low Level Detect: Yes
Sensing
• Paper Type Detect: No
• Paper Size Detect: Yes
Optional High-Capacity Feeder(HCF) N/A
Capacity
500 sheets @ 20lb (80g/m²)
(FaceDown)
Output Stacking Offset Stacking No
Output Full
Yes
sensing
Capacity 50 sheets stapling / 350 (in total) sheets stacking, internal
Staple Cartridge
5000 staples / cartridge
capacity
• Top Tray : 50 sheets with 80g/m² sheet
Stacking
• Finishing Tray : 300 sheets with 80g/m² sheet
Standard Finisher Stapling 1 Corner (Single)
Offline Stapling No
Offset at Non
No
Staple job
Offset at Staple job Yes
Output Stacking Face Down
3250-sheet Booklet Finisher N/A
Punch Kit N/A

Item Specification
Supporting Yes
Legder, A3, Letter, Legal, Oficio, Folio, A3, A4, JIS B5, ISO B5, Executive, A5,
Media sizes
Statement, Custom
Automatic Duplex
Media types
Media weight 60~175g/m²(16~46 lb)
Capacity 100 sheets ( 21lb, 80 g/m²)
2-sided Document
Yes
Scanning
• Width: 128 ~ 297 mm
Document Size
• Length : 128 ~ 432 mm
• 40~128 g/m² @simplex
ADF Document Weight
• 50~128 g/m² @duplex
• Paper empty detect : Yes
Sensing • Paper width detect : Yes
• Paper length detect : Yes
Auto Detected Size
A3, A4, A4 SEF, A5, A5 SEF, B4, B5, B5 SEF
Sensing

2.2.8. Supplies
Item Model Name Average yield

Black CLT-K809S 20,000 pages
Yellow CLT-Y809S 15,000 pages
Toner Cartridge
Magenta CLT-M809S 15,000 pages
Cyan CLT-C809S 15,000 pages
CLT-R809
Drum Unit NOTE Approx. 50,000 pages
Drum Units are exchangeable for all colors.
Approx 26,300 pages

Waste Toner Container CLT-W809 @ Color : Mono Ratio (30% :
70%), 3 Pages/Job
NOTE
• Declared yield value in accordance with 5% coverage.
• Depending on the print pattern and job mode used, the consumable’s lifespan may differ.
2.2.9. Maintenance Parts
Item Part Code Life

JC96-06222A (K)
JC96-06219A (Y)
Developer Unit 300,000 pages
JC96-06220A (M)
JC96-06221A (C)
ITB JC96-06200A 300,000 pages
ITB Cleaner JC96-06246A 150,000 pages
Transfer roller Assy JC95-01514A 150,000 pages
• JC91-01063A (220V)
Fuser Unit 150,000 pages
• JC91-01064A (110V)
Pick-Up / Reverse / Forward roller (for Tray1,2,3,4,
JC93-00540A 200,000 pages
MP Tray)
DADF Pick-Up roller Assy JC97-04009A 200,000 pages
DADF Friction Pad JC97-03097A 100,000 pages
NOTE
Depending on the print patterns and job mode used, the lifespan may differ.

2.2.10. Option
CLX-9301 CLX-9251 CLX-9201

Image Item Model
series series series
DCF
(Dual Cassette CLX-PFP100/SEE Yes Yes Yes
Feeder)
Finisher CLX-FIN50S/SEE Yes Yes Yes
Job Separator CLX-JST100/SEE Yes Yes Yes
CLX-FAX160/XXX
NOTE
Fax Yes Yes Yes
XXX : SEE, XEG,
XEU, XIL
Cabinet Stand CLX-DSK20T Yes Yes Yes
FDI Kit CLX-KIT10F Yes Yes Yes

CLX-9301 CLX-9251 CLX-9201

Image Item Model
series series series
Working Table CLX-WKT000 Yes Yes Yes
Card Reader Cover

CLX-CRH002 Yes Yes Yes
Assy
Cassette Heater CLX-DHK12C Yes Yes Yes
SmarThru Workflow
Yes Yes Yes
V1.0
Wireless LAN CLX-NWA20L Yes Yes Yes

2.3. Machine External View
1) Front View1
1 Duplex automatic document feeder cover 8 Dual cassette feeder (tray 3, tray 4)
2 Duplex automatic document feeder width 9 Standard tray (tray 1, tray 2)
guides
10 Front door
3 Duplex automatic document feeder input tray
11 Front door handle
4 Duplex automatic document feeder output tray
12 Paper output tray
5 Power-switch
13 Control panel
6 Power receptacle
7 Optional dual cassette feeder right bottom door

2) Front View2
1 Scanner glass
2 White sheet
3 Multi-purpose tray
4 Multi-purpose tray paper width guide
5 USB port

3) Rear View
1 DADF Cable
2 Network Port
3 USB Port
4 USB Printer Port

4) Inner view
1 LSU window cleaning stick

2 Waste toner container
3 Toner Cartridges
4 Imaging units

2.4. Feeding System
2.4.1. Feeding System Overview
The feeding system picks up a paper from the cassette or MP tray and transports it to the machine inside. It mainly consists
of the pick up unit, registration unit, transfer roller Assy, Exit unit.

2.4.2. Main Components and functions
a) Rollers
1 Tray 1 Paper tray 6 Tray 2 pick up / reverse / forward rollers

2 Tray 2 Paper tray 7 Tray 3 pick up / reverse / forward rollers (Option)
3 Tray 3 Paper tray(Option) 8 Tray 4 pick up / reverse / forward rollers (Option)
4 Tray 4 Paper tray(Option) 9 MP Tray pick up / reverse / forward rollers
5 Tray 1 pick up / reverse / forward rollers 10 Tray 1 feed roller

11 Tray 2 feed roller 17 Roller Exit 1st

12 Tray 3 feed roller (Option) 18 Roller Exit 2nd (Option)
13 Tray 4 feed roller (Option) 19 Roller Invert
14 Sensor registration 20 Roller Duplex1
15 Roller registration 21 Roller Duplex2
16 Roller transfer
• Pick-Up roller (Tray 1,2,3,4 and MP Tray)

- This roller picks up the paper from the tray.
• Forward roller (Tray 1,2,3,4 and MP Tray)
- This roller is placed against the reverse roller. It transports the paper from the pick up roller to feed roller.
• Reverse roller (Tray 1,2,3,4 and MP Tray)
- This roller is placed against the forward roller and transports only one sheet to the feed roller. When two sheets of
paper or more are transported from the pick up roller, the load of the torque limiter of the reverse roller is heavier
than the frictional force between the sheets. As a result, the reverse roller is stopped and the lower paper does
not advance any further.
• Feed roller
- This roller transports the paper sent from the forward/reverse roller to the registration roller.
• Registration roller
- This roller aligns the leading edge of the paper and transports the paper to the transfer roller Assy.

b) Sensor, Motor, Solenoid

Name Function Connector & Pin information

Tray1 paper size detection sensor Detects tray1 paper size CN4@ MAIN PBA, 19Pin
Tray1 paper empty detection sensor Detects tray1 paper empty CN27@ MAIN PBA, 3Pin
Tray1 upper limit detection sensor Detects tray1 upper limit CN27@ MAIN PBA, 6Pin
Tray1 paper feed jam detection sensor Detects Feed1 jam CN27@ MAIN PBA, 8Pin
Tray2 paper size detection sensor Detects tray2 paper size CN4@ MAIN PBA, 23Pin
Tray2 paper empty detection sensor Detects tray2 paper empty CN27@ MAIN PBA, 20Pin
Tray2 upper limit detection sensor Detects tray2 upper limit CN27@ MAIN PBA, 23Pin
Tray2 paper feed jam detection sensor Detects Feed2 jam CN27@ MAIN PBA, 25Pin
Paper regi. jam detection sensor Detects regi. jam CN31@ MAIN PBA, 12Pin
Paper curl detection sensor Detects paper curl between T2 Roller CN26@ MAIN PBA, 18Pin, 21Pin
and fuser unit
Paper fuser-out jam detection sensor Detects fuser unit jam CN26@ MAIN PBA, 12Pin
Exit tray1 paper full detection sensor Detects paper full on Exit tray1 CN19@ MAIN PBA, 6Pin
Exit2 tray path &Return path solenoid Change paper path CN19@ MAIN PBA, 11Pin
Duplex motor Controls duplex driving CN26@ MAIN PBA, 6Pin~9Pin
Duplex jam detection sensor Detects duplex jam CN26@ MAIN PBA, 24Pin
Exit tray 2 paper full detection sensor Detects paper full on Exit tray2 CN19@ MAIN PBA, 18Pin
Exit tray 2 paper return detection sensor Detects Duplex Return position CN19@ MAIN PBA, 15Pin
MPF(Multi-Purpose Feeder) Paper Detects MP tray paper empty CN26@ MAIN PBA, 3Pin
empty detection sensor
NOTE
If paper is loaded in the MP tray, that

tray takes priority over trays 1,2,3, or
4.
MPF(Multi-Purpose Feeder) solenoid Controls MPF pick up roller CN26@ MAIN PBA, 4Pin
Tray1 Lift motor Lifting Knock up plate CN27@ MAIN PBA, 10Pin~13Pin
Tray2 Lift motor Lifting Knock up plate CN27@ MAIN PBA, 14Pin~17Pin

2.4.3. Cassette (Tray 1,2,3,4)
The Cassette stores papers.
Paper size is set using the Size Guides in each tray.
Basic Cassette
• Specification
1) Structure : Drawer Type
2) Capacity : 520 Sheets ( 80 g/m² paper standard)
3) Paper
- Tray 1 : A5, A4, B5, B4, Letter, Statement, Legal
- Tray 2,3,4 : A5, A4, A3, B5, B4, Letter, 11"×17"(Ledger), Statement, Legal
4) Weight : plain paper 60~216 g/m² (16~44 lb)
5) Plate knock up lift type : Lift Motor + Up Limit Sensor

2.4.4. Pick-Up Unit
When pick-up takes place, the pickup roller moves down to come into contact with the surface of the paper. If the cassette is
installed, the LEVER-INPUT CST is pushed and pick up roller moves down. The forward roller and the reverse roller
serve to make sure that a single sheet of paper is moved to the paper path, and the paper is moved as far as the registration
roller by the work of the feed roller.
NOTE
The Pick-Up Unit1 and Pick-Up Unit2 can’t be swapped over.
Pick–Up Unit1
Pick–Up Unit2

2.4.5. Registration Unit
The registration(Regi.) roller is driven by the Regi./MP motor. The Regi. clutch is located between the Regi. clutch and
Regi./MP motor, and it controls ON/OFF of the registration roller in order to match paper and an image on the drum at the
predetermined registration point.

2.4.6. MPF(Multi-Purpose Feeder) Unit
The MPF Unit allows feeding of specialty media stock, envelopes, and custom size paper.
■ Specification
1) Capacity : 100 sheets (80g/m² paper standard)
2) Media Size : Max 11. 7” ×17” (297×432 ) / Min 3.87”×5.8” (98×148 )
3) Media Weight : Plain paper 60 ~ 176 g/m² (16~65lb)
4) Feeding Speed : 30 ppm (CLX-9301 series), 25ppm(CLX–9251 series), 20 ppm (CLX-9201 series) Letter/A4 LEF
(Long Edge Feeding)
■ Paper Separation
When the MP paper detection[A] sensor detects paper and the machine gets a MP printing job, the MP solenoid[B] drops the
pick-up roller[C] onto the top of the paper stack on the MP tray.
This machine uses an FRR (Feed and Reverse Roller) system for feeding paper. The friction between the reverse roller[E]
and forward roller[D] separates the top sheet of paper from the stack.

2.5. Image Creation
2.5.1. Printing process overview
This machine uses four imaging units and four laser beams for color printing. Each Imaging unit consists of a Drum
unit and Developer unit.
Each Drum unit has an OPC drum, Charge roller, Cleaning blade.
The OPC drum [A] is charged with a negative voltage and is exposed by the light from the LSU (Laser Scanning unit) [B].
The light produced by the laser creates a latent image by discharging on the surface of the OPC drum. The negatively
charged toner is attracted to the latent drum image due to an electric field. The toner (real image) on each OPC drum is
moved to the transfer belt[C] by the positive bias applied to the first transfer roller. All four toners (color image) are
transferred to the paper by a positive charge applied to the second transfer roller[D].
1) OPC drum charge : The charge roller gives the drum a negative charge.
2) Laser exposure : Light produced by a laser diode hits the charged OPC through the lens and mirrors.
3) Development : The developing roller carries negatively charged toner to the latent image on the drum surface. This
machine uses four independent imaging units (one for each color).
4) Transfer :
• Image transfer : The first transfer rollers opposite the OPC drums transfer toner from the drums to the transfer
belt. Four toner images are super-imposed onto the belt.
• Paper transfer : The second transfer roller transfers the toner from the transfer belt to the media.
5) Cleaning for OPC drum : The cleaning blade remove remaining toner on the drum surface after image transfer
to the paper.
6) Quenching for OPC drum : Quenching is done by illuminating the whole area of the drum with the laser at the end
of every job.
7) Cleaning and quenching for transfer belt : The cleaning blade clean the belt surface. The grounding roller inside the
transfer belt unit removes the remaining charge on the belt.

2.5.2. Imaging Unit
2.5.2.1. Imaging Unit Overview
This machine uses the tandem type imaging unit. It makes 4 color developing during one paper path and increase the
productivity for color printing.
Each Imaging Unit consists of the Drum unit and the Developer unit. The Developer units are not exchangeable but the
Drum units are exchangeable. The diameter of the drum is 30 mm (circumference: about 94.2 mm).
The developing gap between a drum and the corresponding magnetic roller cannot be adjusted. The CRUM is the sub part of
the Drum unit. It stores the count information and several data.

2.5.2.2. Drum drive
Each color OPC and Magnetic roller is driven by each color motor. The OPC Drum and Magnetic roller are supplied with
power from the coupling.
The BLDC motor maintains the constant speed. So, the speed sync for each color depends on the BLDC motor without
the additional device.
Phase sync for each OPC runout prints the pattern on the ITB and is adjusted by the data automatically.

2.5.2.3. Developer Unit
This machine uses a dual-component development system and has four Developer units. Each new unit contains 185g of
magnetic toner carrier. The developer in each unit is supplied to the magnetic(development) roller[A] by the two mixing
augers[B]. The diameter of the magnetic roller is 16 mm.
Each Developer unit has a TC(Toner Concetration) sensor[C]. They are used for controlling the operating range of toner
density.

■ Developer Circulation
Two mixing augers[A] circulate the developer forward and backward to agitate the developer in order to mix the developer
and toner well.
This occurs at the following times :
• During the process control self-checking

• During toner supply job
• During development job
If the developer unit is stored at temperature above 50°C (122°F), it does not works normally. The toner in developer
unit is easy to harden at temperature above 50°C (122°F).

2.5.3. ITB (Intermediate Transfer Belt) Unit
2.5.3.1. ITB Unit overview
The toner on the four drums is moved to the ITB by the first transfer roller (T1 roller).
The image overlapped by four colors is moved to the paper by the second transfer roller (T2 roller). The remaining toners
are removed by the cleaning blade and moved to the waste toner container.
This process is done with one rotation of the ITB. The arrow on the diagram shows the direction of ITB rotation. The
rotation is made by the friction between the drive roller and transfer belt. The tension roller provides tension to prevent slip.
There are three ACR(Auto Color Registration) sensor and one photo sensor. Two of them are for the line position adjustment
and the other is for process control. One photo sensor controls the position of the first transfer roller.
1 ITB (Intermediate Transfer Belt)

2 1st Transfer Roller
3 ITB Drive Roller
4 Tension Roller
5 Photo sensor
6 Cleaning Blade
7 ACR sensor
8 2nd Transfer Roller
9 Toner Collection Auger
10 Drum Unit

2.5.3.2. Transfer belt drive
■ Drive motor
The ITB drive motor[A] drives the transfer belt[B] by using gears and the ITB drive roller[C].
■ ITB speed control

This printer uses the encoder disc to control the transfer belt speed. The encoder[A] is on one of the guide rollers[B]. This
encoder checks the rotation speed of the transfer belt. The controller analyzes the signals from the encoder. Then it adjusts
the rotation speed of the transfer belt.
The encoder contains a disk that has 550 notches on its surface. These notches are read by the sensor [C]. The controller
counts the number of notches that the sensor has read in the unit of time. If the sensor has read an unusually large number
of notches or an unusually small number of notches, the controller ignores such unusual signals. Therefore, an incorrect
reading does not affect the rotation speed.

2.5.3.3. Transfer belt cleaning
The ITB-cleaner removes toner (during printing) and the ACR sensor patterns (during process control or automatic line
position adjustment) from the belt. Belt cleaning is completed while the transfer belt makes one rotation. The ITB
drive motor drives the ITB-cleaning motor.
The cleaning blade[A] in the ITB cleaner always contacts the transfer belt[B], and removes the used toner from the belt.
Then the toner collection auger[C] transports the waste toner to the waste toner container.
The film[D] on the ITB cleaner protects against toner contamination. The driving power by driver roller is transferred to the
tension roller[E] and the toner collection auger gear[F] drives the gear[G], and collects the toner.

2.6. Fuser unit
This section describes the image fusing process used by the machine.
2.6.1. Fuser unit overview
This unit fuses the toner that was transferred by the transfer roller onto the paper, by applying heat and pressure to complete
the fusing process. This machine uses an instant fusing system. This has a faster warm-up time than a conventional
fusing and pressure roller system.
1) Halogen Lamp
The fuser unit has two halogen lamps. One heats the center of the fusing belt, the other heats the end of axial direction.
These halogen lamps are lit alternately to heat the fusing belt. Each lamp has its coil in a different location. The coil of
the center heater lamp is in the center, those of the side heater lamp are on both sides. The lamp s are fixed inside of
the fusing belt. When rotating the fusing belt, these lamps does not rotate.
2) Fusing Belt
The fusing belt gets heat from the halogen lamp and transfer it to toner and paper. The fusing belt consists of three
thin-layers. The thin fusing belt reduces warming up time and mode changing time. To prevent the fusing belt from
adhering to the toner, the surface of the fuser belt is fluorinated. There is a Nip inside the fusing belt. To maintain the
proper Nip between the fusing belt and pressure roller, the spring is used.
3) Pressure Roller
The pressure roller is a rubber roller which ensures proper nip width between the pressure roller and fusing belt. It is
driven by the driving system and drives the fusing belt.
4) Non-Contact(NC) Sensor
NC sensors (non-contact type thermistors), located near the center and the end of the fusing belt, control the temperature
of the fusing belt.

5) Thermostat
Thermostats cut off the power supply to the halogen lamp by opening the circuit when the fusing belt becomes
abnormally hot as a result of problems such as NC sensor malfunction. These thermostats are used to prevent abnormal
operation. When the thermostat is triggered, it must be replaced (as well as the other damaged parts in the fuser unit).
2.6.2. Fuser Unit drive
The fuser motor[A] drives the pressure roller[B] through the gear train. The fusing belt[C] pressurized by the pressure
roller[B] is rotated by driving it.

2.6.3. Fuser unit temperature control
When the main switch turns on, the CPU turns on the fusing lamp. The lamp stays on until the NC sensors detect the
standby temperature. Then the CPU raises the temperature up to the printing temperature.
■ Overheat Protection
The CPU cuts power to the fusing lamp in the following cases :
• The temperature detected by the NC sensors keeps higher than 240°C for 20 sec.
The following components are used when thermistor overheat protection fails :
• Two thermostats get into line with the common ground wire of the fusing lamp.
• If one of the thermostat temperatures becomes higher than 195°C, it opens and cuts power to the fusing lamp. If the
other thermostat temperature becomes higher than 195°C, it also opens and cuts power to the fusing lamp.

2.7. Laser scanning unit (LSU)
2.7.1. LSU overview
LSU consists of 1 polygon motor and 4 laser diodes(LD) units and forms a latent image on the surface of 4 OPC drums. For
this process, LSU has a collimator lens, cylindrical lens, 2 F-Theta Lens, 2 reflective mirrors on optical path for each color.
This LSU adopted the cross scan type scanning. K Color and C Color scan the laser beam from the rear to the front, M Color
and Y Color scan the laser beam from the front to the rear.
Also, the LSU has a skew adjustment function which adjusts the scanning line and the shutter device to protect the glass on
the LSU optical path from the contamination.
1 LD PBA 6 Shutter
2 P/Mirror Motor 7 PD PBA
3 F1 Lens
4 F2 Lens
5 Skew Adjust Assy

2.7.2. Laser Scanning Optical path
The laser beam from the LSU is placed at intervals of 78mm for each color. All colors uses the same polygon motor for
oblique incidence.
F2 Lens [A] determines the slope of the primary scanning line and the image position of the secondary scanning
direction. This is adjusted at the factory. The primary scanning line slope by the machine difference is adjusted by skew
adjustment in the LSU
Reflecting mirrors [C], [D] on each color path adjust the curvature of primary scanning. This is adjusted at the factory.
The LSU has 2 types depending on printing speed. The difference between 2 types is shown in the table below.
Mode 20ppm 30ppm Remark

LD Unit Laser Diode : Single Beam Laser Diode : Single Beam
driving IC : for Single LD driving IC : for Single LD
P/Motor speed 27,874 rpm 34016 rpm
Process speed 118 mm/sec 144 mm/sec
H/W interface Interface with machine : 50 Interface with machine : 50 FFC cable
Pin Pin

2.7.3. Laser synchronizing detectors
The machine has two beam detector sensor boards (PD PBA). They are located at each corner of the laser optics-housing unit.
The two PD PBA detect the following :
• [A]: Scanning start position for black

• [B]: Scanning start position for yellow
This machine recognizes each color from the time that they are detected.
■ Main Scan Start Detection

4 beams are detected by the PD PBA at the scanning start point and create the horizontal sync (Hsync) signal. Data is
scanned by Hsync.
The arrow in the above diagram shows the data scanning direction for each color. Black (& Cyan) and Yellow (& Magenta)
use the same polygon motor scanning in opposite directions.

2.7.4. Automatic line position adjustment
During automatic line position adjustment, the line patterns below are created eight times on the transfer belt. The spaces
between the lines (KK, CC, MM, YY, KC, KM, KY) are measured by the front, center, and rear ID sensors. The controller
takes the average of the spaces, then adjusts the following positions and magnification :
• Sub scan line position for CMY

• Main scan line position for CMY
• Magnification ratio for CMY
• Skew for CMY
The transfer belt-cleaning unit cleans the transfer belt after the patterns are measured.
• KK, CC, MM, YY: Spaces between two lines of the same color.
• KC, KM, KY: Spaces between a black line and each color line.

■ Adjustment
• Sub Scan Line Position for CMY
The adjustment of the sub-scan line position for CMY is based on the line position for K. The machine measures the gaps
between the lines of each color in the pattern on the transfer belt. When the gaps for a color are not correct, the machine
moves the image of the color up or down the sub scan axis. To do this, it changes the laser write timing for that color.
• Main Scan Line Position for CMY

When the machine detects that the image is out of position in the main scan direction, it changes the laser write start
timing for each scan line.
• Magnification Adjustment for CMY

When the machine detects that magnification adjustment is necessary, it changes the LD clock frequency for the
required color.
• Skew for CMY

The adjustment of the skew for CMY is based on the line position for K.
■ Adjustment Conditions
Line position adjustment can be turned on or off. However, it is normally recommended to turn on this function.
Line position adjustment timing depends on several settings. These settings include the following :
• ΔT = Temperature change of LSU (Laser Scanning Unit) between the temperature of the previous line position
adjustment and the current temperature.
• Pages = Total printed pages after previous line position adjustment.

Interval During Print Job :
Line position adjustment interrupts printing and then starts automatically when one of these conditions occurs when the
machine checks at the sheet interval.
1) ΔT > Temperature threshold (LSU temperature: [default: 3°C])
2) Pages > Output threshold for all outputs (default: 500 pages)
Waste Toner Container Not-Installed / Installed :
1) Line position adjustment starts automatically when waste toner container is removed and reinstalled.
Drum Unit or Developer Unit replaced :
1) When the machine detects a new drum unit or developer unit, line position adjustment is automatically performed.
ITB replaced :
1) When the machine detects a new ITB or other ITB, SVC engineer have to execute the adjustment manually.

■ Main Scan Skew Adjustment
Skew adjustment assembly[A] consists of the worm gear[1] for adjustment and worm gear[2]. When ACR executes,
it detects and adjusts the scanning line slope manually.
Skew adjustment assembly[A] for magenta, cyan, and yellow adjusts the skew angle of the F2 lens[B]. This mechanism
corrects main scan skew.

2.7.5. Shutter Mechanism
Laser scanning unit has the shutter[A]. As a result, toner and dust do not fall on the glass[B]of the laser optics housing.
When the waste toner container is installed, it push the side of the shutter and shutter door is opened. On the contrary to this,
when the waste toner is not installed, shutter door is closed.
• Shutter off : Printing is impossible. Shutter door is closed. Waste toner container is not installed.
• Shutter on : Printing is possible. Shutter door is opened. Waste toner container is installed.
When the shutter is not on at printing, the LSU Unit Failure error will occur.

2.8. Drive System
2.8.1. Drive Motors
The following diagram displays the locations of the printer drive motors.
No. Motor Motor type Qty Function

1 Exit PM-STEP 1 Exit driving
(Reverse driving at Duplex job)
2 Fuser BLDC 1 Fuser driving/Fuser pressure mode
(Reverse driving at pressure mode)
3 Regi / MP BLDC 1 Regi / MP driving
E-CLT 2 Regi / MP driving control
4 Feed HB-STEP 1 Feed 1 / 2 Roll driving
5 Pick-Up PM-STEP 2 Pick-Up Roll / CST Lift driving
(Reverse driving at CST Lift driving)
6 Toner supply DC 4 Toner transfer in toner cartridge driving Duct
7 OPC / DEVE BLDC 4 OPC/DEVE driving

No. Motor Motor type Qty Function

8 ITB BLDC 1 ITB driving
9 T1 Dis/En PM-STEP 1 T1 Dis/Engage
10 Waste toner container PM-STEP 1 Waste toner container leveling

2.8.2. Main Drive Unit (OPC, DEVE, ITB, T1 DIS/ENG)
Front View
Rear View

2.8.3. Pick Up Drive
The following is a diagram of the Pick-up drive:
Power Train Pick-up : rotating (Pick-up input) / counter rotating (Cst LIFT input)
• 1 Step → rotating → 2 Gear (Pick-up driving)
• 1 Step → counter rotating → 3 Gear → 4 Gear → 5 Gear → 6 Gear (CST Lift driving)

2.8.4. Regi/ MP Drive
The following is a diagram of the drives that power the MP, Regi systems:
Power Train Regi/MP : BLDC driving, Clutch driving control

• 1 BLDC → 2 Gear → 3 Gear → 4 Clutch / Gear (Regi. driving)
• 1 BLDC → 2 Gear → 5 Gear → 6 Gear → 7 Clutch / Gear (MP driving)

2.8.5. Feed Drive
Power Train Feed : HB-STEP driving

• 1 HB-STEP → 2 Gear → 3 Gear (Feed1 driving)
• 1 HB-STEP → 2 Gear → 4 Gear (Feed2 driving)

2.8.6. Fuser/Exit Drive
The following diagram displays the locations of the Fuser and Exit drives:
Power Train • Fuser / Fuser pressure mode : BLDC Motor driving, Reverse driving at fuser pressure mode
• Exit : Step Motor driving, Reverse driving at duplex mode
• Fuser and Fuser relase One way gear is adopted.
• 1 BLDC → Rotation→ 2 Gear → 3 Gear (Fuser driving)
• 1 BLDC → Counter rotation → 4 Gear → 5 Gear → 6 Gear (Fuser pressure mode driving)
• 7 PM STEP → 8 Gear (Exit driving)

2.8.7. Waste Toner Container Drive
Power Train Step motor & Gear-RDCN WTB : Waste toner container driving
• 1 PM STEP → 2 Gear-RDCN WTB (Waste toner container driving)
2.8.8. Toner Supply Drive
Power Train DUCT & Bottle driving

• 1 DC Motor → 2 Gear RDCN SUPPLY → 5 Gear DUCT (DUCT driving)
• 1 DC Motor → 2 Gear RDCN SUPPLY → 3 Gear SUPPLY IDLE → 4 Gear SUPPLY (Bottle driving)

2.9. Scanner System
This section describes the printer scanner system parts and functions.
2.9.1. Scanner System Overview
During the scanning process, the surface of a document is exposed to Full Rate(FR) module light.
The light reflected from the paper is led through mirrors, a lens, and a slit to a CCD where optical-to-electrical conversion is
performed, converting the optical image data into an electrical (analog) signal.
This analog signal is changed to a digital signal, which then undergoes various corrective processes necessary for image
formation. After that, arithmetic operations are performed on the digital signal, which is then transmitted to the data
writing processor.
In this machine, a reduction-type CCD for color processing is used. CCD is arranged in 3 lines and covered with color
filters (Red, Green, and Blue).
2.9.2. Scanning System Components
The following shows the construction and purpose of the scanning system :
1) DADF glass
The DADF glass is used when a document is read by the Automatic Document Feeder. The light from the White-LED is
illuminated on the Document through this glass.
The document is transported on the DADF glass by the DADF operation.
Do not use such solvents, as alcohol when cleaning the surface of the DADF glass, as it is coated so as not to be
scratched by Document.

2) FR(Full Rate)-Module
FR-Module is consists of the White-LED , Light-Guide, mirror-1 etc.
It is driven by the scan motor (HB Step Motor) and scans the document on the glass.
• White-LED
This is a light source for scanning the document on the glass. ( There are 4 White-LEDs. (Front 2 EA, Rear 2 EA)
• Light-Guide
This is to efficiently transfer the light creating WLED to the surface of the document . made of the transparent
Plastic Regin.
• Mirror-1
This mirror directs the light reflected from the Document to the mirror-2
3) HR(Half Rate)-Module
HR-Module mainly consists of the mirror-2, mirror-3, etc. The reflected light on document is passed from the mirror-1
through the mirrors-2 and -3 to the lens. HR module is driven by the same scan motor as that of the FR module.
The speed and distance are half that of the FR module.

4) Lens
The light reflected from the mirror-3 is concentrated to the CCD. The distance between the Lens and CCD is aligned
accurately.
5) CCD board
Processes such as signal amplification, signal integration, and A/D conversion are applied on the electrical signal
which was converted by the CCD.
6) Auto Paper Sensor

The size of an original placed on the glass is instantly detected using the Auto Paper Sensor fixed on the Align-frame.
7) Pulley-Driving
The Steel Wire is coiled to this part and rotated by the scan motor. This also transfers the power to move the FR/HR
module.

2.10. Duplex Automatic Document Feeder(DADF)
2.10.1. DADF overview
Symbol Part Function
R1 Simplex and Duplex Regi. Aligns the leading edge of the paper for registration.
roller
R2 DADF forward roller Separates an original from the tray and transfers it to the paper path.
R3 DADF friction pad Prevent the multi-feeding.
R4 DADF pick up roller Picks up an original from the tray.
R5 Original document tray Paper input tray
R6 Exit tray Paper output tray
R7 Exit roller Sends an original to the exit tray and forms the duplex reverse path.
R8 Feed in roller Feeds an original before scanning.
R9 Feed out roller Transfers a scanned original to the exit roller.

2.10.2. Electrical parts location
Symbol Description Part code Controller board

S1 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER 0604-001415 PBA-ADF
(Cover)
(Regi)
(Detect)
(Exit Idle)
(Paper Length)
(Paper Width)
(Exit)
S8 BLCD MOTOR 0604-001393 PBA-ADF
S9 CLUTCH-ELECTRIC 0604-001393 PBA-ADF
(Pick Up)
S10 CLUTCH-ELECTRIC 0604-001393 PBA-ADF
(Regi)

2.10.3. DADF Drive System
DADF consists of one motor and two clutch to transfer the paper.
• A BLDC motor drives the system for simplex and duplex job.
• The Pick up and Regi clutch controls the driving on/off.
• The Cam type gear and solenoid is used for duplex reverse.

2.10.3.1. DADF Original Drive Assembly
After detecting the paper, one motor controls the drive system totally.
The CLUTCH-ELECTRIC provides the power to pick up the paper.
The CLUTCH can’t rotate inversely. The Spring that is included in DADF-GUIDE PICK UP ASS’Y is connected to
COVER-OPEN. When the CLUTCH does not drive, it makes Stand-by status and fix the stopper operation.
The ADF roller and Pick up Roller is connected by the belt.
The ADF roller is provided with the power while the paper is picked up and transferred to the Registration roller. When the
pick up drive is stopped and Registration roller is driven, the ADF roller become idle.
The normal process is :
• When the original is setting up, the detect-sensor is activated, and printing job starts, the motor and pick up clutch work.
Then, the pick-up roller moves down and contacts an original in the tray.
• When the Registration sensor detects the paper, the pick up clutch stops.
• When the Detect-Sensor detects that the tray is empty, the motor stops and the machine enters stand-by status.

2.10.3.2. DADF Registration (Regi) Drive Assembly
The Regi drive uses the CLUTCH-ELECTRIC to drive the Registration Roller and transfer the paper to ROLLER FEED.
The Registration Roller aligns the leading edge of the original. When original is placed in the Nip, the roller is rotated
for alignment.
The CLUTHC-ELETRIC repeats on/off to align each paper.
The GEAR-KNOB and GEAR-REDUCTION uses the BELT to provide the PULLEY connecting ROLLER-EXIT with the
power. This structure makes the user remove the jammed paper easily.
2.10.3.3. DADF Feed Drive Assembly
The ROLLER FEED is driven by the BELT-TIMMING that is connected to Motor.
The ROLLER-FEED and ROLLER-M IDLE SCF make the feeding force by using a spring pressure method.
The Motor transfers the paper through interlocking the Roller-Feed in and the Roller-Feed out. At scan, the Motor is driven
continually to maintain stable paper transfer.

2.10.3.4. DADF Exit Drive Assembly
The power from the Motor is transferred to GEAR-EXIT and ROLER-EXIT. The paper is transferred to the exit. At
duplex mode, counter rotation occurs.
To keep the pressure of the Exit Roller, the ROLLER-EXIT_IDLE is pressurized by spring. At duplex mode, when it is
rotated inversely, it make the space between rollers to protect the jam.
The space between rollers is adjusted by LINK-EXIT_IDLE and SENSOR-EXIT_IDLE.
2.10.3.5. Original Return Drive
The solenoid works at only duplex mode.
At Duplex Mode, when the motor rotates inversely, the solenoid is on and the GEAR-CAM OUTER and GEAR-EXIT are
driven.
When the GEAR-EXIT rotates, the solenoid drives the GEAR-CAM and it makes the space between the Roller-Exit and
Idle Roller.

2.11. Hardware Configuration
The CLX-9201/9251/9301 Electrical Circuit System consists of the following :
• Main Controller (Main board)

• OPE Controller
• DADF Controller
• HVPS board
• SMPS board
• FDB board
Diagram of the CLX-9201/9251/9301 Series Electrical Circuit

OP E
7” TFT
DCF DADF S CANNER m DDR

MODEM AM3715
FINIS HER 512MB
(S iLab ) CCD/AF
MICOM MICOM NAND US B HOS T
E
256MB P ORT2
Debug1 US B US B
UART CCD I/F
SPI
Debug2 P HY HUB
MS OK IP
LCD
E 2 P ROM SPI SPI UART Re CP
CON 4
32KB
Ch0
I2C
US B US B
I2C I2C HOS T HUB US B HOS T
Ch1
To n er CP U US B HOS T
GL850 P ORT1
Deve
(C4N) US B
GP IO DEV US B DEVICE US B DEVICE
GP IO
CLUTCH
LS U ETHE RGMII P HY 1Gb p s N/W
S OLENOID P WM P WM S ATA NAND DDR
HP VC R
S ENS ORS
600Mhz
UART
32-bit
8-bit
S ATA
FAN
S TEP MOT DDR3 NAND
AVR
BLDC MOT 1GB 128MB
DC MOT
24V
5V
HVP S LS U 320GB
FDB S MP S
2.5”
The main controller handles the video controller, engine controller and scan controller.
The main controller receives print data from the host through the network or USB port, and it receives copy data from the
Scan Controller. It takes this information and generates printable video bitmap data. It controls all modules required to
print, that is, LSU, HVPS, FAN, Fuser, etc.
The main controller communicates with the drive system and other devices through UART(Universal Asynchronous
Receiver Transmitter). It communicates with the toner cartridge and drum/developer unit through I2C to check their life.
The main controller adopted Dure Core CPU 1GHZ, DDR3 1GB memory, Flash NAND 128MB, 320GB SATA HDD to
control the engine driving, video signal processing, interface, etc. successfully.

A MICOM at the main controller controls the fuser lamp on/off and system power according to an optimized energy-saving
algorithm for optimal efficiency. It also communicates with the OPE Controller through the USB 2.0 protocol to display
the system information on LCD.
The OPE Controller displays the status of the system by using the WSVGA TFT LCD in response to user actions or
the main controller.
The soft power switch in the KEY SUB BOARD is used to safely shut down the system power.
The DADF Controller controls some mechanisms required to scan by feeder continuously and communicates with the main
controller to synchronize the scanning timing.
The HVPS board generates high-voltage channels and controls it. The FDB board controls the fuser lamp On/Off. The
SMPS board generates the 5V, 24V for system power.

Circuit Board Locations

The following diagrams show the locations of the printer circuit boards:

2.11.1. Main Controller
The main controller consists of the main processor(Chorus4N), memory(DDR3 1GB), flash(128MB), 1G Ethernet PHY,
USB2.0 HUB, Micom(Power/Fuser control), Scan/Video/UI/FAX signal interface connection, motor driving IC, Engine
signal interface connection, power interface.
The main processor (Dual Core 1GHz CPU) controls video, engine, UI display and communicates the various devices. The
HDD is connected to the main controller by SATA cable and to the other device (DADF, DCF, Finisher, Modem) by UART.
1) Main Controller Diagram

DCF DADF S CANNER
MODEM
AVR FINIS HER OP E
(S iLab ) Mico m Mico m CCD/AFE 7” TFT
m DDR
CCD I/F
AM3715
Debg1 512MB
SPI
UART NAND
Debg2
256MB
MS OK US B US B US B HOS T
SPI IP P HY
E 2 P ROM 32KB LCD HUB P ORT2
I2C GP IO SPI UART Re CP
Ch0
CONT
4
I2C CHORUS 4-N
Ch1
Ch2
US B US B
CORTEX-A9 CORTEX-A9 ARM946
HOS T US B HOS T HUB US B HOS T
Deve To n er 1GHz 1GHz 250MHz
YMCK YMCK GL850 P ORT1
32/32KB 32/32KB 8/8KB
US B
S TEP MOT L2 1MB SRAM 256KB DEV US B DEVICE US B DEVICE
BLDC MOT
GP IO
DC MOT
P WM LS U DDR3 NAND ETHE RGMII P HY 1Gb p s N/W
S ATA
CLUTCH MTR HP VC BUS BUS R
S OLENOID
600Mh z
S ATA
32-b it
S ENS ORS P WM ü Real Time Co n tro l

NAND . S can /En g in e/Fax
DDR3 320GB
HVP S LS U
FAN 1GB 128MB 2.5”
ü XOA Lin u x

2) Main Controller Connection Information
• Connection
1 EXIT 13 FDI I/F 25 MAIN BLDC
2 SATA POWER 14 OPC BLDC 26 ID SENSOR
3 SATA SIGNAL 15 DEVE CRUM/ERASER 27 T1/EXIT/ITB/FUSER
MOTOR
4 CCD 16 SMPS
28 TONER DC
5 USB HOST(OPE) 17 OPC PHASE
29 FUSER DRAWER
6 OPE 18 DCF I/F
30 ITB ENCODER
7 FDI 19 FINISHER I/F
31 SCAN
8 GIGA RJ45 20 LSU JOINT
32 MSOK I/F
9 USH HOST JACK 21 HVPS I/F
33 FAX JOINT
10 USB DEVICE JACK 22 TC SENSOR
11 LSU 23 SIDE
12 HVPS Power 24 CASSETTE

• Information
- Part Code : JC92-02429A
NOTE
This main board is for all models of the CLX-9201/9251/9301 series
- Part Name : PBA-MAIN
3) Master System Operation Key (MSOK)

MSOK PBA is used to store all system information and consists of serial flash memory, a EEPROM and a X-CRUM.The
flash memory(4MByte), EEPROM(256Kbit) and X-CRUM are used for all system operation(system parameter, device
status, tech information, and service information).
NOTE
When a main board needs to be exchanged, the MSOK PBA should be re-installed to the new main board to retain the system
information.
4) FAX JOINT PBA

The FAX JOINT PBA is used for interfacing between the main board and modem PBA. It uses UART for interface.
• Information
- Part Name : PBA-FAX JOINT
• Connection
1 Main PBA I/F connector
2 Modem Card I/F connector

5) Modem Card (Optional)

The modem card is used to transfer and receive the fax data through a telephone line. This PBA is controlled by the main
board and has two connectors, connectors, one for the telephone line connection and the other for an external phone
connection.
• Information
- Fax Kit model name : CLX-FAX160
- Part Code :JC92-02558A
- PBA name : PBA-FAX JOINT
• Connection
1 Fax JOINT I/F connector
2 TEL Line I/F connector
3 External Phone I/F connector
6) Foreign Device Interface (FDI)

The FDI Module as a option is used to track machine usage such as the number of print or copy pages for some special
users. This module interfaces to the main board.
• Information
- PBA name : PBA-SUB FDI
• Connection
1 Connector to Main controller

2.11.2. Operation Panel (OPE) controller
The OPE controller consists of an SOC ( TI AM3715-800MHz ), 256MB mobile DDR1 memory, 256MB NAND flash
memory, 7 inch touch LCD(800x480). The AM3715 is used to interface with users through the touch screen and some
buttons. The AM3715 supports the Graphic Accelation for better UI.
1) OPE controller diagram

2) OPE MAIN PBA
• Information
- Part Code : JC92–02436A
NOTE
This board is for all models of the CLX-9201/9251/9301 series
- Part Name : OPE MAIN

• Connection
1 KEY PBA Interface connector
2 MAIN PBA POWER Interface connector
3 LCD DATA Interface connector
4 MAIN PBA USB Interface connector
5 LCD TSP Interface
6 LCD BACK LIGHT Interface
7 USB Host Port for Memory Stick

3) 7” TFT LCD, TOUCH SCREEN
• Information
- Part Name : LCD/TSP
4) OPE KEY PBA
• Information
- Part Name : OPE KEY
• Connection
1 Interface Connector to OPE Main

2.11.3. ADF PBA
ADF PBA controls the DADF driving. It uses RENESAS’s uPD70F3824(48MHz Main Clock, 256KB Flash memory, 24KB
RAM) and interfaces with MAIN PBA through UART communication. It has one Motor Driver IC for motor driving and
controls one BLDC motor, one solenoid, two clutch, ten sensors.
• Information
- PBA Name : PBA-ADF
• Connection
1 Scan Joint PBA
2 Exit Solenoid
3 Length Sensor 1,2,3 / Width Sensor 1,2
4 Exit Sensor
5 Exit Idle Sensor
6 BLDC Motor
7 Cover Open Sensor / Regi. Sensor / Detect Sensor
8 Pick up Clutch / Regi. Clutch / Scan Read Sensor

2.11.4. SMPS (Switching Mode Power Supply) board
SMPS board supplies electric power to the Main Board and other boards. The voltage provided includes +5V, and +24V
from a 110V/220V power input. It has safety protection modes for over current and overload.
• Specification
General Input/ Output Voltage
1) AC 110V (90V ~ 135V)
2) AC 220V (180V ~ 270V)
3) Input Current: 13.7A (110V) / 6.8A (220V)
4) Output Power: 1500W

- DC 5V : 55W / DC 5VS : 30W / DC 24V : 432W
• Information
110V 220V
Part Code JC44-00093A JC44-00100C
Part Name SMPS Type 5 V1 SMPS Type 5 V2
• Connection
1 INPUT_AC
2 OUTPUT_24V1/2/3/4/5/6 (to DC POWER PBA)
3 SMPS Enable
4 OUTPUT_5V1/2/3/4/S1/S2 (to DC POWER PBA)

• Input / Output connector

- AC Input Connector (CN1)
PIN Assign PIN NO Description
1 AC_L
AC Input
2 AC_N
- AC Input Connector (CN2)

PIN Assign PIN Name Description
1 GND
2 24VOn_Off AC Input
3 GND
- DC Output Connector (CN3)

1 +24V1 Power
2 GND 24V Ground
3 +24V2 Power
4 +GND 24V Ground
5 +24V3 Power
6 GND 24V Ground
7 +24V4 Power
8 GND 24V Ground
- DC Output Connector (CN4)

1 +5V1 Power
2 GND 5V Ground
3 +5V2 Power
4 GND 5V Ground

2.11.5. Fuser Drive Board (FDB)
This board supplies the voltage to Fuser AC, Heater, Main board.
• Information
110V 220V
SEC CODE JC44-00210A JC44-00211A
PBA NAME FDB V1 FDB V2
• Connection
1 Heater I/F
2 Fuser AC
3 FDB I/F
4 Type 5
5 Main S/W
6 Inlet
7 Heater S/W

2.11.6. HVPS board
HVPS board generates 15 high-voltage channels, which include ITHV(4), MHV(4), DEV(4), FUSER, SAW, THV.
• Information
- Part Name : HVPS
• Connection
1 Ithv Y/M/C/K
2 FUSER
3 SAW
4 THV
5 HVPS I/F
6 HVPS VOLTAGE
7 DEV Y
8 MHV Y
9 DEV M
10 MHV M
11 DEV C
12 MHV C
13 DEV K
14 MHV K

2.11.7. Eraser PBA
Eraser PBA has one LED. This LED is used for erasing the negative charges on the surface of the drum after printing.
• Information
• Part Code : JC92–02457A
• Part Name : PBA-ERASER
2.11.8. Fuser PBA
The Fuser PBA includes CRU memory for Fuser Unit Life Cycle counting. It also provides a connection interface for
the pressure sensor.
• Connection
1 Fuser EEPROM, Pressure Sensor I/F
2 Pressure Sensor
• Information
- Part Name : FUSER PBA

2.11.9. Waste Sensor PBA
The Waste Sensor PBA detects the waste toner level inside the waste toner container.
• Information
• Part Name : WASTE SENSOR RX
2.11.10. CRUM PBA
The CRUM PBA includes CRU memory for developer unit, drum unit, toner cartridge life cycle counting.
• Information
• Part Code : JC92-02456A
• Part Name : TONER CRUM
2.11.11. Deve CRUM Joint PBA
The Deve Crum Joint PBA is the interface PBA between the imaging unit(drum unit and developer unit) and the machine.
• Information
• Part Name : DEVE CRUM JOINT

2.11.12. Toner CRUM Joint PBA
The Toner CRUM Joint PBA is the interface PBA between the toner cartridge and the machine.
• Information
• Part Name : TONER CRUM I/F
2.11.13. ITB Encoder PBA
The ITB Encoder PBA provides ITB belt rotation speed information by using a specific photo interrupt sensor (Encoder
Sensor).
• Information
- Part Name : ITB ENCODER
• Connection
1 ITB Encoder Interface

2.11.14. Scan Joint PBA
The Scan Joint PBA has one bipolar step motor drive IC for driving the scanner motor. It functions as connection between
WLED, APS Sensor1, APS Sensor2, Cover Open Sensor1, Cover Open Sensor2, Home Position Sensor and Main PBA.
And it functions as the joint PBA for ADF I/F and 24V, 5V power connectors.
• Information
- Part Name : PBA-SCAN JOINT
• Connection
1 MAIN PBA
2 ADF PBA
3 WLED CTL PBA
4 Scan Motor
5 APS Sensor1,2
6 Home Position Sensor, Cover Open Sensor
1,2

2.11.15. Charge Coupled Device Module(CCDM) PBA
The function of this board is to convert the reflected light from an original document to electrical signals. It includes the
CCD, ADC, Logic IC, etc. The CCD converts the reflected light from an original document to three-color analog signals;
red, green, blue. ADC converts each analog signal to digital. And for high speed data transmission, the digital data signal is
converted to LVDS format with serialization.
• Information
- Part Name : PBA-CCDM
• Connection
1 MAIN PBA

2.11.16. White-LED(WLED) CTL PBA
The WLED CTL PBA has the LED DRIVER IC for WLED light drive.
• Information
- Part Name : PBA-WLED CTL
• Connection
1 Scan Joint PBA
2 WLED AL Front
3 WLED AL Front
2.11.17. White-LED(WLED) AL FRONT PBA
The WLED AL FRONT consists of two WLED used as scanner light. The scanner unit has two WLED AL FRONT PBAs.
• Information
- Part Name : PBA-WLED AL Front
• Connection
1 WLED CTL PBA

2.12. DCF Unit
DCF (Double Cassette Feeder) is an optional device to store more papers.
1) Front sectional view
1 Cassette 3 Pickup Assembly 8 Feed Roller (Cassette 4)

2 Feed Roller (Cassette 3) 9 Idle Roller (Cassette 4)
3 Idle Roller (Cassette 3) 10 Forward Roller (Cassette 4)
4 Forward Roller (Cassette 3) 11 Retard Roller (Cassette 4)
5 Retard Roller (Cassette 3) 12 Pickup Roller (Cassette 4)
6 Pickup Roller (Cassette 3)
7 Cassette 4 Pickup Assembly
2) Paper path
1 Tray3 paper path

2 Tray4 paper path

3) Layout of electrical parts
Ref. Description Parts number DC controller PCB

M1 Feed motor JC31-00033B CN5 3 to 6
M2 Tray3 Pick up motor JC31-00149A CN5 9 to 12
M3 Tray4 Pick up motor JC31-00149A CN5 13 to 16
SW1 Tray3 auto size switch JC32-00013A CN9 1 to 4
SW2 Tray4 auto size switch JC32-00013A CN9 5 to 8
S1 Tray3 feed sensor 0604-001381 CN6 7 to 9
S2 Tray3 limit sensor 0604-001393 CN6 4 to 6
S3 Tray3 paper empty sensor 0604-001393 CN6 1 to 3
S4 Tray4 feed sensor 0604-001381 CN6 16 to 18
S5 Tray4 limit sensor 0604-001393 CN6 13 to 15
S6 Tray4 paper empty sensor 0604-001393 CN6 10 to 12
S7 Door open sensor JC39-01696A CN3 1 to 2

4) Sensor and signal
No. Sensor Signal

1 P_Size_DCF1 Tray3 Paper Size analog signal
3 nP_Empty_DCF1_IHCF Tray3 Paper Empty signal
4 Limit_DCF1_IHCF Tray3 Paper Limit signal
5 Feed_DCF1_IHCF Tray3 Feed signal
6 P_Size_DCF2 Tray4 Paper Size analog signal
8 nP_Empty_DCF2 Tray4 Paper Empty signal
9 Limit_DCF2 Tray4 Paper Limit signal
10 Feed_DCF2 Tray4 Feed signal
11 nDoor_open Door open signal

5) Paper feeding system
No. Name Description

1 Pickup Roller (Cassette 3) This roller transports the paper from the cassette3 or 4.
6 Pickup Roller (Cassette 4)
2 Forward Roller (Cassette 3) This roller transports the paper from the pickup roller to the feed roller.
7 Forward Roller (Cassette 4)
3 Retard Roller (Cassette 3) When two sheets of paper or more are transported from the pickup roller,
8 Retard Roller (Cassette 4) the torque limit load is bigger than the resistance between the sheets. As
the result, retard roller is stopped and the lower paper is not advanced any
further. When the last sheet is transported from the pick up roller, the
retard roller rotates following the feed roller.
4 Feed Roller (Cassette 3) This roller transports the paper from the forward roller to the basic
9 Feed Roller (Cassette 4) machine.
5 Idle Roller (Cassette 3) When the paper is passed at the feed roller, this roller makes paper
10 Idle Roller (Cassette 4) transporting be smooth.
11 nP_Empty_DCF1 This sensor detects the paper in the cassette3 or 4.

14 nP_Empty_DCF2
12 Limit_DCF1_IDCF This sensor detects whether the paper is at pickup position or not.
15 Limit_DCF2_DCF
13 Feed_DCF1_IDCF This sensor detects the leading edge of the paper that is passing on the
16 Feed_DCF2_DCF feed roller.

6) Block Diagram
The DCF board controls all functions for DCF Assy. It consists of CPU, Motor drive IC.
The Micom in the board receives the information from the paper size sensor, empty sensor, feed sensor etc. and
communicates with the copier main board through the UART.
When being received the print job command from the interface connector (CN7) through UART, DCF board drives the feed
motor and pick up motor to pick up a paper.
This board has 2 LEDs. The left LED is for checking 5V power supply and the right LED is checking the micom operation.

7) Plug and jack location list
Connector Connection
Number
CN1 Download tool I/F(Minicube)
CN2 Debug I/F
CN3 Cover open Switch (24V interlock Switch)
CN4 USB I/F
CN5 EMPTY/LIFT/FEED(Tray3,4) Sensor
CN6 FEED / PICKUP3,4 Motor
CN7 Interface with Main
CN9 Papersize sensor(Tray3,4)

2.13. Finisher
1) Front Section View
1 Entrance Sensor 9 Front Door Open Sensor

2 Passthru Sensor 10 Stacker Tray STB Sensor
3 Paddle Home Sensor 11 Stacker Tray Home Sensor
4 Media Height Sensor 12 Paper Feed roller
5 Tamper Home_R Sensor 13 Paper Exit roller
6 Tamper Home_F Sensor 14 Jam door
7 Eject Home Sensor 15 Turning Knob
8 Jam Door Open Sensor
2) Paper Path
1 Finisher Main Tray - Staple / Offset

2 Finisher Top Tray – None Staple

3) Layout of electrical parts
Ref. Part Name Function

S1 SENSOR_TOSHIBA TLP1243(C8) Paddle Home Sensor
S2 SENSOR_TOSHIBA TLP1243(C8) Rear Tamper Home Sensor
S3 SENSOR_TOSHIBA TLP1243(C8) Rear Tamper Home Sensor-LET
S4 AS Sensor_KIA0005C Pass- thru Sensor
S5 AS Sensor_KIA0005C Ejector Home Sensor
S6 SENSOR_TOSHIBA TLP1243(C8) Tray STB Sensor
S7 SM5-108N2-80S-C5 Jam Door Open Sensor
S8 SM5-108N2-80S-C5 Front Cover Open Sensor
S9 SENSOR_TOSHIBA TLP1243(C8) Tray Home Sensor
S10 SENSOR_TOSHIBA TLP1243(C8) Front Tamper Home Sensor
S11 SENSOR_TOSHIBA TLP1243(C8) Media Height Sensor
S12 AS Sensor_KIA0005C Entrance Sensor
M1 ASSY:HB MOTOR:S2M19T Paddle Motor
M2 ASSY:HB MOTOR:S2M19T Feed Motor
M3 ASSY:PM MOTOR:S2M12T Stacker Moving Motor
M4 ASSY:PM MOTOR:S2M12T Rear Tamper Motor
M5 ASSY:PM MOTOR:S2M20T SCU Solenoid
M6 AS-MOTOR DC EJECTOR Ejector Motor
M7 AS-MOTOR PM:Z18:HELICAL Front Tamper Motor
M8 AS-MOTOR PM:STAPLER Stapler Cover Solenoid
M9 AS-MOTOR PM:STAPLER Push Holder Solenoid

4) Block Diagram
5) Plug and jack location list
Connector Connection Connector Connection

CN25 ENGINE Interface CN1 Push holder solenoid
CN18 Door and Cover Switch CN13 Stapler cover solenoid
CN6 Stapler unit CN4 Tamper/Ejector motors and sensors
CN2 Feeder/Paddle motors and sensors CN14 SCU solenoid
CN5 Main tray motor and sensors

2.14. Wireless LAN Option
This option will enable wireless printing without the additional wireless AP.
• Support model
- CLX-9301 / 9251 / 9201 series
- SCX-8128 / 8123 series
- CLX-9352 / 9252 series
- SCX-8240 / 8230 series
- CLX-8650 / 8640 series
• Sales Target Subsidiaries
Region 1st Target 2nd Target
EU SEG / SEI / SEUK / SEF SENA / SEBN / SEPOL / SEAG
North America SEA SECA
• Specification
Item Description
Wireless LAN 2.4 GHz Single Band
IEEE 802.11 b/g/n compliant
Security WEP, WPA-PSK, WMM, WMM-PS, TKIP, and AES hardware acceleration
Wi-Fi WPS(Wi-Fi Protected Setup™) compatible
Wi-Fi Direct™ compatible
NFC NFC (Passive type)
Host Interface USB 2.0
Dimension 205.0*145.0*55.0 mm
Weight 0.16Kg

• Component
1 Wireless Kit • JC63–04415A [COVER-WLAN]

• JC63–04416A [COVER-WLAN LOWER]
• JC92–02308A [PBA-WNPC]
• JC39–02052A [HARNESS-WLAN]
2 USB Extension cable JC39–02053A [HARNESS-WLAN EXTENSION]
3 Internal Harness for JC39–01192A [HARNESS-WIRELESS LAN]
CLX-9x52/SCX-82x0
4 NFC Tag JC68–03012A [LABEL ETC-NFC TECTILE STICKER]
5 NFC Guide Sticker JC68–03048A [LABEL VER-INFORMATION]
NOTE
For installing this option, refer to QIG(Quick Installation Guide).
NFC Tag write

• Summary

1) PIN code
• Check the current PIN code of printer using print report(Network setting).
• Printer : “Setup” → “Reports” → “Print”
• “Wi-Fi Direct Information” > *“WPS-PIN for NFC”
2) NFC Setting
• NFC option of mobile phone should be turned on before using tag writer
- Android 4.1 : Settings → WIRELESS & NETWORKS More… → NFC checkbox
- Android 4.0 : Settings → WIRELESS & NETWORK NFC On
3) NFC Tag Writing App (This application will be issued via service bulletin by HQ CS)
a) Install the App.
b) Run NFC Writer
NOTE
Please turn on the WiFi before checking WPS-PIN for NFC value
c) Search for Wi-Fi Direct printers. Select target printer.

NOTE
Wi-Fi Direct should be turned on in both printer and mobile phone.
d) Model information : Model Name, MAC Address, AAR

Need to insert PIN code if target model supports WFD PIN connection. (NFC model)
e) Touch mobile phone to NFC tag, and then it will show “Tag written successfully” message.
NOTE
If there occurs an error while writing NFC tag, try to touch NFC tag again.


3.1. Precautions when replacing parts
3.1.1. Precautions when assembling and disassembling
• Use only approved Samsung spare parts. Ensure that part number, product name, any voltage, current or temperature
rating are correct. Failure to do so could result in damage to the machine, circuit overload, fire or electric shock.
• Do not make any unauthorized changes or additions to the printer, these could cause the printer to malfunction and
create electric shock or fire hazards.
• Take care when dismantling the unit to note where each screw goes. There are 19 different screws. Use of the wrong
screw could lead to system failure, short circuit or electric shock.
• Do not disassemble the LSU unit. Once it is disassembled dust is admitted to the mirror chamber and will seriously
degrade print quality. There are no serviceable parts inside.
• Regularly check the condition of the power cord, plug and socket. Bad contacts could lead to overheating and firfe.
Damaged cables could lead to electric shock or unit malfunction.
3.1.2. Precautions when handling PBA
Static electricity can damage a PBA, always used approved anti-static precautions when handling or storing a PBA.
• Precautions when moving and storing PBA

1) Please keep PBA in a conductive case, anti-static bag, or wrapped in aluminum foil.
2) Do not store a PBA where it is exposed to direct sunlight.
• Precautions when replacing PBA

1) Disconnect power connectors first, before disconnecting other cables.
2) Do not touch any soldered connections, connector terminals or other electronic parts when handling insulated parts.
• Precautions when checking PBA

1) Before touching a PBA, please touch other grounded areas of the chassis to discharge any static electrical charge
on the body.
2) Take care not to touch the PBA with your bare hands or metal objects as you could create a short circuit or get an
electric shock. Take extra care when handling PBAs with moving parts fitted such as sensors, motors or lamps as
they may get hot.
3) Take care when fitting, or removing, screws. Look out for hidden screws. Always ensure that the correct screw is
used and always ensure that when toothed washers are removed they are refitted in their original positions.

3.1.3. Releasing Plastic Latches
Many of the parts are held in place with plastic latches. The latches break easily; release them carefully.
To remove such parts, press the hook end of the latch away from the part to which it is latched.

3.2. Maintenance
3.2.1. Machine Cleaning for maintenance
3.2.1.1. Cleaning the ACR/CTD sensor window
1. Open the side cover. 3. Close the side cover.
4. Enter the SVC mode. Select “CTD Sensor Cleaning”.

(Diagnostics > Image Management > Auto Color Tone
Adjustment Condition > CTD Sensor Cleaning)
5. When appearing the confirm popup menu, select “Yes”

button on screen.
2. Clean the sensor window[A] by using a soft cloth.

NOTE
If you don’t execute “CTD sensor cleaning” menu on

SVC mode after cleaning the sensor window, the error
message will not disappear.

3.2.1.2. Cleaning the LSU window
1. Open the front cover. Remove the waste toner 3. Insert the LSU window cleaning tool to each color hole.
container[A].
2. Take out the LSU window cleaning tool that is located

on the front cover.
4. Slowly pull out and push the cleaning tool.
5. Repeat step 4 at least 5 times for each LSU window.

3.2.1.3. Cleaning the transfer roller
1. Open the side cover. 2. Clean the transfer roller[A] by using a soft cloth.
3.2.1.4. Cleaning the scan glass
1. Open the DADF Unit. 2. Clean the scan glass[A] by using a soft cloth.

3.2.2. Replacing the maintenance part
3.2.2.1. Drum Unit
1. Open the front cover. 3. Turn the green lever counterclockwise.
2. Remove the waste toner container. 4. Hold the Drum unit and take it out.

3.2.2.2. Developer Unit
1. Turn the machine off. Then remove the corresponding 4. Remove the bracket[A] after removing 2 screws.
drum unit. (Refer to 3.2.2.1) Unplug the connector.
2. Pull down the toner supply shutter.
5. Remove the developer unit.
3. Push the toner supply shutter to the direction of arrow.

And then release the toner supply cap.
NOTE
It is not possible to change the carriers in developer unit

for CLX-9201/9251/9301 series. You must replace the
whole Developer Unit.
6. Install the new developer unit.
7. Turn the machine on while the front cover is opened.
NOTE
1) When replacing the developer unit, SVC engineer

must execute “Life Count Update” and “TC
calibration”.
2) If you turn on the machine after closing the front

cover, toner will be supplied without TC calibration.
It may affect the image quality.
8. When the control panel is activated, select “Developer

Unit” menu. (Information > supply Status > Field
Replacement Unit > Developer Unit)

9. Select the “Developer Unit” for all colors that is 11. Close the front cover.
replaced.
NOTE
10. Push the OK button
TC calibration will start. Please wait until warm-up
operation is completed.

3.2.2.3. ITB Cleaner
1. Open the front cover. 3. Release the ITB Cleaner.
2. Loosen a screw. (Note : Less than torque 6kgf.cm)
3.2.2.4. ITB Unit
1. Remove the ITB cleaner. (Refer to 3.2.2.3) 4. Release the left stopper.
2. Open the side cover.
3. Release the right stopper.

5. Unplug the ITB connector from the right. Pull the 7. Pull out the ITB unit until the green handles are shown
holder to the front. totally. Change your grip and release the ITB unit
perfectly.
6. Remove 2 screws.
8. Before install the new ITB unit, align the CAM

position. (Align 2 arrows)
9. Install the new ITB unit. And then install the ITB
cleaner. (Note : Less than torque 6kgf.cm)

3.2.2.5. Fuser unit
2. Remove the fuser unit after removing 2 screws.
3.2.2.6. Transfer roller
2. Hold and release the both sides of the transfer roller.

3.2.2.7. Pick-Up_Reverse_Forward roller
1. Open the side cover. Remove 2 cassettes. 2. Lift small tap, remove the pick up / reverse/ forward
roller.
NOTE
When replacing these rollers, it is recommended that

you replace all three rollers at the same time.
3. Enter SVC mode. Select the menu. (Information >

Supply Status > Field Replacement Unit). Push “Reset”
button to reset the current count to 0.

3.2.2.8. MP Pick up_Reverse_Forward roller
1. Open the MP tray. Remove the cover[A]. 3. Lift small tap, remove the MP pick up / reverse/ forward
roller.
2. Remove the cover [B].

NOTE
When replacing these rollers, it is recommended that

you replace all three rollers at the same time.


3.2.2.9. DADF Pick-up roller Assy
1. Open the DADF-open cover. 3. Remove the DADF Pick-up roller Assy after releasing
2 hooks.
2. Remove the spring.

3.2.2.10. DADF friction pad
1. Open the DADF-open cover. 2. Remove the DADF friction pad.

3.3. Replacing the main SVC part
3.3.1. Left Cover
1. Remove the left cover after removing 9 screws.
3.3.2. Rear Cover
1. Remove the rear cover after removing 10 screws.

3.3.3. HVPS board
1. Remove the left cover. (Refer to 3.3.1) 3. Unplug the connector. Remove the HVPS board.
2. Remove 4 screws. Release the middle hook.
3.3.4. Temperature Sensor
1. Remove the left cover. (Refer to 3.3.1)
2. Remove the sensor after unplugging the connector.

3.3.5. LSU
1. Remove the left cover. (Refer to 3.3.1)
2. Remove the HVPS board. (Refer to 3.3.3)
3. Remove the bracket after removing 2 screws.
4. Remove 2 screws. Take out the LSU slowly.
CAUTION
If you yank the LSU, the LSU harness may be

damaged.
5. Unplug the LSU harness from the left. Remove the

LSU.

3.3.6. OPE Unit
1. Remove the OPE overlay cover. 4. Remove 2 screws from the front.
2. Remove the sticker covering the screw hole. 5. Open the side cover. Remove 2 screws.
6. Remove the cover[B].
3. Remove the cover[A] after removing 2 screws.

7. Open the DADF unit. Remove 5 screws. 9. Remove 5 screws.
10. Lift up the OPE unit.
11. Turn the OPE unit. Unplug all connectors connecting

the machine.
8. Remove the cover [C].

12. Unplug all connectors on OPE Main PBA. Remove 4 14. Remove the LCD.
screws. And then remove the OPE Main PBA.
CAUTION 15. Remove the OPE key PBA.
Be careful not to damage flat cables.
13. Remove 7 screws. Lift up the OPE bracket.

3.3.7. Main board
1. Remove the rear cover. (Refer to 3.3.2)
2. Unplug all connector on the main board.
3. Remove the main board after removing 9 screws.
4. Install the new main board and insert the MSOK and
memory.
NOTE
When inserting the MSOK, be careful its direction.
CAUTION
When re-assembling the main board, be careful of

swapping the MAIN BLDC connector[A] and DCF
connector[B].

3.3.8. SMPS Fan
2. Unplug the connector. Remove 1 screw. And then

remove the SMPS fan.

3.3.9. SMPS board
1. Remove the rear cover. (Refer to 3.3.2) 3. Unplug all connectors on SMPS board. Remove 4
screws. And then remove the SMPS board.
2. Unplug the connector. Remove 4 screws. And then
remove the SMPS cover.
CAUTION
When replacing the SMPS board, please wait 5

minutes after unplugging the power cord, then
replace it. You can get a shock by the electric
discharge.
3.3.10. FDB board
1. Remove the rear cover. (Refer to 3.3.2) 3. Unplug all connectors on FDB board. Remove 4
screws. And then remove the FDB board.
remove the SMPS cover.
CAUTION
When replacing the FDB board, please wait 5 minutes

after unplugging the power cord, then replace it. You
can get a shock by the electric discharge.

3.3.11. Fuser-Duct Fan
1. Remove the rear cover. (Refer to 3.3.2) 3. Release the fan by separating the Fuser-Duct.
2. Unplug the connector. Remove 3 screws. And the

remove the Fuser-Duct.
CAUTION
When assembling the new fan, be careful not to

change the fan direction. The label must be shown
on the outside.
3.3.12. Main board shield
2. Unplug all connectors on the main board.
3. Remove the main board shield after removing 4 screws.

3.3.13. Main Drive unit
1. Remove all developer units and drum units. 4. Remove the main drive unit after removing 9 screws.
3. Unplug all connectors connecting the main drive unit.

Release the harness from the holder.
3.3.14. Fuser/Exit Drive unit
2. Unplug 2 motor connectors. Remove 3 screws. And

then remove the Fuser/Exit Drive unit.

3.3.15. Pick-up Drive unit
1. Remove the rear cover. (Refer to 3.3.2) 3. Unplug the connector. Remove 3 screws. And then
Pick-up Drive unit2.
Pick-up Drive unit1.
3.3.16. Feed Drive unit

remove the Feed Drive Unit.

3.3.17. Regi_MP Drive unit
1. Remove the rear cover. (Refer to 3.3.2) 2. Unplug the connector. Remove 3 screws. And the
remove the Regi_MP Drive Unit.
3.3.18. Toner Supply Drive unit
2. Remove the Main board shield. (Refer to 3.3.12)

remove the Toner supply drive unit.
NOTE
• To remove K Toner supply drive unit, first remove

the main drive unit.
• The toner supply drive units are exchangeable.

3.3.19. Waste toner container Drive unit
1. Open the front cover. Remove all toner cartridges. 4. Unplug the connectors. Remove 2 screws. And then
remove the Waste toner container drive unit.
2. Unplug 4 connectors connecting the developer units.
3. Remove the inner cover after removing 8 screws.
3.3.20. Auto Size sensor
1. Remove all cassettes. See the machine inside. 2. Unplug the connector. Remove 2 screws. And then
remove the sensor.

3.3.21. Exit Unit
1. Open the side cover. Unplug the Exit unit connector. 2. Remove the Exit unit after removing 3 screws.

3.3.22. Side Unit
1. Remove the cover [A] after removing 3 screws. 3. Release the right stopper.
2. Unplug the side unit connector.

CAUTION
The spring tension for right stopper is strong. When

releasing it, be careful not to hurt yourself.
4. Release the left stopper.
5. Remove the Side Unit.

3.3.22.1. Fuser out sensor
1. Remove 2 screws from the both sides. Lift up the 3. Separate the Cover-side exit after removing 3 screws.
Cover-side exit.
4. Remove the Fuser out sensor after unplugging the

connector.
2. Remove the Cover-side exit after unplugging the

connector.

3.3.22.2. Duplex sensor and Curl sensor
1. Remove the transfer roller Assy. 3. Remove the Duplex sensor [A] and Curl sensor [B].
2. Remove 1 screw. Turn over the Guide-TR Upper.

3.3.22.3. MP unit
1. Remove the Harness-Cover [A] after removing 2 4. Remove 3 screws.

screws.
5. Remove 1 screw.
2. Remove the Harness-Cover Lower [B] after removing
2 screws.
6. Remove 2 screws.
3. Remove 1 screws. Stand the stopper.

7. Remove 4 screws. 10. Remove 2 screws.
8. Remove the Cover-Side Guide Feed[C]. 11. Unplug the connectors.
9. Lift up the Cover-Side Duplex Lower. 12. Remove the Cover-MP Front.

13. Release the Linker from the right of the MP tray. 16. Remove the gear [C] after removing the E-ring.
14. Remove the MP Unit. 17. Remove the Bush[D] after removing the E-ring.
15. Remove the MP-cover base. 18. Remove the Bracket-Solenoid after removing 1 screw.

19. Release the MP bracket pick-up after removing 4 20. Remove the MP solenoid after removing 2 screws.
screws.

3.3.23. Fuser unit
1. Open the side cover. 4. Remove the Frame-Fuser Rear[B] after removing 3
screws.
2. Remove the fuser unit after removing 2 screws.

5. Remove the Fuser-Guide Duplex[C] after removing 3
screws.
3. Remove the Frame-Fuser Front[A] after removing 3

screws.
6. Remove the Fuser-Bracket Top after removing 5 screws.

7. Remove 2 screws. 10. Release the pin connector with the tweezers.
8. Remove 6 screws. Remove the Holder-Bias. And

remove the Bracket-Fuser Bottom.
CAUTION
• When reassembling the pin connector, make sure

the colors are positioned as shown above.
• Check the connector assembly status. If there is

a wrong connection, a operation error or a fire
can happen.
• Be careful not to bend the connector.
11. Lift up the thermostat holder Assy.
9. Remove 2 screws. Unplug the thermostat connector.
12. Remove 3 screws. Lift up and release the thermostat

holder.

15. Straighten the bent thermostat harness.
13. Release the NC sensor.
16. Take out the halogen lamp carefully.
14. Remove 1 screw.

3.3.24. Pick-up Unit and sensor
1. Remove the Side Unit. (Refer to 3.3.22) 3. Release the sensor after unplugging the connector.
(Empty sensor[A], Level sensor[B])
2. Remove the Pick-up Unit1,2 after removing 2 screws.
3.3.25. Feed sensor
1. Remove the Side Unit. (Refer to 3.3.22) 4. Remove the Feed sensor after unplugging connector.
2. Remove the sensor cover after removing 2 screws.
3. Release the sensor holder after removing 1 screw.

3.3.26. Feed Unit
1. Remove the Side Unit. (Refer to 3.3.22) 4. Remove the feed sensor after unplugging the connector.
2. Remove the Feed Unit[A] after removing 1 screw.
3. Remove the bracket[B] after removing 3 screws.

3.3.27. Registration Unit
1. Remove the Side Unit. (Refer to 3.3.23) 4. Remove the Regi. sensor after unplugging the
connector.
2. Remove the Regi.unit [A] after removing 2 screws.
3. Remove the bracket[B] after removing 3 screws.

3.3.28. DADF Unit
1. Remove the DADF connector cover. 3. Lift up the DADF unit and release it to diagonal
direction.
2. Remove 1 screw. Unplug the connector.

3.3.28.1. DADF Cover
1. Open the Stacker and Cover-Open. Remove 2 screws. 4. Remove the Cover-Deco F.
2. Remove the Cover-Side R by releasing the bottom 5. Remove 2 screw.

hooks.
6. Release the hook from the bottom.

3. Remove 3 screws.

7. Remove the Cover-Side F.

3.3.28.2. DADF Open Cover
1. Remove the DADF cover. (Refer to 3.3.28.1)
2. Release the DADF Open Cover by pushing it to the

direction of arrow.
3.3.28.3. DADF Stacker
1. Remove the DADF cover. (Refer to 3.3.28.1)
2. Release the Stacker by pushing it and its holder in the

opposite direction.
3.3.28.4. DADF main board
1. Remove the Cover-Side R. (Refer to 3.3.28.1)
2. Unplug all connectors on the board.
3. Remove the DADF main board after removing 2 screws.

3.3.28.5. DADF motor_solenoid_clutch
1. Remove the DADF cover. (Refer to 3.3.28.1) 5. Lift up and release the DADF Frame Main after
removing 2 screws.
2. Unplug all connectors on the DADF board.
6. Release the harness holder after removing 2 screw.

3. Remove 1 screw.
7. Unplug the connector. Remove 4 screws. And release

4. Remove 2 screws.
the motor.

8. Release the solenoid after removing 2 screws. 10. Remove the clutch.
9. Remove 2 springs. Remove 2 screws. And release the

bracket.

3.3.28.6. DADF Regi_Cover_Detect sensor
1. Release the corresponding sensor after unplugging

connector.
• A : Detect sensor
• B : Cover sensor
• C : Registration sensor
3.3.28.7. DADF Exit Idle sensor
1. Remove the motor bracket. (Refer to 3.3.28.4)

3.3.28.8. DADF Exit sensor
1. Remove the DADF Frame-Main. (Refer to 3.3.28.4)
3.3.28.9. DADF Length_Width sensor
1. Remove the DADF Stacker. (Refer to 3.3.28.3) 3. Remove the defective sensor after unplugging the
connector.
2. Release the sensor cover after removing 3 screws.
• A, B : Paper Length sensor
• C, D, E : Paper Width sensor

3.3.29. Scanner Unit
3.3.29.1. Scanner joint board
1. Remove the DADF unit. (Refer to 3.3.28) 3. Unplug all connector. Remove 2 screws. And release
the scanner joint board.
2. Remove the Scan-Rear cover after removing 7 screws.

3.3.29.2. Scan glass
1. Open and stand the DADF unit at 90 degree angle.
2. Remove 5 screws.
3. Remove the COVER-GLASS and ADF GLASS.
4. Lift up and release the scan glass.

3.3.29.3. APS sensor
1. Remove the scan glass. (Refer to 3.3.29.2) 4. Release the APS sensor after remove 2 screws.
2. Remove the align cover after removing 4 screws.
3. Remove 1 screw. Turn over the holder.

3.3.29.4. FR module
1. Remove the scan glass. (Refer to 3.3.29.2) 4. Unplug the harness.
2. Remove 2 screws.
NOTE
Before removing the below screw, mark the current

gradation position to tighten the screw in the same
position.
3. Release the FR module.

3.3.29.5. Scanner Assy
1. Remove the DADF unit and OPE unit. (Refer to 3.3.7 4. Remove 2 screws from the right.
and 3.3.28)
2. Unplug all connectors on the main board.
5. Lift up and release the scanner Assy.
3. Remove 3 screws from the left.

3.3.30. Side Cover Open Switch
1. Remove the rear cover. Remove 1 screw securing the 2. Remove the micro-switch.
sensor.
3.3.31. Front Cover Open Switch
1. Remove the COVER FRONT TOP[A] and COVER 4. Remove the inner cover.
FRONT TOP DECO[B]. (Refer to 3.3.6 OPE unit)
5. Remove the cover open switch.
2. Remove all toner cartridges.
3. Unplug 4 connectors and 8 screws.

3.3.32. Replacing the HDD
1. Remove the screw cover sheet. 3. Remove the COVER-EXIT REAR [C] after removing
5 screws.
2. Remove the Exit-Cover [B].

4. Remove 4 screws. Unplug the cable. And remove the
HDD Assy.
5. Install the new HDD Assy.

3.3.33. DCF (Double Cassette Feeder)
3.3.33.1. DCF main board
1. Remove the Bracket Rear Cover after removing 6 2. Unplug all connectors. Remove 4 screws. And release
screws. the DCF main board.

3.3.33.2. DCF Feed Motor
1. Remove the Bracket Rear Cover after removing 6 3. Remove 3 E-rings and 3 gears. Remove 2 screws. And
screws. release the feed motor.
2. Unplug the connector. Remove 3 screws. And release

the Feed Drive unit.
3.3.33.3. DCF Pick Up Motor
1. Remove the Bracket Rear Cover after removing 6 2. Unplug the pick up motor connector. Remove 2 screws.
screws. And release the DCF pick up motor.

3.3.34. Finisher
3.3.34.1. Finisher Main Motor
1. Remove the rear cover after 3 screws. 3. Remove 2 screws.
4. Remove the jam cover.
2. Remove 2 screws. 5. Remove 5 screws
6. Remove the Top-Tray.

7. Remove the drive gear after removing the E-ring.
NOTE
8. Release the exit roller.
When reassembling the Top-Tray, check that the
suppresser is in right position.
9. Remove the Bottom-Guide after removing 4 screws.

10. Remove the Main motor after removing 2 screws.

3.3.34.2. Finisher Board
1. Remove the rear cover after removing 3 screws. 2. Disconnect all cables on finisher board.
3. Remove the finisher board after removing 4 screws.

4. Troubleshooting
4. Troubleshooting
4.1. Control panel
3 4 5
12
1
6
13
9
7
14
10
15
11
8
1 Display screen Shows the current machine status and prompts during an operation. You can set
menus easily using the display screen.
2 Status LED Shows the status of your machine
3 Job Status Shows the jobs currently running, queued jobs, completed jobs, current error
code or secured jobs.
4 Counter Shows the amount of paper used.
5 Eco Turn into Eco mode.
6 Clear Deletes characters in the edit area.
7 Numeric keypad Dials numbers and enters alphanumeric characters. You can also enter the number
value for document copies or other options.
8 Reset Resets the current machine’s setup.
9 Redial/Pause Redials the recently sent fax number or received caller ID in ready mode, or
inserts a pause(-) into a fax number in edit mode.
10 Log in/Logout Allows user to log in or log out.
11 On Hook Dial When you press this button, you can hear a dial tone. Then enter a fax number.
It is similar to making a call using speaker phone.
12 Power Turn the power on or off. When the blue LED is on, the machine is powered on
and you can use it. If you turn the machine off, press this button for more than
three seconds. Press Yes when the confirmation window appears.
13 Interrupt Stops a job in operation for urgent copying.
14 Stop Stops an operation at any time. The pop-up window appears on the screen
showing the current job that the user can stop or resume.
15 Start Starts a job.
CAUTION
When you use the display screen, use your finger only. The screen may be damaged with a sharpen pen or anything else.

4. Troubleshooting
4.1.1. Introducing the display screen and useful buttons
Display screen
NOTE
For more information, refer to the user guide.
The display screen on the control panel allows user-friendly operation of the machine. Once you press the home icon on
the screen, it shows the display screen. The display screen image in this user’s guide may differ from your machine
depending on its options or models.
• Copy : Enters the Copy menu.

• Fax : Enters the Fax menu. Fax is activated on the display screen by installing an optional fax kit.
• Stored Document : Enters the Stored Document menu.
• Shared Folder : Enters the Shared Folder menu.
• Scan to Email : Enters the Scan to Email menu.
• Scan to Server : Enters the Scan to Server menu.
• Scan to PC : Enters the Scan to PC menu.
• Scan to Shared Folder : Enters the Scan to Shared Folder menu.
• Quick Copy : Enters the Quick Copy menu.
• ID Copy : Enters the ID Copy menu.
• USB : Enters the USB menu. When a USB memory device is inserted into the USB memory port on your machine,
USB is activated on the display screen.
• Scan to USB : Enters the Scan to USB menu. When a USB memory device is inserted into the USB memory port on
your machine, Scan to USB is activated on the display screen
• Machine Setup : You can browse current machine settings or change machine values.

4. Troubleshooting
Counter button
When you press the Counter button on the control panel, You can see the number of impressions.
• Total Usage : Displays the total number of impressions.

• Large Page : Displays the total number of impressions with large size paper.
• Send Usage : Displays the number of images sent via email, server, etc.
• Fax Send Usage(PSTN) : Displays the number of sent faxes.
Eco button
The eco feature allows you to save print resources and leads you to eco-friendly printing. When you press the Eco
button, the machine turns eco mode on or off. If the eco mode is on, you can see the eco image on some features. Some
options in the features are not available to use in the eco mode. For detailed information about the eco feature, refer to
the Administrator’s Guide.
Job Status button

When you press the Job Status button, the screen lists the currently running, queued, and completed jobs.

4. Troubleshooting
4.2. Understanding the status LED
The color of the status LED indicates the machine's current status.
Status Description
Off • The machine is off-line.
• The machine is in power saver mode. When data is received, or any button is pressed, it switches
to on-line automatically.
Green On The machine is on-line and can be used.
Blinking Fax The machine is sending or receiving faxes.
Copy The machine is copying documents.
Scan The machine is scanning documents.
Print • When the status LED slowly blinks, the machine is receiving data from the computer.
• When the status LED blinks rapidly, the machine is printing data.
Red On • The imaging unit is at the end of its lifespan. Remove the old imaging unit and install a new one.
• The toner cartridge is totally empty. Remove the old toner cartridge and install a new one.
• A paper jam has occurred.
• The door is open. Close the door.
• There is no paper in the tray. Load paper in the tray.
• The machine has stopped due to a major error. Check the display message.
• The waste toner container is not installed in the machine, or full waste toner container.
Blinking • A minor error has occurred and the machine is waiting for the error to be cleared. Check the
display message. When the problem is cleared, the machine resumes its original task.
• The toner cartridge, imaging unit, or waste toner container is near the end of its life. Order a
new toner cartridge, imaging unit, or waste toner container. You can temporarily improve print
quality by redistributing the toner.

4. Troubleshooting
4.3. Updating Firmware
This chapter includes instructions for updating the printer firmware. You can update the printer firmware by using one
of the following methods :
• Update the firmware by using the printer control panel

• Update the firmware by using the network.
4.3.1. Updating from the Printer Control Panel
WARNING
Failure to follow these instructions could lead to corruption issues and prevent the proper operation of this printer. Follow
all of the instructions carefully.
1) Download the firmware file from the Global Service Partner Network (GSPN) website.
2) Unzip the firmware file to a folder on your PC.
3) Copy the firmware file (*.hds) to a USB flash drive.
NOTE
The firmware files may be up to 500MB in size. USB flash drive size must be a minimum of 2 GB.
4) Press the button on control panel in this order. (Machine Setup > Others > Application Management > Application )
5) Plug the USB flash drive into the USB port. “Install” button will be activated on the Application tab. Press the “Install”
button.

4. Troubleshooting
6) The installation window will list the files on the USB drive. Touch the name of the firmware file to select it.
7) Press the “OK” button after marking the check box.
8) Once the installation is complete, “OK” button will be activated. Press “OK” button.
9) After completing the update, you can find the updated versions at [Machine Setup] > [Machine Details] > [Software
Versions].

4. Troubleshooting
4.3.2. Updating from the Network
WARNING
Failure to follow these instructions could lead to corruption issues and prevent the proper operation of this
printer. Follow all of the instructions carefully.
Perform the following procedure to update the printer firmware from the network.
1) Go to the SyncThruWeb Service (SWS) main home page. Click [Login] to access as default administrator as shown
below.
NOTE
Login using the Administrator ID and Password established during initial machine setup.
2) Click [Maintenance] on the top menu. And then click [Firmware Upgrade].

4. Troubleshooting
3) Click [Upgrade Wizard].
4) Click [Browse]. Choose installation file by browsing file system. And click [Next].
5) The uploading step will start. After this step, next step will be started automatically.

4. Troubleshooting
6) The firmware update will start.
7) Once the installation is complete, the machine power-off and power-on automatically.

4. Troubleshooting
4.4. Service Mode (Tech Mode)
4.4.1. Entering/Exiting Service Mode
To enter the service mode, press 1,2,3 number keys simultaneously. When the password dialog box appears, enter “1934”
and press the “OK” button.
To exit the service mode, press the “Exit Service” button at the right upper corner of the display.

4. Troubleshooting
4.4.2. Service Mode Menu Tree
a) Information Tab
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Page
Machine Serial Number
Network IP Address
General Page 4–15
Total Printed Impressions
Machine Installed Date & Time
Customer Replacement Unit Toner
OPC Unit
Developer Unit
Developer
Waste Toner Container
Supply Status Page 4–15
Field Replacement Unit Finisher
ITB
Fuser
Roller
DADF Roller
Software
Page 4–16
Version
Information
Power On Hours
Service Hours Low Power Hours Page 4–16
Power Save Hours
Fault Log Page 4–16
Supplies Information
Fax Protocol Dump
Auto Color Registration
Maintenance
Print Reports Job Duty Page 4–17
Auto Color Toning History
Manual Toning History
Usage Counter
Full Auto Color Registration
RTF Format
Export Reports XML Format Page 4–18
PDF Format

4. Troubleshooting
b) Maintenance Counts Tab

Fault Counts Page 4–19
Pick-up Jam
Feed Jam
Print Jam
Duplex Jam
Exit Jam
Feed Jam
Jam Count Regi Jam Page 4–19
Scan Jam
Scan Jam Exit Jam
Duplex Regi Jam
Duplex Scan Jam
Maintenance
Duplex Exit Jam
Counts
Toner Cartridge
OPC Unit
Developer Unit
Part Developer
Replacement Page 4–20
Count ITB
Fuser
Roller
DADF Roller
Sheets Delivered to Top Tray
Finisher
Sheets Delivered to Finishing Tray Page 4–21
Handling Count
Finisher Set Count

4. Troubleshooting
c) Diagnostics Tab
Engine NVM Initialization Page 4–22
Engine
Engine NVM Read/Write Page 4–22
Diagnostics
Engine Test Routines Page 4–24
Fax NVM Read/Write Page 4–28
Fax Diagnostics
Fax Test Routines Page 4–29
Shade and Print Report
Shading Test Page 4–30
Scanner Print Last Shade Report
Diagnostics Scanner/DADF NVM Read/Write Page 4–30
Scanner/DADF Test Routines Page 4–31
Automatic Adjustment Page 4–32
Magnification Page 4–33
Print Adjustment
Image Position Page 4–33
Print Test Patterns
Adjustment Copy Adjustment Image Position Page 4–34
Diagnostics
Scan Area Adjustment
Manual Adjustment Page 4–36
DADF Adjustment
Manual Adjustment Page 4–38
ACS ACS Level Adjustment Page 4–39
Auto Color Registration Page 4–39
Manual Color Registration Page 4–40
Normal
Image Auto Tone Adjustment Activation
Full
Management
Normal Page 4–41
Auto Tone Adjustment Full Page 4–42
CTD Sensor Cleaning Page 4–42
Print Test
Skew Pattern
Patterns

4. Troubleshooting
d) Service Functions
Main Memory
Page 4–43
Clear
Device Configuration Data Clear
Temporary & Spool Data Clear
User Saved Data & Log Clear
Hard Disk
All Saved Data Clear Page 4–43
Maintenance
Hard Disk Check
Hard Disk Access
HDD Encryption
EIUL On/Off
Count Setting 1 Count Up

Page 4–43
of Large Pages 2 Count Up
Toner Save Page 4–43
Enable Telent
Port Enable OSGI Page 4–44
Enable Samba
Service Debug Log Off / Job Status / Details Page 4–44
Functions
Capture Log Page 4–44
System SYS
Page 4–45
Recovery ALL
Process Speed
T1 Control Paper for Driver
T1 PWM
TR Control
Paper Group Page 4–48
Mode
Paper Side
T2 Control
Paper Direction
T2 PWM
User Data Back up

Page 4–49
Management Restore
Clear System
Cache
Enhanced
Off/On
Security
Hibernation Off/Om

4. Troubleshooting
4.4.3. Information
4.4.3.1. General
• Information > General

This menu displays the machine’s serial number, assigned IP address, total printed impressions, and the machine
installed date.
4.4.3.2. Supply Status
Customer Replacement Unit (CRU)

• Information > Supply Status > Customer Replacement Unit
This menu displays the machine’s customer replacement unit status. Users can select one item in the list to check the
information of the selected unit.
Field Replacement Unit (FRU)

• Information > Supply Status > Field Replacement Unit
This menu displays the machine’s field replacement unit status. Users can select one item in the list to check the
information of the selected unit.
In the CRU and FRU list, there are four columns : items, status, current, max life.
• Item : Refer to the table below.

• Status : This shows the current status of the selected item.
- OK : The current count is smaller than the default warning value
- Check : The current count is bigger than default warning value
- Off : The current count exceeds the max life.
• Count : This shows the current count of the selected item.
• Max. life : This shows the max capacity of the selected item.
Users can edit the default warning value within the given threshold.
Selecting some items will enable the reset button to reset the current count to 0 after replacing the unit.
Unit Item Max. Life Default Threshold

Yellow 15K 10% 1~ 30%
Magenta 15K 10% 1~ 30%
Toner
Cyan 15K 10% 1~ 30%
Black 20K 10% 1~ 30%
Yellow 50K 10% 5 ~ 30%
Magenta 50K 10% 5 ~ 30%
OPC Unit
Cyan 50K 10% 5 ~ 30%
Black 50K 10% 5 ~ 30%

4. Troubleshooting
Unit Item Max. Life Default Threshold

Yellow 300K 10% 5 ~ 30%
Magenta 300K 10% 5 ~ 30%
Developer Unit
Cyan 300K 10% 5 ~ 30%
Black 300K 10% 5 ~ 30%
Waste Toner Container Waste Toner Container 50K Near Full NA
Finisher Stapler
Finisher NA Near Empty NA
Cartridge
ITB 300K (PM Count) 5% 2% ~ 10%
ITB ITB Cleaner 150K (PM Count) 5% 3% ~ 10%
T2 Roller 150K (PM Count) 5% 3% ~ 10%
Fuser Fuser 150K (PM Count) 10% 5% ~ 20%
P/up Roller MP 200K (PM Count) 10% 5% ~ 20%
P/up Roller Kit-tray1 200K (PM Count) 10% 5% ~ 20%
Roller P/up Roller Kit-tray2 200K (PM Count) 10% 5% ~ 20%
DADF Roller Assembly ADF Roller 200K (PM Count) 10% 5% ~ 20%
4.4.3.3. Software Version
• Information > Software Version

This menu displays all the version of the software installed in the system in detail.
4.4.3.4. Service Hours
• Information > Service Hours

This menu displays three items, “Power on Hours”, “Low Power Hours” and “Power Save Hours”.
- Power on Hours : It indicates the hours of system power on since the first booting of the system.
- Low Power Hours : It indicates the hours of system low power on since the first booting of the system.
- Power Save Hours : It indicates the hours of system power save since the first booting of the system.
4.4.3.5. Fault Log
• Information > Fault Log

This menu displays faults occurred while the system was operating.
Pressing clear button will clear all the save fault log of the system.

4. Troubleshooting
4.4.3.6. Print Reports
• Information > Print Reports

This menu displays reports which that can be printed from the system. The following reports will be available to print.
- Supplies Information
- Fax Protocol Dump List
- Auto Color Registration Result
- Full Auto Color Registration Result
- Maintenance
- Job Duty
- Auto Toning History
- Manual Toning History
- Usage Counter Report

• Information > Print Reports > Auto Color Registration
This report lists last 10 Auto Color Registration results.
If there is color registration problem , and execution of Auto Color Registration does not solve the problem, service
engineers can print out this report and check “Succeeded or Failed for ACR” field.
Result Meaning
0 Success
256 Pattern Sensing Sensor LED calibration failure
1152 Machine can’t read the pattern. So, the machine can’t execute the calibration.
Auto Toning History and Manual Toning History

• Information > Print Reports > Auto Toning History
• Information > Print Reports > Manual Toning History
NOTE
TRC means “Tone Reproduction Curve”.
This report shows history of execution of TRC control. TRC control preserves color consistency against changes in supplies
resulting from long-time use and environmental change. The purpose of the history report is to check if TRC control
works normally.
• If TRC control performs normally, “Pass” count must be non-zero value and “Fail” count must be zero.
• If “Fail” count is not zero, the image density sensor needs to be checked.

4. Troubleshooting
4.4.3.7. Export Reports
• Information > Export Reports

This menu exports report to usb stick. Configuration, Error Information, Supplies Information, Usage Counter Reports
are exported as the form of selected format.

4. Troubleshooting
4.4.4. Maintenance Counts
4.4.4.1. Fault Count
• Maintenance Counts > Fault Count

This menu displays the fault Counts of the system. Users can select one fault group and press “OK” to see detailed fault
descriptions. The detailed fault description window displays engine diagnostic code and descriptions of the fault along
with the number of occurrences.
The following list shows the group of the faults defined for the system.
A1 Motor H1 Input (Trays) System S2 Engine System

A2 Fan H2 Output (Bins) System S3 Scan System
A3 Sensor S4 Fax System
C1 Toner Cartridge Unit M1 Input (Trays) System S5 UI System
C3 Imaging Unit M2 Media Path System S6 Network System
C4 Developer Unit M3 Output (Bins) System S7 HDD System
C6 iTB M4 Auto Document Feeder System U1 Fusing Unit
C7 Fusing unit S1 Video System U2 LSU Unit
4.4.4.2. Jam Count
• Maintenance Counts > Jam Count

This menu displays the jam Counts of the system. Users can select one jam group, which indicates the location of jams, and
press “OK” to see a detailed jam location along with the occurrence of the jam.
The following table shows the jam groups defined for the system :
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

Jam Bypass
Jam 0 Tray 1
Pick-up Jam Jam 0 Tray 2
Jam 0 Tray 3 (DCF)
Jam 0 Tray 4 (DCF)
Jam Feed 1
Jam Feed 2
Print Jam Jam Feed 3 (DCF)
Feed Jam
Jam Feed 4 (DCF)
Jam Regi
Jam Fuser Out
Jam Duplex 1
Jam Duplex 2
Duplex Jam
Jam Duplex Regi
Jam Duplex Return

4. Troubleshooting
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

Jam Exit In (Face Down)
Jam Exit Out (Face Down)
Exit Jam
Jam Exit In (Inner)
Jam Exit Out (Inner)
Feed In Jam
Feed Jam Feed Out Jam
Feed Idle Jam
Regi In Jam
Regi Jam Regi Out Jam
Regi Idle Jam
Scan In Jam
Scan Jam Scan Out Jam
Scan Idle Jam
Exit In Jam
Scan Jam Exit Jam Exit Out Jam
Exit Idle Jam
Duplex Regi In Jam
Duplex Regi Jam Duplex Regi Out Jam
Duplex Regi Idle Jam
Duplex Scan In Jam
Duplex Scan Jam Duplex Scan Out Jam
Duplex Scan Idle Jam
Duplex Exit In Jam
Duplex Exit Jam Duplex Exit Out Jam
Duplex Exit Idle Jam
4.4.4.3. Part Replacement Count
• Maintenance Counts > Part Replacement Count

This menu displays the replacement Counts for the system parts. Users can select one part group and press “OK” to see the
exact name of the part along with the occurrence of the replacement.
The following table shows groups of the replaceable parts of the system.

4. Troubleshooting
Unit Item Sensing Method

Toner (Yellow) Auto Sensing
Toner (Magenta) Auto Sensing
Toner Cartridge
Toner (Cyan) Auto Sensing
Toner (Black) Auto Sensing
OPC Unit (Yellow) Auto Sensing
OPC Unit (Magenta) Auto Sensing
OPC Unit
OPC Unit (Cyan) Auto Sensing
OPC Unit (Black) Auto Sensing
Developer Unit (Yellow) Auto Sensing
Developer Unit (Magenta) Auto Sensing
Developer Unit
Developer (Cyan) Auto Sensing
Developer (Black) Auto Sensing
Developer (Yellow) Auto Sensing
Developer (Magenta) Auto Sensing
Developer
Developer (Cyan) Auto Sensing
Developer (Black) Auto Sensing
ITB Count Clear
ITB ITB Cleaner Count Clear
T2 Roller Count Clear
Fuser Fuser Auto Sensing
P/up Roller MP Count Clear
P/up Roller Kit-tray1 Count Clear
Roller P/up Roller Kit-tray2 Count Clear
DADF Roller Assembly ADF Roller Count Clear
4.4.4.4. Finisher Handling Count
• Maintenance Counts > Finisher Handling Count

This menu displays the sheet counts delivered to finisher tray and finisher set count. Users can select one item and press
“OK” to see a count information.
NOTE
This menu shall be displayed only if finisher is installed
Finisher Handling Count Sheets Delivered to Top Tray

Sheets Delivered to Finishing Tray
Finisher Set Count

4. Troubleshooting
4.4.5. Diagnostics
4.4.5.1. Engine Diagnostics
Engine NVM Initialization

• Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine NVM Initialization
This menu initializes all engine NVM value to the default.
Engine NVM Read/Write

• Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine NVM Read/Write
Purpose To change a configuration value for engine firmware.
Operation When the main “NVM Read/Write” window displays, users can navigate through the list of codes with
Procedure descriptions and saved values.
Users can also input a code to the text box to find a configuration value directly.
After selecting one value, pressing “Edit” button will open an interface for user input.
Code Display Meaning Default Max/Min

103-0031 Regi Curl Length Buckle Control : Regi On Curl 0 6 / -3
Buckle Control : Duplex Regi On Curl
103-0032 Duplex Regi Curl Length 0 6 / -3
(x1)
Buckle Control : Duplex Regi On Curl
103-0033 Double Speed Duplex Regi Curl Length 0 6 / -3
(x2)
109-0000 StandBy Temperature offset Target Temperature during standby mode. 0 5 / -5
109-0010 Run Temperature offset Target Temperature during run mode. 0 5 / -5
109-0050 60 gms Temperature offset Media type offset for fuser roll temperature. 0 5 / -5
109-0060 90 gms Temperature offset Media type offset for fuser roll temperature. 0 5 / -5
109-0070 Bond Temperature offset Media type offset for fuser roll temperature. 0 5 / -5
109-0090 Cardstock Temperature offset Media type offset for fuser roll temperature. 0 5 / -5
109-0100 Envelopes Temperature offset Media type offset for fuser roll temperature. 0 5 / -5
109-0110 Labels Temperature offset Media type offset for fuser roll temperature. 0 5 / -5
109-0130 Thick Temperature Offset Media type offset for fuser roll temperature. 0 5 / -5
109-0131 Recycled Temperature offset Media type offset for fuser roll temperature. 0 5 / -5
109-0132 Special Temperature offset Media type offset for fuser roll temperature. 0 5 / -5
109-0133 1200 dpi_thin temperature offset Media type offset for fuser roll temperature. 0 5 / -5
109-0134 1200 dpi_plain temperature offset Media type offset for fuser roll temperature. 0 5 / -5
109-0135 1200 dpi_thick temperature offset Media type offset for fuser roll temperature. 0 5 / -5
109-0140 Cooldown Mode idling Time1 Narrow Paper idling Time1(~175℃) 10 150/0
109-0180 Cooldown Mode idling Time5 Narrow Paper idling Time5(205~℃) 120 150/0

4. Troubleshooting
Code Display Meaning Default Max/Min

Distant from hsync to lsync (multi-hsync)
112-0120 Manual Color Regi X-offset Yellow 100 200 / 0
for yellow
112-0130 Manual Color Regi X-offset Magenta 100 200 / 0
for Magenta
112-0140 Manual Color Regi X-offset Cyan 100 200 / 0
for Cyan
112-0150 Manual Color Regi X-offset Black 100 200 / 0
for Black
Distant from psync to Image area for
112-0160 Manual Color Regi Y-offset Yellow 100 200 / 0
yellow
Distant from psync to Image area for
112-0170 Manual Color Regi Y-offset Magenta 100 200 / 0
Magenta
112-0180 Manual Color Regi Y-offset Cyan Distant from psync to Image area for Cyan 100 200 / 0
112-0190 Manual Color Regi Y-offset Black Distant from psync to Image area for Black 100 200 / 0
112-0200 Manual Color Regi Width Yellow Image Area Width for Yellow 1000 2000 / 0
112-0210 Manual Color Regi Width Magenta Image Area Width for Magenta 1000 2000 / 0
112-0220 Manual Color Regi Width Cyan Image Area Width for Cyan 1000 2000 / 0
112-0230 Manual Color Regi Width Black Image Area Width for Black 1000 2000 / 0
112-0240 Manual Color Regi Left Width Yellow Image Area Left Width for Yellow 500 1000 / 0
112-0250 Manual Color Regi Right Width Yellow Image Area Right Width for Yellow 500 1000 / 0
112-0260 Manual Color Regi Left Width Magenta Image Area Left Width for Magenta 500 1000 / 0
112-0270 Manual Color Regi Right Width Magenta Image Area Right Width for Magenta 500 1000 / 0
112-0280 Manual Color Regi Left Width Cyan Image Area Left Width for Cyan 500 1000 / 0
112-0290 Manual Color Regi Right Width Cyan Image Area Right Width for Cyan 500 1000 / 0
112-0300 Manual Color Regi Left Width Black Image Area Left Width for Black 500 1000 / 0
112-0310 Manual Color Regi Right Width Black Image Area Right Width for Black 500 1000 / 0
112-0320 Color Regi LSU Skew Yellow LSU Skew for Yellow 100 200 / 0
112-0330 Color Regi LSU Skew Magenta LSU Skew for Magenta 100 200 / 0
112-0340 Color Regi LSU Skew Cyan LSU Skew for Cyan 100 200 / 0

4. Troubleshooting
Engine Test Routines

• Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Test Routines
Purpose To perform test routines for the engine.
Operation Procedure When the main Engine Test Routines window displays, users can navigate through the list of routines
that display along with their descriptions. Users can also directly input an EDC code to the text box to
find a routine. Users can select a maximum of 3 routines at the same time.
After selecting one or multiple routines, pressing the “OK” button will open the test window that lists
selected routines. Users can start/stop a desired test routine.
Code Display Meaning

100-0000 Main BLDC Motor Main BLDC Motor is On/Off
100-0010 Main BLDC Motor Ready Detect if Main BLDC Motor runs at normal speed
100-0041 OPC Motor Y Yellow Opc BLDC Motor is On/Off
100-0042 OPC Motor M Magenta Opc BLDC Motor is On/Off
100-0043 OPC Motor C Cyan Opc BLDC Motor is On/Off
100-0044 OPC Motor K Black Opc BLDC Motor is On/Off
Detect if Yellow OPC BLDC Motor runs at normal
100-0046 Y OPC Motor Ready
speed
Detect if Magenta OPC BLDC Motor runs at normal
100-0047 M OPC Motor Ready
speed
100-0048 C OPC Motor Ready Detect if Cyan OPC BLDC Motor runs at normal speed
100-0049 K OPC Motor Ready Detect if Black OPC BLDC Motor runs at normal speed
100-0080 T1 Engage Motor T1 Engage Motor On/Off
100-0090 T1 Engae Sensor Detect if the T1 Engage is On or Off.
100-0120 Exit Motor Forward Fast Exit Motor Forward Fast On/Off
100-0130 Exit Motor Forward Slow Exit Motor Forward Slow On/Off
100-0131 Exit Motor Backward Exit Motor Forward Backward On/Off
100-0132 Exit Motor Backward Slow Exit Motor Forward Backward Slow On/Off
100-0140 Duplex Motor Forward Duplex Motor Forward On/Off
100-0141 Duplex Motor Forward Slow Duplex Motor Forward Slow On/Off
100-0160 Duplex Fan1 Run Start/Stop Duplex Fan1 run
100-0180 Dupelx Fan1 Run Ready Detects if Duplex Fan1 runs at normal speed.
100-0200 T1 Elevating Motor T1 Elevate Motor On/Off
100-0210 T2 Elevating Motor T2 Elevate Motor On/Off (Optional)
100-0240 Waste Toner Motor Waste Toner Motor On/Off
100-0241 Waste Toner Led Waste Toner Led On/Off
100-0250 Waste Toner Full Sensor Detect if the waste toner is full or not.
100-0260 SMPS Fan Run Start/Stop Deve. Fan run
100-0270 SMPS Fan Run Ready Detects if Deve Fan runs at normal speed.
100-0340 Feed Motor Feed Motor is On/Off
100-0370 Tray1 Pickup Motor Tray1 Motor is On/Off

4. Troubleshooting

100-0430 Exit2 Motor Forward Exit2 Motor is On/Off
100-0440 Exit2 Motor Backward Exit2 Motor is On/Off
100-0450 ITB Motor ITB Motor is On/Off
100-0460 Ready ITB Detect if ITB Motor runs at normal speed
100-0470 DCF Feed Motor DCF Feed Motor is On/Off
Engages drive to pick up a paper from bypass Tray(MP
101-0000 Bypass Feed Clutch
Tray).
101-0050 Registration Clutch Engages drive to registartion rolls.
101-0190 Out-Bin Full Sensor Detect when a paper is at Out-Bin Full Sensor
101-0191 Out-Bin2 Full Sensor Detect when a paper is at Out-Bin2 Full Sensor
101-0270 MP Clutch MPClutch On/Off
101-0271 MP Solenoid MP Solenoid On/Off
101-0280 Return Gate Solenoid Return Gate Solenoid On/Off
102-0000 Tray1 Home Position Detect when tray1 is closed.
102-0010 T1 Paper Empty Sensor Detect when paper is in Tray1.
102-0041 T1 Paper Size Read Detects Paper Tray1 size.
102-0050 T1 Stack Height Sensor Detects if paper in tray1 is elevated to the sensor.
102-0080 T2 Paper Empty Sensor Detect when paper is in tray2.
102-0280 Bypass Paper Empty Sensor Detects when paper is in Bypass Tray(MP Tray).
102-0290 Feed Sensor Detect when a paper is at Feed sensor.
102-0300 T2 Feed Sensor (or Door Open) Detect when a paper is at T2 Feed sensor. (optional)
102-0352 DCF Feed Cover Open Detect DCF Cover is closed
102-0360 Regi. Sensor Detect when a paper is at Regi. sensor.
102-0361 FuserOut Sensor Detect when a paper is at FuserOut sensor.
102-0371 Exit2 Sensor Detect when a paper is at Exit2 sensor.

4. Troubleshooting

102-0380 Duplex Jam1 Sensor Detect when a paper is at Duplex Jam1 sensor.
104-0000 Waste Install Sensor Detect if Waste is installed.
109-0020 Fuser Fan Run Ready Detects if Fuser Fan Motor runs at normal speed.
109-0030 Fuser Motor Forward Fuser Motor Forward On/Off
109-0031 Fuser Motor Backward Fuser Motor Backward On/Off
109-0034 Fuser Motor Ready Detect if Fuser Motor runs at each speed
109-0040 Fuser Fan Run Fuser Fan Motor On/Off
109-0140 Fuser Gap Home Sensor Detect if the fuser press is located Home position.
110-0000 LSU Motor1 Run Ready Detects if LSU motor1 runs at normal speed.
110-0060 LSU Motor1 Run LSU Motor1 On/Off
111-0000 Toner Dispense Motor Yellow Toner Dispense(Supply) Motor On/Off
111-0010 Toner Dispense Motor Magenta Toner Dispense(Supply) Motor On/Off
111-0020 Toner Dispense Motor Cyan Toner Dispense(Supply) Motor On/Off
111-0030 Toner Dispense Motor Black Toner Dispense(Supply) Motor On/Off
111-0040 Toner Sensor Yellow TC sensor in developer tank.
111-0050 Toner Sensor Magenta TC sensor in developer tank.
111-0060 Toner Sensor Cyan TC sensor in developer tank.
111-0070 Toner Sensor Black TC sensor in developer tank.
112-0010 Clear Manual Offset Value of Color Regi Clear Manual Offset Value of Color Regi.
113-0350 Finisher Entrance Sensor Detect when a paper is at Entrance Sensor
113-0360 Finisher Exit Sensor Detect when a paper is at Exit Sensor
113-0370 Finisher Paddle Home Sensor Detect Paddle Home position
113-0380 Finisher Left Tamper Home Sensor Detect Lift Tamper Home position
113-0390 Finisher Right Tamper Home Sensor Detect Right Tamper Home position
113-0400 Finisher Media Height Sensor Detect Main Tray level.
113-0410 Finisher Stapler Door Sensor Detect Stapler Door Cover is closed
113-0420 Finisher Jam Cover Sensor Detect Jam Door Cover is closed
113-0430 Finisher Stapler Home Sensor Detect Stapler Home position
113-0440 Finisher Stapler Low Sensor Detect Stapler level
113-0450 Finisher Stapler Selfpriming Sensor Detect Stapler Selfpriming Sensor
113-0460 Finisher Ejector Home Sensor Detect Ejector Home position
113-0470 Finisher Main Tray Home Sensor Detect Main Tray Home position
113-0480 Finisher Stacker Height sensor Detect Stacker Height sensor
113-0490 Finisher Letter Size Sensor Detect Paper Size
113-0500 Finisher Transport Motor Finisher Transport Motor On/Off
113-0510 Finisher Paddle Motor Finisher Paddle Motor On/Off
113-0520 Finisher Left Tamper Motor Finisher Left Tamper Motor On/Off
113-0530 Finisher Right Tamper Motor Finisher Right Tamper Motor On/Off
113-0540 Finisher Media Height Solenoid Finisher Media Height Solenoid On/Off
113-0550 Finisher Staple Unit Motor Finisher Staple Unit Motor On/Off

4. Troubleshooting

113-0560 Finisher Ejector Motor Finisher Ejector Motor On/Off
113-0570 Finisher Main Tray Motor Finisher Main Tray Motor On/Off
113-0580 Finisher SCU Solenoid Finisher SCU Solenoid On/Off
113-0590 Finisher Safety Cover Solenoid Finisher Safety Cover Solenoid On/Off

4. Troubleshooting
4.4.5.2. Fax Diagnostics
Fax NVM Read/Write

• Diagnostics > Fax Diagnostics > Fax NVM Read/Write
Purpose To change a configuration value for fax firmware.
Operation Procedure When the main “NVM Read/Write” window displays, users can navigate through the list of
configuration values that display along with description.
Users can also input a code to the text box to find a configuration value directly.
After selecting one value, pressing “Edit” button will open an interface for user input.
Code (Line 1) Displayed Name Default

20-200 Pause Dial Time 1
20-210 Dial Pulse M/B ratio 0
20-220 Auto Dial Start Pause Time 1
20-300 Ring On Time 170
20-310 Ring Off Time 560
20-320 Ring Detection Freq 1
20-400 DTMF High-Freq Level 8
20-410 DTMF Low-Freq Level 11
20-420 DTMF Timing 5
20–500 Dial Mode
20-520 Error Rate 2
20-530 Dial Tone Detect 0
20-540 Loop Current Detect 0
20-550 Busy Signal Detect 0
20-700 Line Monitor Setting 0
20-800 Modem Speed 7
20-810 Fax Transmission Level 12
20-830 Auto Dial Timeout 55
20-999 Fax Line Setting

4. Troubleshooting
Fax Test Routines

• Diagnostics > Fax Diagnostics > Fax Test Routines
Purpose To perform test routines for the fax machine.
Operation Procedure When the main Fax Test Routines window displays, users can navigate through the list of routines that
display along with description. Users can also input a code to the text box to find a routine directly.
After selecting one routine, pressing “OK” button will open the test window that lists selected routine.
Users can start/stop a desired test routine.
Code (Line 1) Displayed Name Code (Line 1) Displayed Name

20-012 Single Tone 110 Hz 20-044 V.29 9600 bps
20-020 DMTF # Line 20-048 V.17 14400 bps
20-021 DMTF * Line 20-049 V.34 2400 bps
20-022 DMTF 0 Line 20-050 V.34 4800 bps
20-023 DMTF 1 Line 20-051 V.34 7200 bps
20-024 DMTF 2 Line 20-052 V.34 9600 bps
20-025 DMTF 3 Line 20-053 V.34 12000 bps
20-026 DMTF 4 Line 20-054 V.34 14400 bps
20-027 DMTF 5 Line 20-055 V.34 16800 bps
20-028 DMTF 6 Line 20-056 V.34 19200 bps
20-029 DMTF 7 Line 20-057 V.34 21600 bps
20-030 DMTF 8 Line 20-058 V.34 24000 bps
20-031 DMTF 9 Line 20-059 V.34 26400 bps
20-040 V.21 300 bps 20-060 V.34 28800 bps
20-041 V.27ter 2400 bps 20-061 V.34 31200 bps
20-042 V.27ter 4800 bps 20-062 V.34 33600 bps
20-043 V.29 7200 bps

4. Troubleshooting
4.4.5.3. Scanner Diagnostics
Shading Test
• Diagnostics > Scanner Diagnostics > Shading Test
Purpose To check quality of scanned images, especially defect in optical devices, including lens, mirror,
lamp, and etc, are suspected.
Operation Procedure Press "Share and Print report“ to see if the current shading value is correct.
Mono, red, green, blue gray shading values will be shown on the printed report.
When the previous shading value is needed, press “Print Last Shade Report”.
Scanner/DADF NVM Read/Write

• Diagnostics > Scanner Diagnostics > Scanner/DADF NVM Read/Write
Purpose To read and/or write values in the scanner and DADF memory.
Operation Procedure When the main “NVM Read/Write” window displays, users can navigate through the list of codes
with descriptions and saved values.
Users can also directly input a code to the text box to find a NVM.
After selecting a code, the “Edit” button will be enabled only if the code is writable.
If the selected code is writable and the “Edit” button is enabled, press the button to configure the
desired value for the code.
Code NVM Description Meaning Access

05-0000 Pick up Count Pick up Roller Life Count Read Only
05-0010 Document Duplex Reverse Point Document Duplex Reverse Point Read/Write
05-0020 Document Exit Turn Reverse Point Document Exit Turn Reverse Point Read/Write

4. Troubleshooting
Scanner/DADF Test Routines

• Diagnostics > Scanner Diagnostics > Scanner/DADF Test Routines
Purpose To perform test routines for the scanner and DADF.
Operation Procedure When the main scanner/DADF Test Routines window displays, users can navigate through the list
of routines that display along with description.
Users can also input a code to the text box to find a routine directly.
After selecting one routine, pressing “OK” button will open the test window that lists selected routine.
Users can start/stop a desired test routine.
Code NVM Description Meaning Access

05-0000 Document Length .1 Sensor Document Length .1 Sensor High/Low
05-0001 Document Length .2 Sensor Document Length .2 Sensor High/Low
Document Width1 Sensor Document Width1 Sensor High/Low
05-0020 Document Cover Open Sensor Document Cover Open Sensor High/Low
05-0040 Document Detect Sensor Document Detect Sensor High/Low
05-0060 Document Simplex Registration Sensor Document Simplex Registration Sensor High/Low
05-0070 Document Scan Read Sensor Document Scan Read Sensor High/Low
05-0080 Document Exit Sensor Document Exit Sensor High/Low
05-0210 Document Jig Test Low Speed Simplex Document Jig Test Low Speed Simplex
05-0220 Document Jig Test Low Speed Duplex Document Jig Test Low Speed Duplex
05-0230 Document Jig Test High Speed Simplex Document Jig Test High Speed Simplex
05-0240 Document Jig Test High Speed Duplex Document Jig Test High Speed Duplex
Document Exit IDLE Sensor Document Exit IDLE Sensor High/Low
Document Motor Forward Document Motor Forward Start/Stop
Document Motor Backward Document Motor Backward Start/Stop
06-0000 Scanner Original Size Detecting Sensor 1 Scanner Original Size Detecting Sensor 1 High/Low
06-0001 Scanner Original Size Detecting Sensor 2 Scanner Original Size Detecting Sensor 2 High/Low
06-0010 Scanner Cover Open/Close Sensor 1 Scanner Cover Open/Close Sensor 1 High/Low
06-0011 Scanner Cover Open/Close Sensor 2 Scanner Cover Open/Close Sensor 2 High/Low
06-0020 Scanner Platen Motor Forward Scanner Platen Motor Forward Start/Stop
06-0030 Scanner Platen Motor Backward Scanner Platen Motor Backward Start/Stop
Scanner home Sensor Scanner home Sensor High/Low

4. Troubleshooting
4.4.5.4. Adjustment
Print Adjustment
• Diagnostics > Adjustment > Print Adjustment > Automatic Adjustment
Purpose To correct image position of print-outs automatically.
Operation Procedure 1) Press “Paper Supply” button and select a tray.
2) Press “Paper Size” button and select a paper size of the previously selected tray.
3) Press “Print” button. A test pattern will be printed out.
4) Press “Next” button. The system ask to locate the test pattern.
5) Locate the front side of Scanner A/S Chart at the scanner glass .
NOTE
DADF cannot be used.
6) Press “OK” button. Automatic scanning will occur .

7) Locate the back side of Scanner A/S Chart at the scanner glass again and press “OK” button
once more.
8) The system will automatically calculate the proper value based on scanning result of the
test pattern.
9) The new values are set to the system.
Verification Print out and check if all the position of scale marks (a, b, e, f) in the image are located within the
specified limit.
Specification a, b, e, f : 10 mm, ± 1.5 mm
Reference Scanner A/S Chart
■ Scanner A/S Chart
Front Side Back Side

4. Troubleshooting
• Diagnostics > Adjustment > Print Adjustment > Image Position

Purpose To correct image position of print-outs manually.
Operation Procedure 1) Select a tray required adjustment.
2) Change the adjustment value with arrow button. “+” value will move to Tail-Edge while
“-” value will move to Lead-Edge.
Simplex Duplex
Example Simplex Duplex
Leading Leading
Cases Side Edge Side Edge
Edge Edge
= 8.5 mm + 15
= 11.6 mm -16
¡ = 8.0 mm + 20
¢ = 13.0 mm -30
Verification Print out and check if all the position of scale marks (,,,) in the image are located within the specified
limit.
Specification a, b, e, f : 10 mm, ± 1.5 mm
Copy Adjustment
• Diagnostics > Adjustment > Copy Adjustment > Image Position
Purpose To correct image position of copied images manually.
Operation Procedure 1) Select a tray required adjustment.
2) Change the adjustment value with arrow button. “+” value will move to Tail-Edge while
“-” value will move to Lead-Edge.
Simplex Simplex Simplex Simplex

Example
Leading Side Leading Side
Cases
Edge Edge Edge Edge
= 11.5 mm -15
= 8.4 mm -16
¡ = 12.0 mm -20
¢ = 7.0 mm + 30
Verification 1) Copy the Scanner A/S Chart . Scanning must be occur at the scanner glass .
2) Check if all the position of scale marks (a, b, e, f) in the image are located within the
specified limit.
Specification a, b, e, f : 10 mm ± 1.5 mm

4. Troubleshooting
Scan Area Adjustment

• Diagnostics > Adjustment > Scan Area Adjustment > Automatic Adjustment
Purpose To correct image position and magnification of scanned images automatically.
Operation Procedure 1) Locate the Scanner A/S Chart at the scan glass . Note that “Lead Edge” arrows need to head
to the left side of scan glass and to be placed face down. Also note that the Scanner A/S
Charts come in two sizes, A4 and Letter . Choose one size to meet your primary size of use.
2) Press “OK” button. Automatic scanning will occur, and the system will automatically
calculate the proper value based on scanning result of the chart .
3) The new value set to the table.
Verification 1) Scan the Scanner A/S Chart and send it to a PC. Scanning must be occur from the scan glass.
2) To check the image position, compare the position of scale marks (a, b) of the chart to
the copy.
3) To check the magnification, compare the length of line “c” of the chart to the copy.
Specification a, b : 10 ± 1.5 mm
c : 190 ± 1.5 mm
Reference A4 Scanner A/S Chart
A4 S ca n n e r A/ S Ch a rt

4. Troubleshooting
• Diagnostics > Adjustment > Scan Area Adjustment > Manual Adjustment
Purpose To correct image position and magnification of scanned images manually. This function is used when
a result of automatic adjustment does not satisfy the expectation.
Operation Procedure 1) Choose one item from the table. There are three items to choose.
• Image Position - Leading Edge
• Image Position - Side Edge
• Magnification - Vertical Direction
2) Select one item and press the “Edit” button.
3) Change the adjustment value with arrow button.
4) Image Position (a, b) : If the current value is smaller than the specification, press “+”.
Otherwise, press “-”.
5) Magnification (c) : If the current value is smaller than the specification, press “-”. Otherwise,
press “+”.
6) Press the “OK” button to apply the new value to the system.
Example Leading Side Vertical Direction

Cases Edge Edge Adjustment
= 11.0 mm -10
= 9.0 mm + 10
= 191.7 mm + 0.8% (-3.4mm)
= 188.1 mm -0.4% (near + 1.8mm)
NOTE
The value of magnification adjustment needs to be calculated based on A3 size, 420mm ((190mm +
10mm*2)*2) if the used Scanner A/S Chart is A4 size.
Verification 1) Scan the Scanner A/S Chart and send it to a PC. Scanning must be occur from the scan glass.
the copy.
3) To check the magnification, compare the length of line “c” of the chart to the copy .
c : 190 ± 1.5 mm
Image Position Unit : mm, Scale : 0.1, Min/Max : -6/+6
Magnification Unit : %, Scale: 0.1(0.42mm), Min/Max: 99/101

4. Troubleshooting
DADF Adjustment
• Diagnostics > Adjustment > DADF Adjustment > Automatic Adjustment
Purpose To correct image position and magnification of scanned images via DADF automatically.
Operation Procedure 1) Locate the Scanner A/S Chart at the DADF. Note that “Lead Edge” arrows need to head to
feeding direction and to be placed face up. Also note that the Scanner A/S Charts come in
two size, A4 and Letter . Choose one size to meet your primary size of use.
2) Press “OK” button. Automatic scanning will occur ,and the system will automatically
calculate the proper value based on scanning result of the chart .
3) The new values are set to the table.
Verification 1) Copy the Scanner A/S Chart. Scanning must be occur from the DADF.
the copy.
3) To check the magnification, compare the length of line “c” of the chart to the copy.
c : 190 ± 1.5 mm

4. Troubleshooting
• Diagnostics > Adjustment > DADF Adjustment > Manual Adjustment

Purpose To correct image position and magnification of scanned images via DADF manually. This function is
used when a result of automatic adjustment does not satisfy the expectation.
Operation Procedure 1) Choose one item from the table. There are three items to choose.
• Image Position - Simplex Leading Edge
• Image Position – Simplex Side Edge
• Magnification – Vertical Direction
2) Select one item and press the “Edit” button.
3) Change the adjustment value with arrow button.
4) Image Position (Simplex Leading Edge, a) : If the current value is smaller than the
specification, press “+”. Otherwise, press “-”.
5) Image Position (Simplex Side Edge, b) : If the current value is smaller than the specification,
press “-”. Otherwise, press “+”.
6) Magnification (c) : If the current value is smaller than the specification, press “-”. Otherwise,
press “+”.
7) Press the “OK” button to apply the new value to the system.
Examp le Lead ing S id e Vertical Directio n

Cas es Ed g e Ed g e Ad jus tment
= 11.5 mm -15
= 8.8 mm -12
= 191.3 mm +0.6% (near -2.6mm)
= 188.0 mm -0.5% (near +2.0mm)
NOTE
The value of magnification adjustment needs to be calculated based on A3 size, 420mm ((190mm +
10mm*2)*2) if the used Scanner A/S Chart is A4 size.
Verification 1) Copy the Scanner A/S Chart. Scanning must be occur from the DADF.
2) To check the image position, compare the position of scale marks (,) of the chart to the copy.
3) To check the magnification, compare the length of line of the chart to the copy.
c : 190 ± 1.5 mm
Image Position Unit : mm, Scale : 0.1, Min/Max : -6/+6
Magnification Unit : %, Scale : 0.1(0.42mm), Min/Max : 99/101

4. Troubleshooting
4.4.5.5. ACS (Auto Color Sensing)
• Diagnostics > ACS

Purpose To set the color coverage ratio of auto color mode in copy function.
• Color Coverage Ratio : The ratio of color contents in the original document.
Operation Procedure Change the level from 1 to 5.
• Classifies a document as color, if color coverage of the document is higher than predefined
level.
• Level 1 has higher probability of classifying documents to color, while level 5 has lower
probability.
Verification Copy the ‘mono copied’ original with auto color mode and check if print out is monochrome.
Specification
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5
Color
0.01% 0.05% 0.1% 0.25% 0.5%
Coverage
Reference N/A

4. Troubleshooting
4.4.5.6. Image Management

• Diagnostics > Color Management > Auto Color Registration
Purpose To correct color registration of the system when it shows color shift between the original and a copy.
Operation Procedure 1) Select “On” or “Off” for ACR execution.
• If you select “Off”, ACR will not execute.
• If you select “On”, ACR will execute as the determined conditions.
2) Change execution condition(s) of the Automatic Color Registration.
• Page Condition : The system executes ACR based on the count of printed pages since
the last ACR execution.
• LSU Temperature : The system executes ACR when LSU temperature of the device
increases or decreases by the configured value since the last ACR execution.
NOTE
• ACR execution occurs when one of the ACR option meets the condition.
Verification Compare the original with a copy after an execution of Auto Color Registration.
Specification
Default Min. Value Max. Value
Page
500 200 5000
Condition
LSU
3 1 100
Temperature
Reference Refer to 4.6.8. Incorrect color registration
Manual Color Registration

• Diagnostics > Image Management > Manual Color Registration
Purpose To correct color registration of the system manually when it shows color shift between the original
and a copy.
Operation Procedure Adjust the offset value for each color.
• X offset of Y in Left
• X offset of M in Left
• X offset of C in Left
• X offset of Y in Right
• X offset of M in Right
• X offset of C in Right
• Y offset of Y in Center
• Y offset of M in Center
• Y offset of C in Center

4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• Range : [-5 ~ 5]
• Unit : dot
• Default : 0
Verification Compare the original with a copy after an execution of Manual Color Registration.
Specification N/A
Reference Incorrect Color Registration in the troubleshooting chapter

4. Troubleshooting
Auto Tone Adjustment Activation

• Diagnostics > Image Management > Auto Tone Adjustment Activation > Normal
Purpose To correct image quality when density of the image is poor. Normal TRC Control is recommended to
be performed after changing a unit, such as toner cartridge, imaging unit, and ITB, and reboot.
Low Im a ge De ns ity Gra da tion Re production Fa ilure
Operation Procedure 1) Select “On” or “Off” for Normal TRC Control execution.
• If you select “Off”, Normal TRC Control will not execute.
• If you select “On”, Normal TRC Control will execute as the determined conditions.
2) Change execution condition(s) of Normal TRC Control.
• Page Count: The system executes Normal TRC Control based on the count of printed
pages since the last execution.
• Time Left Alone: The system executes Normal TRC Control when the system returns
from a power save mode and the rest time exceeds the configured value.
Verification Print out a test job and make sure the image quality has recovered.
Specification
Default Min. Value Max. Value
Page Count 300 10 5000
Time Left Alone 480 90 900
Reference Refer to 4.6.6 Light Image

4. Troubleshooting
• Diagnostics > Image Management > Auto Tone Adjustment Activation > Full
Purpose To correct image quality when any OPC drum is replaced or the life of the OPC drum is changed.
replacing any OPC drum or density of the image is poor. And this function will be performed when
temperature and/or humidity in the room changes suddenly.
Operation Procedure Change execution condition(s) of Normal TRC Control.
• On : Full TRC Control Enable
• Off : Full TRC Control Disenable
Specification N/A

4. Troubleshooting
Auto Tone Adjustment

• Diagnostics > Image Management > Auto Tone Adjustment > Normal
Purpose To correct image quality when density of the image is poor. Normal TRC Control is recommended to
be performed after changing a unit, such as toner cartridge, imaging unit, and ITB, and reboot.
Low Im a ge De ns ity Gra da tion Re production Fa ilure
Operation Procedure Select “Execute” button.

• Diagnostics > Image Management > Auto Tone Adjustment > Full
Purpose To correct image quality when any OPC drum is replaced or the life of the OPC drum is changed.
replacing any OPC drum or density of the image is poor. And this function will be performed when
temperature and/or humidity in the room changes suddenly.
Operation Procedure Select “Execute” button.
• Diagnostics > Image Management > Auto Tone Adjustment > CTD Sensor Cleaning
Purpose To solve the “CTD Sensor Failure” error.
NOTE
Refer to the troubleshooting for error “A3–2113”
Operation Procedure 1) Clean the ACR/CTD sensor.

2) Enter the SVC mode. Execute the CTD Sensor cleaning.

4. Troubleshooting
4.4.6. Service Functions
4.4.6.1. Main Memory Clear
• Service Functions > Main Memory Clear

This function resets the main memory of the system to the factory default setting. It can be used to reset the system to the
initial value when the product is functioning abnormally. All the user configured values return to the default values.
To clear the main memory, users need to select the country of the system locates, and rebooting of the system is required.
4.4.6.2. Hard Disk Maintenance
• Service Functions > Hard Disk Maintenance > Device Configuration Data Clear
- This function formats all device configuration data, for example, user profile, address book, and devices settings,
on the hard disk.
• Service Functions > Hard Disk Maintenance > Temporary and Spool Data Clear
- This function formats all temporary and spool data saved on the hard disk.
• Service Functions > Hard Disk Maintenance > User Saved Data and Log Data Clear
- This function formats all the user data, for example, box data, pending secure jobs, font, form, macro, data related
applications, and job log, on the hard disk.
• Service Functions > Hard Disk Maintenance > All Saved Data Clear
- This function formats all the data that can be erased with 3 functions above. The function will NOT format the
hard disk entirely.
• Service Functions > Hard Disk Maintenance > Hard Disk Check
- This function checks a bad sector in the hard disk. If a bad sector is found, the system will display an error message
and send an email notification to the system administrator.
4.4.6.3. Count Setting of Large Page
• Service Functions > Count Setting of Large Page

This function sets count of large page, such as A3 and ledger size, to 1 count or 2 count of the total count. For example, the
total use of 100 A4 impressions and 100 A3 impressions will become 200 impressions if the configuration is set to “1 Count
Up” while the total will be 300 impression if the configuration is set to “2 Count Up”.
4.4.6.4. Toner Save
• Service Functions > Toner Save

This function reduces the use of toner up to 30% and only applies to monochrome printing.

4. Troubleshooting
4.4.6.5. Port
• Service Functions > Port

This function enables/disables remote connections to the system via telnet, OSGI command shell, and SMB(samba) protocol.
This function can be used when there is a problem that requires developers to access the system or when there is a need for
developers to upload applications for a test.
Since enabling those ports can creates a risk of damaging data stored in the device, agreement of the administrator of the
customer site is necessary. The user must log in as the administrator to enable/disable the services.
4.4.6.6. Debug Log
• Service Functions > Debug Log

This function sets the system log message level. Users can select three options.
- Off : This option disables the logging option.
- Job Status: This option only enables the logging option of user created jobs.
- Details : This option enables all the logging options of the running tasks of the system. Note that this option might
create a trade-off of performance in certain system operation. Use this option when the system behaves abnormally,
and engineers need to investigate problems.
4.4.6.7. Capture Log
• Service Functions > Capture Log

This function copies all the saved log in the system to a UBS memory as a zip file. Note that the size of system log could
reach up to 1GB. If the system log size become considerably huge, it will take longer time to copy to the plugged memory.
1) Connect USB memory to device.
2) Enter service mode by pressing 1 + 2 + 3 buttons. Enter 1934 and OK.
3) Go to "Service Functions > Debug Log" and change debug log level to “DETAILS”.

4. Troubleshooting
4) Go to "Service Functions > Capture Log" and press Capture Log button.
5) Once it is completed, the message will be displayed. Then restore the debug log level to ”JOB STATUS”.
NOTE
If the system log size become considerably huge, it will take longer time to copy to the plugged memory.
6) Check is the Log file is created in the USB memory.

4. Troubleshooting
4.4.6.8. System Recovery
• Service Functions > System Recovery

This function repairs or formats the HDD of the system. To use this function, a HDD image need to be saved in a USB
memory, and that USB memory needs to be plugged in the system before the execution.
NOTE
• Memory stick file system type : FAT16 or FAT32 not NTFS
• Memory stick must contain the following 3 files only.

- unix script files x 2
- HDD image file x1
1) From the system recovery UI, Choose “SYS” to recover only the system partition of the HDD or “ALL” to recover all
the partition of the HDD.
2) When the system recovery UI is appeared after reboot, choose “HDD Repair” to repair any corrupted data in the selected
partition or choose “HDD Format” to format the data in the selected partition.
a) HDD Format
• Hidden Partition : This can format and reinstall the only System Binary in HDD. User data is not deleted.
• USB : This can format the HDD using USB stick. All data except the stored in MSOK will be deleted.
• Network : This can format the HDD using network. All data except the stored in MSOK will be deleted.
b) HDD Repair : This can restore the internal system by checking the HDD error. This is for HDD recovery itself
and irrelevant to the user data in device.

4. Troubleshooting
3) When pushing “Next” button, the login page for authentication will be displayed. The password will be 1934 as the
factory setting password.
4) When pushing “Next” button, the following page will be displayed.
• In case of selecting USB option :
The Next button is pressed after inserting the USB stick.

The system will check for the required packages in the USB stick. If all the packages are present in the USB
stick then the system will be directed to the confirmation page otherwise an Error page will be displayed with
an appropriate error message.
• In case of selecting Network option :

4. Troubleshooting
This page contains two sections :

- Configure device IP address
a) Device IP: IP address for the device
b) Gateway IP: Gateway IP address for the device
c) Subnet Mask: Network Subnet Mask for the device
- Configure samba settings
a) Server IP : IP address of the server.
b) User ID : user ID of the server to login into the server system
c) Password : password of the server system
d) Shared folder : name of the shared folder on the server, where the packages for the system recovery
are present.
The Next button is pressed after providing the above information.
The system will establish the provided IP to the device and try to connect to the server and check for the available
packages on the server.
If Network is establish and all the packages are present in the shared folder of the server then the system will be
directed to the Confirmation page otherwise an Error page will be displayed with an appropriate error message.
5) When pushing “Next” button on option selection page, the confirmation page will be displayed.
6) When pushing “Next” button, progress page will be displayed.
7) When completing HDD Recovery or HDD Repair successfully, reboot the machine.

4. Troubleshooting
8) After rebooting, the machine will start the system initialization.
NOTE
If the system initialization is not executed, enter the svc mode and execute “Full memory clear”.
If not, the machine may not work normally.
9) Execute the firmware update using the one ROM FW file after system initialization. This work is a must for all FW
module level.
4.4.6.9. TR Control Mode
• Service Functions > TR Control Mode

Purpose To correct transfer related problems. This function can be used to change the transfer value to
optimize image quality to a certain type of paper.
Operation Procedure 1) T1 Control Problems
• Choose the process speed (Full, Half, Lower) based on the type of paper to be used.
• Adjust T1 PWM value based on the problem type.
• Gray Spot : Increase T1 PWM value of the issued color
• Non Cyclic White Line : Decrease T1 PWM value of the issued color
• OPC Cyclic Ghost : Decrease T1 PWM value of the issued color
Gr a y Sp o t No n Cyc lic Wh it e Lin e OPC Cyc lic Gh o s t
2) T2 Control Problems
• Choose the paper group, paper side, and paper direction.
• Adjust T1 PWM value based on the problem type.
• Blur : Increase T1 PWM value
• Poor Transfer : Increase T1 PWM value
• Re-transfer : Decrease T1 PWM value
• White Spot : Decrease T1 PWM value
Blu r Po o r Tr a n s fe r Wh it e Sp o t
Verification Print out a test job and make sure the transfer problem has resolved.

4. Troubleshooting
Specification N/A
Reference N/A
4.4.6.10. User Data Management
• Service Functions > User Data Management

This function backup or restore user data stored in the hard disk. The purpose of this function is to backup user data before
format of the hard disk and store back to the hard disk after format. Note that hard disk format will be performed when
the data encryption option is enabled by administrators.
NOTE
To use this function users need to prepare a USB hard disk that its size is larger than 100GB.

4. Troubleshooting
4.4.7. SFE (Special Feature Enablement)
Special Feature Enablement (SFE) means to provide the configurable options (On/Off) in service mode for technicians or
dealers to satisfy the requirements from B2B sites easily without changing the firmware installed in a device.
SFE menu description

• Service Mode > SFE > Letterhead/Preprinted paper handle (001)
If this option is enabled, in case of printing in directional media (Letterhead/Preprinted), the device prints as the
same output direction regardless of simplex or duplex.
• Service Mode > SFE > Mono Print only mode (002)
If this option is enabled, the device always prints output as mono about PC printing.
• Service Mode > SFE > Copy Speed (004)

If this option is enabled, the device accelerates the scan speed of ADF copy by reducing scan resolution from 600 dpi
to 300 dpi.
• Service Mode > SFE > Print Output (005)

If this option is enabled, the device provides the same output direction about Flatbed printing and ADF printing.
NOTE
Refer to the following table for SFE supported in each model.

CLX-9201/ SCX-8123/ CLX-9252/ SCX-8230/
CLX-8640/
9251/ 9301 8128 9352 8240
SFE Code Title 8650
(Polaris (Polaris (Cosmos-R (Cosmos-R
(Evergreen)
Color) Mono) Color) Mono)
001 Letterhead/Preprinted paper handle O O O O O
002 Mono Print only mode O X O X O
004 Copy Speed O O O O X
005 Print Output O O X X X

4. Troubleshooting
4.5. Error Code and Troubleshooting
Messages appear on the control panel display to indicate the machine’s status or errors.
NOTE
Some messages may not appear on the display depending on the options or models.
Error Code Error Message Troubleshooting Page

Motor Failure: #A1-1111. Turn off then on. Call for service if the problem
A1-1111 Page 4–63
persists
A1-1113 Page 4–63
persists
A1-1211 Page 4–65
persists
A1-1213 Page 4–65
persists
A1-1611 Page 4–67
persists
A1-1612 Page 4–67
persists
A1-1613 Page 4–67
persists
A1-2211 Page 4–69
persists
A1-2212 Page 4–69
persists
A1-2213 Page 4–69
persists
A1-2311 Page 4–71
persists
A1-2312 Page 4–71
persists
A1-2313 Page 4–71
persists
A1-2411 Page 4–73
persists
A1-2412 Page 4–73
persists
A1-2413 Page 4–73
persists
A1-2511 Page 4–75
persists
A1-2512 Page 4–75
persists
A1-2513 Page 4–75
persists
A1-4310 Page 4–77
persists

4. Troubleshooting

A1-5212 Page 4–79
persists
A1-5213 Page 4–79
persists
A1-5312 Page 4–80
persists
A1-5313 Page 4–80
persists
A1-5412 Page 4–81
persists
A1-5413 Page 4–81
persists
A1-5512 Page 4–82
persists
A1-5513 Page 4–82
persists
Fan Failure: #A2-1211. Turn off then on. Call for service if the problem
A2-1211 Page 4–83
persists
A2-1212 Page 4–83
persists
Fan Failure: #A2-1221. Open the door, then close it. Call for service if the
A2-1221 Page 4–83
problem persists
A2-1223 Page 4–83
problem persists
A2-1521 Page 4–83
problem persists
A2-1523 Page 4–83
problem persists
A2-2310 Page 4–83
persists
A2-2311 Page 4–83
persists
A2-2321 Page 4–83
problem persists
A2-2323 Page 4–83
problem persists
A2-2410 Page 4–83
persists
A3-2113 The CTD sensor is dirty. Please clean it with soft cloth or paper Page 4–85
Sensor Failure: #A3-3111. Turn off then on. Call for service if the problem
A3-3111 Page 4–86
persists
A3-3112 Page 4–86
persists
A3-3113 Page 4–86
persists
A3-3114 Page 4–86
persists

4. Troubleshooting

A3-3210 Page 4–87
persists
A3-3211 Page 4–87
persists
A3-3212 Page 4–87
persists
A3-3310 Page 4–88
persists
A3-3311 Page 4–88
persists
A3-3312 Page 4–88
persists
A3-3410 Page 4–88
persists
A3-3411 Page 4–88
persists
A3-3412 Page 4–88
persists
A3-4114 The ACR sensor is dirty. Please clean it with soft cloth or paper Page 4–85
C1-2110 Prepare new yellow toner cartridge Page 4–89
C1-2120 Replace with new yellow toner cartridge. Page 4–89
C1-2130 End of life, Replace with new yellow toner cartridge Page 4–89
C1-2140 End of life, Replace with new yellow toner cartridge Page 4–89
Yellow Toner Cartridge Failure: #C1-2311. Install yellow toner cartridge
C1-2311 Page 4–90
again
C1-2411 Yellow toner cartridge is not installed. Install it Page 4–91
C1-2413 Shake yellow toner cartridge. Page 4–91
C1-2510 Yellow toner cartridge is not compatible. Check users guide Page 4–91
C1-2512 Yellow toner cartridge is not compatible. Check users guide Page 4–91
C1-3110 Prepare new magenta toner cartridge Page 4–92
C1-3120 Replace with new magenta toner cartridge Page 4–92
C1-3130 End of life, Replace with new magenta toner cartridge Page 4–92
C1-3140 End of life, Replace with new magenta toner cartridge Page 4–92
Magenta Toner Cartridge Failure: #C1-3311. Install magenta toner cartridge
C1-3311 Page 4–93
again
C1-3411 Magenta toner cartridge is not installed. Install it Page 4–94
C1-3413 Shake magenta toner cartridge. Page 4–94
C1-3512 Magenta toner cartridge is not compatible. Check users guide Page 4–94
C1-4110 Prepare new cyan toner cartridge Page 4–95
C1-4120 Replace with new cyan toner cartridge Page 4–95
C1-4130 End of life, Replace with new cyan toner cartridge Page 4–95
C1-4140 End of life, Replace with new cyan toner cartridge Page 4–95
C1-4311 Cyan Toner Cartridge Failure: #C1-4311. Install cyan toner cartridge again Page 4–96

4. Troubleshooting

C1-4411 Cyan toner cartridge is not installed. Install it Page 4–97
C1-4413 Shake cyan toner cartridge. Page 4–97
C1-4512 Cyan toner cartridge is not compatible. Check users guide Page 4–97
C1-5110 Prepare new black toner cartridge Page 4–98
C1-5120 Replace with new black toner cartridge Page 4–98
C1-5130 Replace with black new toner cartridge Page 4–98
C1-5140 End of life, Replace with new black toner cartridge Page 4–98
C1-5311 Black Toner Cartridge Failure: #C1-5311. Install black toner cartridge again Page 4–99
C1-5411 Black toner cartridge is not installed. Install it. Page 4–100
C1-5413 Shake black toner cartridge. Page 4–100
C1-5512 Black toner cartridge is not compatible. Check users guide Page 4–100
C3-2110 Prepare new yellow imaging unit Page 4–101
C3-2130 End of life, Replace with new yellow imaging unit Page 4–101
C3-2140 End of life, Replace with new yellow imaging unit Page 4–101
C3-2411 Yellow imaging unit is not installed. Install it Page 4–102
C3-2414 Yellow Imaging Unit Failure: #C3-2414. Install yellow imaging unit again Page 4–102
C3-2511 Yellow imaging unit is not compatible. Check users guide Page 4–102
C3-2512 Yellow imaging unit is not compatible. Check users guide Page 4–102
C3-3110 Prepare new magenta imaging unit Page 4–103
C3-3130 End of life, Replace with new magenta imaging unit Page 4–103
C3-3140 End of life, Replace with new magenta imaging unit Page 4–103
C3-3411 Magenta imaging unit is not installed. Install it Page 4–104
C3-3414 Magenta Imaging Unit Failure #C3-3414. Install magenta imaging unit again Page 4–104
C3-3512 Magenta imaging unit is not compatible. Check users guide Page 4–104
C3-4110 Prepare new cyan imaging unit Page 4–105
C3-4130 Replace with new cyan imaging unit Page 4–105
C3-4140 End of life, Replace with new cyan imaging unit Page 4–105
C3-4411 Cyan imaging unit is not installed. Install it Page 4–106
C3-4414 Cyan Imaging Unit Failure: #C3-4414. Install imaging unit again Page 4–106
C3-4512 Cyan imaging unit is not compatible. Check users guide Page 4–106
C3-5110 Prepare new black imaging unit Page 4–107
C3-5130 Replace with new black imaging unit Page 4–107
C3-5140 Replace with new black imaging unit Page 4–107
C3-5411 Black Imaging unit is not installed. Install it Page 4–108
C3-5414 Black Imaging Unit Failure: #C3-5414. Install imaging unit again Page 4–108
C3-5512 Black imaging unit is not compatible. Check users guide Page 4–108
C5-1110 Prepare new transfer belt unit Page 4–109
C5-1120 Replace new transfer belt unit Page 4–109
C5-3120 Replace with new Transfer roller. Page 4–110
C6-1120 Replace with new fuser unit Page 4–110

4. Troubleshooting

C6-1310 Fuser unit is not installed. Install it Page 4–111
C7-1110 Waste toner container is almost full. Order new one Page 4–112
C7-1130 Waste toner container is full. Replace it Page 4–112
C7-1311 Waste toner container is not installed. Install it Page 4–112
C8-2130 Replace with new yellow developer unit Page 4–113
C8-2210 Yellow Developer Failure: #C8-2210. Turn off then on Page 4–113
C8-2310 Yellow Developer Failure: #C8-2310. Install yellow developer unit again Page 4–113
Yellow Developer Failure: #C8-2313. Turn off then on. Please call for service
C8-2313 Page 4–113
if the problem persists
C8-3130 Replace with new magenta developer unit Page 4–114
C8-3210 Magenta Developer Failure: #C8-3210. Turn off then on Page 4–114
C8-3310 Magenta Developer Failure: #C8-3310. Install magenta developer unit again Page 4–114
Magenta Developer Failure: #C8-3313. Turn off then on. Please call for
C8-3313 Page 4–114
service if the problem persists
C8-4130 Replace with new cyan developer unit Page 4–115
C8-4210 Cyan Developer Failure: #C8-4210. Turn off then on Page 4–115
C8-4310 Cyan Developer Failure: #C8-4310. Install cyan developer unit again Page 4–115
Cyan Developer Failure: #C8-4313. Turn off then on. Please call for service
C8-4313 Page 4–115
C8-5130 Replace with new black developer unit Page 4–116
C8-5210 Black Developer Failure: #C8-5210. Turn off then on Page 4–116
C8-5310 Black Developer Failure: #C8-5310. Install black developer unit again Page 4–116
Black Developer Failure: #C8-5313. Turn off then on. Please call for service
C8-5313 Page 4–116
C9-2110 Prepare with new Transfer roller Page 4–117
C9-2120 Replace with new Transfer roller Page 4–117
C9-2220 TR Failure: #C9-2220. Install transfer roller again Page 4–118
H1-1311 Paper jam in Tray 3 Page 4–119
H1-1314 Paper jam inside of machine Page 4–119
H1-1322 Tray 3 cassette is pulled out. Insert it properly Page 4–121
H1-1351 Paper is low in Tray 3. Load paper Page 4–122
H1-1352 Paper is empty in Tray 3. Load paper Page 4–122
H1-1353 Input System Failure: #H1-1353. Pull Tray 3 out and insert it Page 4–123

4. Troubleshooting

H1-1422 Tray 4 cassette is pulled out. Insert it properly Page 4–126
H1-1451 Paper is low in Tray 4. Load paper Page 4–127
H1-1452 Paper is empty in Tray 4. Load paper Page 4–127
H1-1453 Input System Failure: #H1-1453. Pull Tray 4 out and insert it Page 4–128
H1-5323 Tray door is open. Close the door Page 4–129
H1-5330 DCF Failure: #H1-5330. Check internal DCF connection Page 4–130
H2-6700 Paper jam in front of finisher Page 4–131
H2-6701 Paper jam inside of finisher Page 4–131
H2-6704 Paper jam at exit of finisher Page 4–131
H2-6705 Paper jam at exit of finisher Page 4–131
H2-6706 Finisher Failure: #H2-6706. Check finisher Page 4–132
H2-6726 Finisher Stapler door is open. Close it Page 4–134
H2-6727 Finisher Jam door is open. Close it Page 4–134
H2-6732 Staple cartridge is low. Replace it Page 4–136

4. Troubleshooting

H2-6733 Staple cartridge is empty. Replace it Page 4–136
H2-6735 Too much paper in finisher stacker. Remove printed paper Page 4–138
H2-6744 Staple Cartridge not install. Install it Page 4–142
H2-6A50 Finisher Failure: #H2-6A50. Check finisher Page 4–143
H2-6A63 Staple cartridge is empty. Replace it Page 4–143
M1-1113 Paper jam in tray 1 Page 4–144
M1-1610 Paper jam in MP Tray Page 4–148
M1-3122 Tray 1 cassette is pulled out. Insert it properly Page 4–150
M1-3222 Tray 2 cassette is pulled out. Insert it properly Page 4–151
Tray Failure: #M1-4111. Pull tray 1 out and insert it. Call for service if the
M1-4111 Page 4–152
problem persists
Tray Failure: #M1-4211. Pull tray 2 out and insert it. Call for service if the
M1-4211 Page 4–153
problem persists
M1-5111 Paper is low in tray 1. Load paper Page 4–154
M1-5112 Paper is empty in tray 1. Load paper Page 4–154
M1-5211 Paper is low in tray 2. Load paper Page 4–155
M1-5212 Paper is empty in tray 2. Load paper Page 4–155
M2-1125 Paper jam inside of machine Page 4–157
Paper Mismatch at tray. Load tray with setting paper, and remove the jammed
M2-1213 Page 4–159
paper
M2-1333 Check whether the pieces of paper remain in the paper path Page 4–160
M2-2111 Paper jam at the top of duplex path Page 4–160

4. Troubleshooting

M2-2114 Paper jam at the top of duplex path Page 4–160
M3-1411 Paper jam in exit area Page 4–161
M3-1414 Paper jam in exit area Page 4–162
M3-2230 Paper in output bin is full. Remove printed paper Page 4–163
M3-2430 Paper in output bin is full. Remove printed paper Page 4–163
S1-1113 Video System Failure: #S1-1113. Turn off then on Page 4–164
S1-1313 The clock became initial time. Set a time again Page 4–165
HDD System Failure: #S1-2411. Turn off then on. Call for service if the
S1-2411 Page 4–167
problem persists
S1-2421 HDD System Failure: #S1-2421. Turn off then on Page 4–167
S1-2422 HDD System Failure: #S1-2422. Turn off then on Page 4–167
S1-2433 System Failure: #S1-2433 . Call for service Page 4–168
S1-2434 HDD Error #S1-2434. Check users guide Page 4–169
S1-2443 HDD System Failure #S1-2443 : Call for service Page 4–168
S1-2510 MSOK System Failure: #S1-2510. Turn off then on Page 4–170
S1-2511 MSOK System Failure: #S1-2511. Turn off then on Page 4–170
S1-2520 MSOK Failure: #S1-2520. Call for service. Page 4–170
S1-2521 MSOK Failure: #S1-2521. Call for service Page 4–170
S1-2523 PPM data is incorrect. Call for service & change MSOK Page 4–170
S1-2540 MSOK Failure: #S1-2540. Call for service & change MSOK Page 4–170
S2-1211 Engine System Failure: #S2-1211. Turn off then on Page 4–174

4. Troubleshooting

S2-4210 Front door is open. Close it Page 4–175
S2-4410 Right door is open. Close it Page 4–176
S2-5111 Failed to adjust the color registration Page 4–176
S2-5210 Failed to adjust the OPC Feedforward control Page 4–176
S2-5240 Failed to adjust the OPC Feedforward control Page 4–176
S3-3121 Scanner is locked Page 4–177
S3-3211 Scan System Failure: #S3-3211. Turn off then on Page 4–178
S4-3111 Fax System Failure: #S4-3111. Install fax modem card again Page 4–179
S5-3111 UI System Failure: #S5-3111. Call for service Page 4–180
S6-3122 Network cable is disconnected. Check it Page 4–181
S6-3123 This IP address conflicts with that of other system. Check it Page 4–182
S6-3128 802.1x authentication failed. Please contact the system administrator Page 4–182
S6-3224 BOOTP error in wireless LAN. Switching to Auto IP Page 4–183
S6-3225 BOOTP error in wireless LAN. Reconfigure DHCP or static IP Page 4–183
S6-3226 DHCP error in wireless LAN. Switching to Auto IP Page 4–183
S6-3227 DHCP error in wireless LAN. Reconfigure BOOTP or static IP Page 4–183
The IPv4 address assigned to wireless LAN conflicts with that of other
S6-3229 Page 4–182
system. Check it
The IPv6 address assigned to wireless LAN conflicts with that of other
S6-322A Page 4–182
system. Check it
S7-2110 Fuser Failure: #S7-2110. Turn off then on Page 4–183
U1-2113 Fuser Unit Failure: #U1-2113. Turn off then on Page 4–184
Fuser Unit Failure: #U1-2115. Turn off then on. Call for service if the
U1-2115 Page 4–186
problem persists
Fuser Unit Failure: #U1-2132. Turn off then on. Call for service if the
U1-2132 Page 4–187
problem persists
U1-2316 Fuser Failure: #U1-2316. Turn off then on Page 4–190

4. Troubleshooting

U1-233A Fuser Failure: #U1-233A. Turn off then on Page 4–192
U1-233D Fuser Failure: #U1-233D. Turn off then on Page 4–194
U2-6121 LSU Failure: #U2-6121. Please turn off then on Page 4–196
LSU Failure: #U2-6122. Turn off then on. Call for service if the problem
U2-6122 Page 4–196
persists
U2-6123 LSU Failure: #U2-6123. Please turn off then on Page 4–196
U2-6142 Page 4–198
persists
U2-6143 Page 4–198
persists
U3-3211 Original paper jam inside of scanner Page 4–199
U3-3213 Original paper jam inside the scanner Page 4–199
U3-3611 Original paper jam in the exit area of scanner Page 4–202
U3-4210 Top door of scanner is open Page 4–203

4. Troubleshooting
4.5.1. Ax-xxxx type error code
► Error Code
A1–1111
A1–1113
► Error message
Motor Failure: #A1-1111. Turn off then on. Call for service if the problem persists.
► Symptom
Regi/MP motor operation is abnormal.
► Troubleshooting method
• A1–1111 : Regi/MP motor is stopped but machine recognizes it as operational.
• A1–1113 : Regi/MP motor is operating but machine recognizes status as "Stopped".
1) Turn the machine off then on. If the error persists, turn the machine off again.
2) Open the side cover. Check if there are any foreign substances or paper around Regi./MP unit.
3) Remove the rear cover after removing 10 screws.
4) Check if the Regi/MP motor connector is connected correctly.
5) If the connection is OK, turn the machine on. Enter SVC mode. Select motor test.
(Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Test Routines > 100–0000)
Check the motor operation.
a) If the motor is not operational,

4. Troubleshooting
• Check the signal and power with the DVM.
• If the checked result is normal, replace the motor(JC31-00123B).
• If the checked result is abnormal, check the following.

- If 24V power is not generated, replace the SMPS board (JC44-00100A (220V) / JC44-00093A (110V)).
- If the control signal is abnormal, replace the main board(JC92–02429A).

b) If the motor is operational,
• Check the Pin Num 8. If the value is abnormal, replace the main board. If the value is normal, replace
the harness.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
A1–1211
A1–1213
► Error message
Motor Failure: #A1-1211. Turn off then on. Call for service if the problem persists
► Symptom
Fuser motor operation is abnormal.
• A1–1211 : Fuser motor is stopped but machine recognizes it as operational.
• A1–1213 : Fuser motor is operating but recognizes status as "Stopped".
2) Open the side cover. Check if there are any foreign substances or paper around fuser unit.
4) Check if the fuser motor connector is connected correctly.

4. Troubleshooting


the harness.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
A1–1611
A1–1612
A1–1613
► Error message
► Symptom
ITB motor operation is abnormal
• A1–1611 : ITB motor is stopped but machine recognizes it as operational.
• A1–1612 : ITB motor is not operated for print-job.
• A1–1613 : ITB motor is operating but machine recognizes status as "Stopped".
2) Open the side cover. Remove the ITB unit

(Refer to 3.2.2.4 ITB Unit in chapter 3)
4) Check if the ITB motor connector is connected correctly.

4. Troubleshooting


the harness.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
A1–2211
A1–2212
A1–2213
► Error message
► Symptom
Yellow OPC motor operation is abnormal.
• A1–2211 : Yellow OPC motor is stopped but machine recognizes it as operational.
• A1–2212 : Yellow OPC motor is not operated for print-job.
• A1–2213 : Yellow OPC motor is operating but machine recognizes status as "Stopped".
2) Open the side cover. Check if there are any foreign substances or paper around yellow drum drive unit.
4) Check if the yellow OPC motor connector is connected correctly.
5) If the connection is OK, turn the machine on. Enter SVC mode. Select the yellow OPC motor test.

4. Troubleshooting



the harness.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
A1–2311
A1–2312
A1–2313
► Error message
► Symptom
Magenta OPC motor operation is abnormal.
• A1–2311 : Magenta OPC motor is stopped but machine recognizes it as operational.
• A1–2312 : Magenta OPC motor is not operated for print-job.
• A1–2313 : Magenta OPC motor is operating but machine recognizes status as "Stopped".
2) Open the side cover. Check if there are any foreign substances or paper around magenta drum drive unit.
4) Check if the magenta OPC motor connector is connected correctly.
5) If the connection is OK, turn the machine on. Enter SVC mode. Select the magenta OPC motor test.

4. Troubleshooting



the harness.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
A1–2411
A1–2412
A1–2413
► Error message
► Symptom
Cyan OPC motor operation is abnormal.
• A1–2411 : Cyan OPC motor is stopped but machine recognizes it as operational.
• A1–2412 : Cyan OPC motor is not operated for print-job.
• A1–2413 : Cyan OPC motor is operating but machine recognizes status as "Stopped".
2) Open the side cover. Check if there are any foreign substances or paper around cyan drum drive unit.
4) Check if the cyan OPC motor connector is connected correctly.
5) If the connection is OK, turn the machine on. Enter SVC mode. Select the cyan OPC motor test.

4. Troubleshooting



the harness.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
A1–2511
A1–2512
A1–2513
► Error message
► Symptom
Black OPC motor operation is abnormal.
• A1–2511 : Black OPC motor is stopped but machine recognizes it as operational.
• A1–2512 : Black OPC motor is not operated for print-job.
• A1–2513 : Black OPC motor is operating but machine recognizes status as "Stopped".
2) Open the side cover. Check if there are any foreign substances or paper around black drum drive unit.
4) Check if the black OPC motor connector is connected correctly.
5) If the connection is OK, turn the machine on. Enter SVC mode. Select the black OPC motor test.

4. Troubleshooting



the harness.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
A1–4310
► Error message
► Symptom
The contact of ITB Unit is abnormal. / The resistance value of the first transfer roller is abnormal.
1) Enter SVC mode. Select the T1 engage motor test. (Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Test Routines >
100–0080)
Push the start button and check the motor operation.
2) If the motor is not operational,

a) Open the side cover. Check if the ITB connector is connected correctly or is deformed.
b) If the harness is defective, replace it.

c) Remove the ITB unit from the machine. Check if the photo interrupter sensor is contaminated or assembled
properly.
d) If the photo sensor is defective, replace it.

e) If the motor is operational but the engage gear is not operational, replace the main drive unit(JC93-00723A).
3) If there is a motor noise or the motor is not operational normally, check the following :
a) Remove the rear cover. Check if the T1 engage motor in the main drive unit is defective.
i) Rotate the motor manually.

4. Troubleshooting
• If the motor operation is stiff, replace the motor(JC93-00452A).

ii) Measure the resistance value with DVM.
• If the measured value is out of the standard area (7~10 ohm), replace the motor(JC93-00452A).
b) If the motor is normal, measure the motor signal with DVM.
• If the phase output voltage is changed in 0~24V(8~10V), the output value is normal.
• If the phase output voltage is not changed to 0 or 24V, replace the main board(JC92-02429A).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
A1–5212
A1–5213
► Error message
► Symptom
Yellow toner is not supplied normally.
• A1–5212 : Toner supply is stopped during operation.
• A1–5213 : Toner is not supplied.
1) Open the front cover. If the yellow toner pipe is blocked, open it.
2) Turn the machine off then on. If the error persists, check the following steps.
3) Enter SVC mode. Select the yellow toner supply motor test.
(Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Test Routines)
• 111-0010 : Toner Dispense Motor Yellow
4) If the motor is not operational, measure the yellow motor power with DVM.
a) If 24V power is generated, replace the yellow toner supply motor(JC93-00446A).

b) If 24V power is not generated,
• Measure the 24V power on the SMPS board. If the SMPS board(JC44-00100A (220V) / JC44-00093A
(110V)) is defective, replace it.
• If the SMPS board is normal, replace the main board(JC92–02429A).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
A1–5312
A1–5313
► Error message
► Symptom
Magenta toner is not supplied normally.
1) Open the front cover. If the magenta toner pipe is blocked, open it.
3) Enter SVC mode. Select the magenta toner supply motor test.
• 111-0020 : Toner Dispense Motor Magenta
4) If the motor is not operational, measure the magenta motor power with DVM.
a) If 24V power is generated, replace the magenta toner supply motor(JC93-00446A).


4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
A1–5412
A1–5413
► Error message
► Symptom
Cyan toner is not supplied normally.
1) Open the front cover. If the cyan toner pipe is blocked, open it.
3) Enter SVC mode. Select the cyan toner supply motor test.
• 111-0030 : Toner Dispense Motor Cyan
4) If the motor is not operational, measure the cyan motor power with DVM.
a) If 24V power is generated, replace the cyan toner supply motor(JC93-00446A).


4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
A1–5512
A1–5513
► Error message
► Symptom
Black toner is not supplied normally.
1) Open the front cover. If the black toner pipe is blocked, open it.
3) Enter SVC mode. Select the black toner supply motor test.
• 111-0040 : Toner Dispense Motor Black
4) If the motor is not operational, measure the black motor power with DVM.
a) If 24V power is generated, replace the black toner supply motor(JC93-00446A).


4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
A2–1211 / A2–1212 / A2–1221 / A2–1223
A2–1521 / A2–1523
A2–2310 / A2–2311 / A2–2321 / A2–2323
A2–2410
► Error message
Fan Failure: #A2–1211 / A2–1212 / A2–1221 / A2–1223. Turn off then on. Call for service if the problem persists
Fan Failure: #A2–1521 / A2–1523. Turn off then on. Call for service if the problem persists
Fan Failure: #A2–2310 / A2–2311 / A2–2321 / A2–2323. Turn off then on. Call for service if the problem persists
Fan Failure: #A2–2410. Turn off then on. Call for service if the problem persists
► Symptom
SMPS or Fuser or Duplex or LSI fan is not operational.
NOTE
• SMPS fan error : A2–1211 / A2–1212 / A2–1221 / A2–1223
• Duplex fan error : A2–1521 / A2–1523
• Fuser fan error : A2–2310 / A2–2311 / A2–2321 / A2–2323
• LSU fan error : A2–2410
1) Turn the machine off.
2) Remove the rear cover.

(Refer to 3.3.2 Rear Cover in chapter 3)
3) Check if the corresponding fan connector is connected correctly.
4) If the connection is OK, Enter SVC mode and execute fan test.
• 100-0260 : SMPS Fan Run
• 109-0040 : Fuser Fan Run

4. Troubleshooting
5) If the fan is not operational, measure the fan power. (Red line)
a) If 24V power is generated, replace the defective fan.
• Fuser Fan : JC31–00161A
• SMPS Fan : JC31–00160B

6) If the fan operation is normal but the error persists,

a) Check the yellow line signal with DVM. (Refer to the image in step 5)
b) Check fan operation as connected or disconnected.
• If the Lock signal is 0V continually, check the harness. If the harness is OK, replace the main board.
• If the signal value is different from the table above, replace the fan.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
A3–2113 / A3–4114
► Error message
The CTD/ACR sensor is dirty. Please clean it with soft cloth or paper.
► Symptom
CTD/ACR sensor window is contaminated.
1) Open the side cover.
2) Clean the sensor window [A] with a soft cloth.
3) Close the side cover.
4) Enter SVC mode. Select the “CTD Sensor Cleaning”

(Diagnostics Image Management > Auto Color Tone Adjustment Condition > CTD Sensor Cleaning)
5) When pop up appears, select the “Yes” button.
NOTE
a) CTD sensor calibration will start. Then “CTD sensor failure” error will be solved
b) If you don’t execute the CTD sensor cleaning in SVC mode, error message persists.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
A3–3111
A3–3112
A3–3113
A3–3114
► Error message
Sensor Failure: #A3-3111. Turn off then on. Call for service if the problem persists
► Symptom
The NC sensor in the fuser unit is defective. / The sensor signal is abnormal due to a defective harness.
• A3–3111 : Center NC sensor is in short status.
• A3–3112 : Center NC sensor is in open status.
• A3–3113 : Side NC sensor is in short status.
• A3–3114 : Side NC sensor is in open status.
1) Enter SVC mode. Execute sensor test to check the sensor operation. (Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics >
Engine Test Routines)
• 109-0000 : Fuser Temperature A
• 109-0010 : Fuser Temperature B
2) Remove and disassemble the fuser unit.

(Refer to 3.3.23 Fuser Unit)
3) Measure the resistance value of the thermistor (1404-001453). If the measured value is out of 307KΩ~430KΩ
@25℃, replace the thermistor.
4) Install the fuser unit after replacing the thermistor.
5) If the error persists, replace the fuser unit (JC91-01063A(220V) / JC91–01064A (110V)).
6) If the error persists after replacing fuser unit, replace the main board(JC92–02429A).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
A3–3210
A3–3211
A3–3212
► Error message
► Symptom
Inner temperature sensor is defective.
• A3–3210 : Inner temperature sensor value is abnormal.
• A3–3211 : Inner temperature sensor is in short status.
• A3–3212 : Inner temperature sensor is in open status.
1) Enter SVC mode. Execute sensor test to check the sensor operation.(Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine
Test Routines > 109-0012 Inner Temperature )
2) Open the side cover. Measure the resistance value of the connector at both ends.
• If the values is not in 10KΩ ± 1% (@ 25 ℃), replace the photo sensor (1404-001417).
3) If the sensor is normal, replace the main board(JC92-02429A).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
A3–3310
A3–3311
A3–3312
A3–3410
A3–3411
A3–3412
► Error message
► Symptom
Outer temperature/humidity sensor is defective.
• A3–3310 / A3–3311 / A3–3312 : Temperature function is abnormal.
• A3–3410 / A3–3411 / A3–3412 : Humidity function is abnormal.
1) Enter SVC mode. Execute sensor test to check the sensor operation. (Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine
Test Routines > 109-0013 Outer Temperature )
2) Remove the left cover.

(Refer to 3.3.4 Temperature Sensor)
Measure the resistance value of the connector at both ends.
If the value is not in 47.5KΩ ~ 52.5KΩ (@ 25 ℃), replace the sensor(JC93-00486A).
3) If the harness and sensor are normal, replace the main board (JC92-02429A).

4. Troubleshooting
4.5.2. Cx-xxxx type error code
► Error Code
C1–2110
► Error message
Prepare new yellow toner cartridge.
► Symptom
Yellow toner is almost empty.
1) Order new yellow toner cartridge because toner cartridge with level of “Low” will be exhausted soon.
► Error Code
C1–2120
C1–2130
C1–2140
► Error message
Replace with new yellow toner cartridge
End of life, Replace with new yellow toner cartridge
► Symptom
The yellow toner cartridge is at the end of its life.
1) Open the front cover.
2) Remove the yellow toner cartridge.
3) Install the new yellow toner cartridge (CLT-Y809S)
4) Close the front cover.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C1–2311
► Error message
Yellow Toner Cartridge Failure: #C1-2311. Install yellow toner cartridge again
► Symptom
Yellow toner supply is inefficient or abnormal.
2) Remove the yellow toner cartridge. Shake the toner cartridge horizontally to distribute the toner evenly inside
the cartridge.
3) Check if the toner supply pipe is blocked. If it is closed, open it.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C1–2411
C1–2413
► Error message
Yellow toner cartridge is not installed. Install it.
Shake yellow toner cartridge.
► Symptom
The yellow toner cartridge is not installed. / The CRUM data is not detected.
1) Open the front cover. Check if the yellow toner cartridge is installed.
2) Remove and reinstall the yellow toner cartridge.
3) If the problem persists, check if the toner cartridge modular jack is contaminated or deformed.
4) Replace the yellow toner cartridge(CLT-Y809S) with a new one.
► Error Code
C1–2510 / C1–2512
► Error message
Yellow toner cartridge is not compatible. Check users guide.
► Symptom
Yellow toner cartridge is not compatible.
1) Replace the yellow toner cartridge with a new one.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C1–3110
► Error message
Prepare new magenta toner cartridge.
► Symptom
Magenta toner is almost empty.
1) Order new magenta toner cartridge because toner cartridge with level of “Low” will be exhausted soon.
► Error Code
C1–3120
C1–3130
C1–3140
► Error message
Replace with new magenta toner cartridge
End of life, Replace with new magenta toner cartridge
► Symptom
The magenta toner cartridge is at the end of its life.
2) Remove the magenta toner cartridge.
3) Install the new magenta toner cartridge (CLT-M809S)

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C1–3311
► Error message
Magenta Toner Cartridge Failure: #C1-3311. Install magenta toner cartridge again
► Symptom
Magenta toner supply is inefficient or abnormal.
2) Remove the magenta toner cartridge. Shake the toner cartridge horizontally to distribute the toner evenly inside
the cartridge.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C1–3411
C1–3413
► Error message
Magenta toner cartridge is not installed. Install it.
Shake magenta toner cartridge.
► Symptom
The magenta toner cartridge is not installed. / The CRUM data is not detected.
1) Open the front cover. Check if the magenta toner cartridge is installed.
2) Remove and reinstall the magenta toner cartridge.
4) Replace the magenta toner cartridge(CLT-M809S) with a new one.
► Error Code
C1–3512
► Error message
Magenta toner cartridge is not compatible. Check users guide.
► Symptom
Magenta toner cartridge is not compatible.
1) Replace the magenta toner cartridge with a new one.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C1–4110
► Error message
Prepare new cyan toner cartridge.
► Symptom
Cyan toner is almost empty.
1) Order new cyan toner cartridge because toner cartridge with level of “Low” will be exhausted soon.
► Error Code
C1–4120
C1–4130
C1–4140
► Error message
Replace with new cyan toner cartridge
End of life, Replace with new cyan toner cartridge
► Symptom
The cyan toner cartridge is at the end of its life.
2) Remove the cyan toner cartridge.
3) Install the new cyan toner cartridge (CLT-C809S)

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C1–4311
► Error message
Cyan Toner Cartridge Failure: #C1-4311. Install yellow toner cartridge again
► Symptom
Cyan toner supply is inefficient or abnormal.
2) Remove the cyan toner cartridge. Shake the toner cartridge horizontally to distribute the toner evenly inside
the cartridge.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C1–4411
C1–4413
► Error message
Cyan toner cartridge is not installed. Install it.
Shake cyan toner cartridge.
► Symptom
The cyan toner cartridge is not installed. / The CRUM data is not detected.
1) Open the front cover. Check if the cyan toner cartridge is installed.
2) Remove and reinstall the cyan toner cartridge.
4) Replace the cyan toner cartridge(CLT-C809S) with a new one.
► Error Code
C1–4512
► Error message
Cyan toner cartridge is not compatible. Check users guide.
► Symptom
Cyan toner cartridge is not compatible.
1) Replace the cyan toner cartridge with a new one.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C1–5110
► Error message
Prepare new black toner cartridge.
► Symptom
Black toner is almost empty.
1) Order new black toner cartridge because toner cartridge with level of “Low” will be exhausted soon.
► Error Code
C1–5120
C1–5130
C1–5140
► Error message
Replace with new black toner cartridge
End of life, Replace with new black toner cartridge
► Symptom
The black toner cartridge is at the end of its life.
2) Remove the black toner cartridge.
3) Install the new black toner cartridge (CLT-K809S)

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C1–5311
► Error message
Black Toner Cartridge Failure: #C1-5311. Install black toner cartridge again
► Symptom
Black toner supply is inefficient or abnormal.
2) Remove the black toner cartridge. Shake the toner cartridge horizontally to distribute the toner evenly inside
the cartridge.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C1–5411
C1–5413
► Error message
Black toner cartridge is not installed. Install it.
Shake black toner cartridge.
► Symptom
The black toner cartridge is not installed. / The CRUM data is not detected.
1) Open the front cover. Check if the black toner cartridge is installed.
2) Remove and reinstall the black toner cartridge.
4) Replace the black toner cartridge(CLT-K809S) with a new one.
► Error Code
C1–5512
► Error message
Black toner cartridge is not compatible. Check users guide.
► Symptom
Black toner cartridge is not compatible.
1) Replace the black toner cartridge with a new one.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C3–2110
► Error message
Prepare new yellow imaging unit
► Symptom
Yellow drum unit has almost reached the end of its life.
1) Order new yellow drum unit because drum unit with level of “Low” will be exhausted soon.
► Error Code
C3–2130
C3–2140
► Error message
End of life, Replace with new yellow imaging unit
► Symptom
Yellow drum unit is at the end of its life.
2) Remove the waste toner container.
3) Remove the yellow drum unit.

(Refer to 3.2.2.1. Drum Unit)
4) Install the new yellow drum unit(CLT-R809).
5) Clean the LSU window.

(Refer to 3.2.1.2. Cleaning the LSU window)
6) Install the waste toner container.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C3–2411
C3–2414
► Error message
Yellow imaging unit is not installed. Install it.
Yellow Imaging Unit Failure: #C3-2414. Install yellow imaging unit again
► Symptom
The yellow drum unit is not installed. / The CRUM data is not detected. / The machine can’t read the charger resistance
of the imaging unit.
3) Remove and reinstall the yellow drum unit

► Error Code
C3–2511 / C3–2512
► Error message
Yellow imaging unit is not compatible. Check user's guide
► Symptom
Yellow drum unit is not compatible.
3) Remove the yellow drum unit. Check if the drum unit is compatible with the machine.
4) If the drum unit is not a samsung genuine, replace it with a new one.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C3–3110
► Error message
Prepare new magenta imaging unit
► Symptom
Magenta drum unit has almost reached the end of its life.
1) Order new magenta drum unit because drum unit with level of “Low” will be exhausted soon.
► Error Code
C3–3130
C3–3140
► Error message
End of life, Replace with new magenta imaging unit
► Symptom
Magenta drum unit is at the end of its life.
3) Remove the magenta drum unit.

4) Install the new magenta drum unit(CLT-R809).


4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C3–3411
C3–3414
► Error message
Magenta imaging unit is not installed. Install it.
Magenta Imaging Unit Failure #C3-3414. Install magenta imaging unit again.
► Symptom
The magenta drum unit is not installed. / The CRUM data is not detected. / The machine can’t read the charger
resistance of the imaging unit.
3) Remove and reinstall the magenta drum unit

► Error Code
C3–3512
► Error message
Magenta imaging unit is not compatible. Check user's guide
► Symptom
Magenta drum unit is not compatible.
3) Remove the magenta drum unit. Check if the drum unit is compatible with the machine.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C3–4110
► Error message
Prepare new cyan imaging unit
► Symptom
Cyan drum unit has almost reached the end of its life.
1) Order new cyan drum unit because drum unit with level of “Low” will be exhausted soon.
► Error Code
C3–4130
C3–4140
► Error message
► Symptom
Cyan drum unit is at the end of its life.
3) Remove the cyan drum unit.

4) Install the new cyan drum unit(CLT-R809).


4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C3–4411
C3–4414
► Error message
Cyan imaging unit is not installed. Install it.
Cyan Imaging Unit Failure: #C3-4414. Install imaging unit again.
► Symptom
The cyan drum unit is not installed. / The CRUM data is not detected./ The machine can’t read the charger resistance
3) Remove and reinstall the magenta drum unit

► Error Code
C3–4512
► Error message
Cyan imaging unit is not compatible. Check user's guide
► Symptom
Cyan drum unit is not compatible.
3) Remove the cyan drum unit. Check if the drum unit is compatible with the machine.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C3–5110
► Error message
Prepare new cyan imaging unit
► Symptom
Cyan drum unit has almost reached the end of its life.
1) Order new cyan drum unit because drum unit with level of “Low” will be exhausted soon.
► Error Code
C3–5130
C3–5140
► Error message
► Symptom
Cyan drum unit is at the end of its life.
3) Remove the cyan drum unit.

4) Install the new cyan drum unit(CLT-R809).


4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C3–5411
C3–5414
► Error message
Black imaging unit is not installed. Install it.
Black Imaging Unit Failure: #C3-5414. Install imaging unit again.
► Symptom
The black drum unit is not installed. / The CRUM data is not detected. / The machine can’t read the charger resistance
3) Remove and reinstall the black drum unit

► Error Code
C3–5512
► Error message
Black imaging unit is not compatible. Check user's guide
► Symptom
Black drum unit is not compatible.
3) Remove the black drum unit. Check if the drum unit is compatible with the machine.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C5–1110
C5–1120
► Error message
Prepare new transfer belt unit.
Replace new transfer belt unit.
► Symptom
The life of the ITB Unit expires soon or has expired.
2) Replace the ITB Unit (JC96-06660A).

(Refer to 3.2.2.3. ITB Cleaner and 3.2.2.4. ITB Unit)
3) Turn the machine on.
4) Enter SVC mode.
• To enter SVC mode, press 1,2,3 number keys simultaneously. When the password dialog box appears, enter
“1934” and press the “OK” button.
5) Select “TRANSFER”
(INFORMATION > Supply Status > Field Replacement Unit > TRANSFER)
6) Select “ITB Roller”. The “RESET” button will be activated. Click “RESET” to clear the ITB count.
7) Exit SVC mode by pushing the home button.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C5–3120
► Error message
Replace with new Transfer roller.
► Symptom
The life of the transfer roller has expired.
2) Replace the Transfer roller(JC95-01514A).

(Refer to 3.2.2.6. Transfer roller)
4) Enter SVC mode.
• To enter SVC mode, press 1,2,3 number keys simultaneously. When the password dialog box appears, enter
“1934” and press the “OK” button.
6) Select “T2 Roller”. The “RESET” button will be activated. Click “RESET” to clear the T2 Roller count.
7) Exit SVC mode by pushing the home button.
► Error Code
C6–1120
► Error message
Replace with new fuser unit
► Symptom
The life of the fuser unit has expired.
2) Replace the fuser unit(JC91-01063A (220V) /JC91-01064A (110V)).

(Refer to 3.2.2.5. Fuser unit)

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C6–1310
► Error message
Fuser unit is not installed. Install it.
► Symptom
The fuser unit is not installed or fuser unit connector is not connected properly.
1) Turn the machine off then on.
2) If the problem persists, turn the machine off again.
3) Open the side cover. Check if the fuser unit is installed. If not, install the fuser unit.
4) If the fuser unit is installed, remove it.

(Refer to 3.2.2.5. Fuser unit)
5) Check if the fuser draw connector (JC39–01677A) is broken or defective.
6) Install the fuser unit.
7) If the problem persists, replace the fuser unit(JC91–01063A(220V) / JC91–01064A(110V).
CAUTION
The temperature gets high in the vicinity of the fuser unit. When replacing it, you may get burned. Before replacing
it, make sure that fuser unit has cooled.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C7–1110
C7–1130
► Error message
Waste toner container is almost full. Order new one.
Waste toner container is full. Replace it.
► Symptom
The life of the waste toner container expires soon or has expired.
2) Remove the waste toner container(CLT-W809). Install a new waste toner container.
► Error Code
C7–1311
► Error message
Waste toner container is not installed. Install it.
► Symptom
The waste toner container is not installed.
2) Remove and reinstall the waste toner container.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C8–2130
► Error message
Replace with new yellow developer unit
► Symptom
The life of the yellow developer unit expires has expired.
2) Replace the yellow developer unit.

(Refer to 3.2.2.2. Developer Unit)
3) Turn the machine on then print the test page.
► Error Code
C8–2210
C8–2310
C8–2313
► Error message
Yellow Developer Failure: #C8-2210. Turn off then on
Yellow Developer Failure: #C8-2310. Install yellow developer unit again
Yellow Developer Failure: #C8-2313. Turn off then on. Please call for service if the problem persists
► Symptom
The yellow developer unit has a problem with toner supply or sensor calibration.
4) Install the waste toner container. Close the front cover.
6) If the problem persists, remove and reinstall the yellow developer unit.
7) If the problem persists, replace the yellow developer unit.


4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C8–3130
► Error message
Replace with new magenta developer unit
► Symptom
The life of the magenta developer unit expires has expired.
2) Replace the magenta developer unit.

► Error Code
C8–3210
C8–3310
C8–3313
► Error message
Magenta Developer Failure: #C8-3210. Turn off then on
Magenta Developer Failure: #C8-3310. Install magenta developer unit again
Magenta Developer Failure: #C8-3313. Turn off then on. Please call for service if the problem persists
► Symptom
The magenta developer unit has a problem with toner supply or sensor calibration.
6) If the problem persists, remove and reinstall the magenta developer unit.
7) If the problem persists, replace the magenta developer unit.


4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C8–4130
► Error message
Replace with new cyan developer unit
► Symptom
The life of the cyan developer unit expires has expired.
2) Replace the cyan developer unit.

► Error Code
C8–4210
C8–4310
C8–4313
► Error message
Cyan Developer Failure: #C8-4210. Turn off then on
Cyan Developer Failure: #C8-4310. Install cyan developer unit again
Cyan Developer Failure: #C8-4313. Turn off then on. Please call for service if the problem persists
► Symptom
The cyan developer unit has a problem with toner supply or sensor calibration.
6) If the problem persists, remove and reinstall the cyan developer unit.
7) If the problem persists, replace the cyan developer unit.


4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C8–5130
► Error message
Replace with new black developer unit
► Symptom
The life of the black developer unit expires has expired.
2) Replace the black developer unit.

► Error Code
C8–5210
C8–5310
C8–5313
► Error message
Black Developer Failure: #C8-5210. Turn off then on
Black Developer Failure: #C8-5310. Install black developer unit again
Black Developer Failure: #C8-5313. Turn off then on. Please call for service if the problem persists
► Symptom
The black developer unit has a problem with toner supply or sensor calibration.
6) If the problem persists, remove and reinstall the black developer unit.
7) If the problem persists, replace the black developer unit.


4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C9–2110
C9–2120
► Error message
Replace with new Transfer roller.
► Symptom
The life of the second transfer roller(T2) expires soon or has expired.
2) Replace the second transfer roller(JC95-01514A) with a new one.

4) Enter SVC mode.
• To enter the service mode, press 1,2,3 number keys simultaneously. When the password dialog box appears,
enter “1934” and press the “OK” button.
6) Select “T2 Roller”. The “RESET” button will be activated. Click “RESET” to clear the T2 Roller count.
7) Exit the SVC mode by pushing the home button.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C9–2220
C9–2120
► Error message
TR Failure: #C9-2220. Install transfer roller again
► Symptom
The life of the second transfer roller(T2) is not installed.
2) Remove and reinstall the second transfer roller.

4) If the problem persists, replace the HVPS board(JC44–00212A).

(Refer to 3.3.3. HVPS board)

4. Troubleshooting
4.5.3. H1-xxxx type (DCF) error code
► Error Code
H1-1311
H1-1312
H1-1313
H1-1314
H1-1315
H1-1317
H1-1318
► Error message
Paper jam in Tray 3.
► Symptom
Paper jam has occurred in tray3. (Pick up unit connection is defective. / Pickup rollers are defective. / Feed sensor
is defective.)
1) Open the DCF Take Away-Cover. Remove the jammed paper.
2) Remove tray3. Remove the jammed paper. Close the DCF Take Away-Cover and insert tray3.
3) If this jam error occurs frequently, check the rollers below.

a) Remove the tray3 and tray4.
b) Check if the pick up/ reverse/ forward rollers are assembled correctly.
c) If the pick up/ reverse/ forward rollers are worn out or contaminated, replace the defective roller(JC93-00540A).
4) If pick up/ reverse/ forward rollers have no problem, check the following.
a) Remove the DCF pick up unit1. Check if the feed sensor cable is connected correctly.
b) Check if the sensor cable on DCF board is connected correctly.

4. Troubleshooting
c) If the connection is OK, replace the feed sensor(0604-001381).

d) Install the DCF pick up unit1.
5) If the problem persists after checking step 3~4, check the following :
a) Remove the DCF pick up unit1. Check if the sensor and actuator are assembled correctly.
b) When pushing the pickup lever, check if the pick up rollers are down.
c) Replace the DCF pick up unit1(JC93-00513A) or defective part.
6) Check the DCF feed motor.

a) Check if the DCF feed motor cable is connected correctly.
b) If the connection is OK, replace the DCF feed drive unit(JC93-00447A).
(Refer to 3.3.33.2 DCF Feed Motor)
7) Check the DCF pick up motor.

a) Check if the DCF pick up motor cable is connected correctly.
b) If the connection is OK, replace the DCF pick up drive unit(JC93-00442A).
(Refer to 3.3.33.3 DCF Pick Up Motor)

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
H1-1322
► Error message
Tray 3 cassette is pulled out. Insert it properly.
► Symptom
Tray 3 is pulled out or the auto size sensor connector is not connected or broken.
1) Remove and insert tray3 correctly.
2) If the problem persists, remove tray3 and tray4. Look inside machine.
3) Check if the auto size sensor cable is connected correctly. Unplug and reconnect it.
4) If the connection is OK, replace the auto size sensor(JC93-00018A).
5) If the problem persists, replace the DCF board(JC92-02453A).

(Refer to 3.3.33.1. DCF Main Board)

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
H1-1351
H1-1352
► Error message
Paper is low in Tray 3. Load paper.
Paper is empty in Tray 3. Load paper.
► Symptom
Paper in the tray is less than 10% of specification. / The photo sensor is defective.
1) Remove tray3. Load the paper in tray3.
2) If paper is loaded but error message has not disappeared, check the following.
a) Remove the DCF pick up unit1.
b) Check if the photo sensor in the DCF pick up unit1 is contaminated. If so, clean it.
c) If the photo sensor(0604-001393) is defective, replace it.
d) If the actuator(JC66-03199A) is defective, replace it.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
H1-1353
► Error message
Input System Failure #H1-1353 : Pull Tray 3 out and insert it.
► Symptom
The paper is not fed from tray3.
3) If the problem persists, turn the machine off.
4) Remove the Bracket Rear Cover after removing 6 screws.
5) Check if the connection between the DCF pick up drive and DCF board is correct.
6) If the connection is OK, replace the pick up drive unit(JC93-00442A).

(Refer to 3.3.33.3. DCF Pick Up Motor)
7) If the problem persists, check the following.

b) Check if the photo sensor in the DCF pick up unit1 is contaminated, clean it.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
H1-1411
H1-1412
H1-1417
H1-1418
► Error message
► Symptom
Paper jam has occurred in tray4. (Pick up unit connection is defective. / Pickup rollers are defective. / Feed sensor
is defective.)
1) Open the DCF Take Away-Cover. Remove the jammed paper.
2) Remove tray4. Remove the jammed paper. Close the DCF Take Away-Cover and insert tray4.
3) If this jam error occurs frequently, check the rollers below.

a) Remove tray3 and tray4.
c) If the pick up/ reverse/ forward rollers are worn out or contaminated, replace the defective roller(JC93-00540A).
4) If pick up/ reverse/ forward rollers have no problem, check the following.
a) Remove the DCF pick up unit2. Check if the feed sensor cable is connected correctly.
b) Check if the sensor cable on DCF board is connected correctly.
c) If the connection is OK, replace the feed sensor(0604-001381).
d) Install the DCF pick up unit2.
5) If the problem persists after checking step 3~4, check the following :
a) Remove the DCF pick up unit2. Check if the sensor and actuator are assembled correctly.
b) When pushing the pickup lever, check if the pick up rollers are down.

4. Troubleshooting
c) Replace the DCF pick up unit2(JC93-00513A) or defective part.
6) Check the DCF feed motor.

a) Check if the DCF feed motor cable is connected correctly.
b) If the connection is OK, replace the DCF feed drive unit(JC93-00447A).
(Refer to 3.3.33.2 DCF Feed Motor)
7) Check the DCF pick up motor.

a) Check if the DCF pick up motor cable is connected correctly.
b) If the connection is OK, replace the DCF pick up drive unit(JC93-00442A).
(Refer to 3.3.33.3 DCF Pick Up Motor)

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
H1-1422
► Error message
► Symptom
Tray 4 is pulled out or the auto size sensor connector is not connected or is broken.
2) If the problem persists, remove tray3 and tray4. Look inside machine.
3) Check if the auto size sensor cable is connected correctly. Unplug and reconnect it.
4) If the connection is OK, replace the auto size sensor(JC93-00018A).
5) If the problem persists, replace the DCF board(JC92-02453A).


4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
H1–1451
H1–1452
► Error message
► Symptom
Paper in tray4 is less than 10%. / The photo sensor is defective.
1) Remove tray4. Load the paper in tray4.
2) If paper is loaded but error message has not disappeared, check the following.
d) If the actuator(JC66-03199A) is defective, replace it.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
H1-1453
► Error message
Input System Failure #H1-1453 : Pull Tray 4 out and insert it.
► Symptom
3) If the problem persists, turn the machine off.
5) Check if the connection between the DCF pick up drive and DCF board is correct.
6) If the connection is OK, replace the pick up drive unit(JC93-00442A).

(Refer to 3.3.33.3. DCF Pick Up Motor)


4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
H1-5323
► Error message
Tray door is open. Close the door
► Symptom
DCF Takeaway-Cover is open. / I/L-Switch harness or connector is defective.
1) Open and close the DCF Take away-Cover correctly.

a) Check if I/L-Switch(HARNESS-DCF COVER OPEN)(JC39–01696A) is not operating normally. If it is
defective, replace it.
b) If the I/L Switch is OK, replace the DCF board(JC92–02453A).


4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
H1-5330
► Error message
DCF Failure #H1-5330. Check internal DCF connection.
► Symptom
A communication error between the optional tray and the main machine has occurred.
1) Lift up and release the DCF unit from the machine.
3) Check if the interface connector is connected to the DCF board. If the interface connector(JC39–01690A) is
defective, replace it.
4) If the problem persists, replace the DCF board.


4. Troubleshooting
4.5.4. H2-xxxx (Finisher) type error code
► Error Code
H2–6700
H2–6701
H2–6702
H2–6703
H2–6704
H2–6705
► Error message
Paper jam inside of finisher
Paper jam at exit of finisher
► Symptom
Paper failed to pass finisher's paper transportation path within the specified time.
1) Open finisher jam cover, and make sure that the paper is on the paper path. If there is paper, remove paper manually.
2) If the error does not disappear even after removing paper and closing finisher jam door, follow the instructions
below:
a) Does finisher input sensor work well?
i) Make sure finisher input sensor cable is connected well to the sensor connector.
ii) Make sure finisher input sensor cable is connected well to the main board connector.
iii) Replace the finisher input sensor(JC81–09686A).
(Refer to 3.3.34.1 Finisher Main Motor)
iv) Replace the finisher main board(JC81–09692A).

(Refer to 3.3.34.2. Finisher Board)
b) Check if any debris is present. Please make sure to remove any debris.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
H2–6706
► Error message
Finisher Failure: #H2-6706. Check finisher
► Symptom
Transport motor doesn’t work.
1) Open finisher jam cover to check if there is a paper jam. If there is paper, remove paper manually. Then close
door to do finisher initialization.
2) If transport motor is still not running and the error does not disappear, follow the instructions below:
a) Does finisher transport motor work well?
i) Make sure finisher transport motor cable is connected well to the transport motor connector.
ii) Make sure finisher transport motor cable is connected well to the main board connector.
iii) Replace the finisher transport motor(JC81–09677A).

b) Does finisher input sensor work well?


c) Does finisher motor gear set work well?

i) Make sure gear set can rotate smoothly.
ii) Make sure each gear is not broken.
iii) Replace the gear set(JC81-09592A / J81-09593A / JC81-09595A / JC81-09596A).
d) Check if any debris is present. Please make sure to remove any debris.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
H2–6707 ~ H2–6725
► Error message
Finisher Failure: #H2-67xx. Check finisher
► Symptom
Component does not move to or leave home position.
1) If there is jammed paper on the paper path, remove paper manually. Open and close finisher stapler door or jam
cover to check if finisher executes initialization process.
2) If component still doesn’t go back to home position and error does not disappear, follow the instructions below:
a) Does finisher input sensor work well?

b) Does finisher component motor work well?

i) Make sure finisher component motor cable is connected well to the motor connector.
ii) Make sure finisher component motor cable is connected well to the main board connector.
iii) Replace the finisher component motor(JC81–09680A / JC81–09681A).
c) Do finisher component parts work well?

i) Make sure component parts can move or rotate smoothly.
ii) Make sure there is no any mechanical interference to stop moving or rotating.
iii) Make sure the belt is tight on the correct position, if it has the belt.
d) Does finisher component motor gear set work well?
iii) Replace the Eject-Sub Assy.
e) Check if any debris existed. Please make sure to remove any debris.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
H2–6726
H2–6727
► Error message
Finisher Stapler door is open. Close it.
Finisher Jam door is open. Close it.
► Symptom
Finisher door is not closed.
1) Close door to perform finisher initialization. If error does not disappear, follow the instructions below:
a) Does finisher door cover close well?
i) The finisher door cover can close well.
ii) The finisher door cover can contact and push input sensor switch well.
iii) The finisher input sensor switch can be pushed well.
iv) Replace finisher cover door(JC81–09577A) or Switch(JC81–09687A).
b) Does finisher input sensor work well?


c) Check if any debris exists. Please make sure to remove any debris.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
H2–6728
H2–6729
H2–6730
H2–6731
► Error message
Finisher Failure: #H2-67xx. Check finisher.
► Symptom
Finisher stapler head does not move to or leave home position.
1) If there is jammed paper on the stapler, removing paper manually. Open and close finisher stapler door or jam
2) If stapler still doesn’t go back to home position and error does not disappear, follow the instructions below :
a) Can finisher stapler cartridge can be pulled out?
i) Rotate stapler gear manually to move stapler head back to home (top) position.
ii) Remove staple completely from stapler cartridge.
iii) Remove staples from inside stapler.
b) Does finisher stapler input sensor work well?
iii) Replace the finisher stapler(JC81–07376A).
c) Does finisher stapler motor work well?

i) Make sure finisher stapler motor cable is connected well to the stapler motor connector.
ii) Make sure finisher stapler motor cable is connected well to the main board connector.
d) Check if any debris (staple) exists. Please make sure to remove any debris.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
H2–6732
H2–6733
► Error message
Staple cartridge is low. Replace it.
Staple cartridge is empty. Replace it.
► Symptom
Finisher stapler cartridge is necessary to refill.
1) Open finisher stapler door to refill cartridge and then close door. Self-Priming will execute automatically if
necessary. If stapler error or warning does not disappear, follow the instructions below :
a) Does finisher stapler cartridge refill box fit well?
i) Make sure stapler refill box fit well into cartridge.
ii) Make sure staples do not jam near stapler head.
c) Check if any debris (staple) is present. Please make sure to remove any debris.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
H2–6734
► Error message
Finisher Failure: #H2-6734. Check finisher
► Symptom
Finisher stapler cartridge refill failed.
1) Open finisher stapler door to refill cartridge and then close door. Self-Priming will execute automatically if
necessary. If stapler error or warning does not disappear, follow the instructions below :
a) Does finisher stapler cartridge refill box fit well?
i) Make sure stapler refill box fit well into cartridge.
ii) Make sure staples do not jam near stapler head.
c) Does finisher stapler motor work well?

i) Make sure finisher stapler motor cable is connected well to the stapler motor connector.
ii) Make sure finisher stapler motor cable is connected well to the main board connector.
d) Check if any debris (staple) is present. Please make sure to remove any debris.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
H2–6735
► Error message
Too much paper in finisher stacker. Remove printed paper.
► Symptom
Finisher output tray is full.
1) Remove paper from the finisher main tray. Main tray will move downward and upward to clear stack full warning.
2) If warning does not disappear, follow the instructions below :

a) Does finisher main tray input sensor (Standby & Home sensor) work well?

b) Does finisher main tray motor work well?
i) Make sure finisher main tray motor cable is connected well to the main tray motor connector.
ii) Make sure finisher main tray motor cable is connected well to the main board connector.
iii) Replace the finisher main tray motor(JC81–09679A).

4. Troubleshooting

c) Check if any debris (staple) is present. Please make sure to remove any debris.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
H2–6736 ~ H2–6743
► Error message
Finisher Failure: #H2-67xx. Check finisher
► Symptom
Main Tray does not move to or leave home position.
1) If there is jammed paper on the Main Tray, removing paper manually. Open and close finisher stapler door or jam
2) If Main Tray still doesn’t go back to home position and error does not disappear, follow the instructions below:
a) Does finisher input sensor (Standby & Home sensor) work well?

b) Does finisher Main Tray motor work well?

i) Make sure finisher Main Tray motor cable is connected well to the motor connector.
ii) Make sure finisher Main Tray motor cable is connected well to the main board connector.
iii) Replace the finisher Main Tray motor(JC81–09679A).

c) Do finisher Main Tray parts work well?

i) Make sure Main Tray parts can move or rotate smoothly.
ii) Make sure there are no mechanical interference to stop moving or rotating.
iii) Make sure the belt is tight in the correct position, if it has a belt.
d) Does finisher Main Tray motor gear set work well?

4. Troubleshooting
iii) Replace the gear set(JC81–9585A / JC81–09586A).
e) Check if any debris is present. Please make sure to remove any debris.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
H2–6744
► Error message
Staple Cartridge not install. Install it.
► Symptom
Finisher stapler cartridge is not installed into stapler.
1) Open finisher stapler door to put cartridge into stapler and then close door. Self-Priming will be execute
automatically if necessary.
2) If stapler warning does not disappear, follow the instructions below :

a) Does finisher stapler input sensor work well?
iii) Replace the finisher stapler cartridge(JC81–08653A).
iv) Replace the finisher stapler(JC81–07376A).

v) Replace the finisher main board(JC81–09692A).
b) Check if any debris is present. Please make sure to remove any debris.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
H2–6A50
► Error message
Finisher Failure: #H2-6A50. Check finisher.
► Symptom
Communication error with finisher has occurred.
1) Copier power off and power on. If the error does not disappear, follow the instructions below:
2) Does finisher work well?

a) Make sure finisher interface cable is connected with main board.
b) Replace the finisher main board(JC81–09692A).
► Error Code
H2–6A63
► Error message
Finisher Failure: #H2-6A63. Check finisher.
► Symptom
Finisher stapler cartridge is not installed into stapler or Staples are empty.
1) Replace the finisher stapler(JC81–07376A).

4. Troubleshooting
4.5.5. Mx-xxxx type error code
► Error Code
M1–1113
M2–1121
► Error message
► Symptom
Paper jam has occurred in tray1.
1) Open the side cover and check if a foreign substance or paper is jammed inside the machine.
2) Remove tray1 and remove the jammed paper.
3) If this jam error occurs frequently, check the rollers of the pick up unit1.
c) If the pick up/ reverse/ forward rollers are worn out or contaminated, replace the defective roller(JC93–00540A).
(Refer to 3.2.5. Pickup_Reverse_Forward roller)
4) If the problem persists, check the pickup unit1 and feed sensor.
a) Check if the pickup unit1 and feed sensor operate correctly.
b) Check if the pickup unit1 harness is connected to the main board correctly.
c) Check if the connector of the Guide-feed assembly is connected correctly.

d) Check if the harness of pickup unit and feed sensor are connected correctly.
5) If the problem persists, check the pickup unit1.

a) Remove the pickup unit and check the actuator and photo-sensor.

4. Troubleshooting
b) Push the pickup-lever and check if it operates correctly.
6) If the problem persists, replace the pickup drive unit(JC93–00422A) or Pickup unit1(JC93-00511A).
(Refer to 3.3.15. Pick-up Drive unit)
(Refer to 3.3.24. Pick-up Unit and Sensor)

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
M1–1213
M2–1131
► Error message
► Symptom
Paper jam has occurred in tray2.
1) Open the side cover and check if a foreign substance or paper is jammed inside the machine.
2) Remove tray2 and remove the jammed paper.
3) If this jam error occurs frequently, check the rollers of the pick up unit1.
c) If the pick up/ reverse/ forward rollers are worn out or contaminated, replace the defective roller(JC93–00540A).
(Refer to 3.2.5. Pickup_Reverse_Forward roller)
4) If the problem persists, check the pickup unit2 and feed sensor.
a) Check if the pickup unit2 and feed sensor operate correctly.
b) Check if the pickup unit2 harness is connected to the main board correctly.
c) Check if the connector of the Guide-feed assembly is connected correctly.

d) Check if the harness of pickup unit and feed sensor are connected correctly.
e)

a) Remove the pickup unit2 and check the actuator and photo-sensor.

4. Troubleshooting
b) Push the pickup-lever and check if it operates correctly.
6) If the problem persists, replace the pickup drive unit2(JC93–00422A) or Pickup unit1(JC93-00512A).
(Refer to 3.3.15. Pick-up Drive unit)
(Refer to 3.3.24. Pick-up Unit and Sensor)

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
M1–1610
► Error message
Paper jam in MP Tray.
► Symptom
Paper jam has occurred in MP tray.
1) Open the side cover. Remove the jammed paper from the MP tray.
2) If this jam error occurs frequently, check the rollers of the MP unit.
a) Check if MP pick up/ reverse/ forward rollers are assembled correctly.

b) If the MP pick up/ reverse/ forward rollers are worn out or contaminated, replace the defective
roller(JC93–00540A).
(Refer to 3.2.2.8. MP Pick up_Reverse_Forward roller)
3) If the problem persists, check if the MP solenoid operates correctly.

a) Enter SVC mode. Execute MP solenoid test.
(Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Test Routines > 101-0271)
b) If the MP solenoid operation is abnormal, check the harness connection of MP unit.

c) If the harness has no defects, replace the MP solenoid(JC33–00029B).
4) If the problem persists, check the Regi/MPdrive unit.

a) Enter SVC mode. Execute Regi./MP motor test.
b) Remove the rear cover.

c) Check if the motor harness is connected correctly.

4. Troubleshooting
d) If the problem occurs, replace the Regi/MP Drive Unit(JC93–00443A).
(Refer to 3.3.17. Regi_MP Drive unit)

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
M1-3122
► Error message
► Symptom
1) Remove and insert Tray1 correctly.
2) If Tray1 is not locked or pulled out without holding the locking lever, remove Tray1.
3) Check if foreign substance or paper is inside the space between Tray1,2. If so, please remove it.
4) If the problem persists, check that the auto size sensor is connected properly.
(Refer to 3.3.20. Auto Size sensor)
5) If the problem persists, replace the main board(JC92–02452A).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
M1-3222
► Error message
► Symptom
1) Remove and insert Tray2 correctly.
2) If Tray2 is not locked or pulled out without holding the locking lever, remove Tray2.
3) Check if foreign substance or paper is inside the space between Tray1,2. If so, please remove it.
4) If the problem persists, check that the auto size sensor is connected properly.
(Refer to 3.3.20. Auto Size sensor)

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
M1-4111
► Error message
Input System Failure #M1–4111 : Pull Tray 1 out and insert it.
► Symptom
1) Remove tray1 and re-install it.
2) If the problem persists, turn the machine off then on.
3) Enter SVC mode. Execute pickup motor test.

4) If the pick up motor operation is abnormal, turn the machine off.
6) Check if the connection between pickup drive unit1 and main board is secure.
7) If the connection is OK, replace the pickup drive unit(JC93-00442A).

(Refer to 3.3.15. Pick-up Drive Unit)

(Refer to 3.3.24. Pick-Up Unit and Sensor)
a) Check if the photo sensor in the pickup unit1 is defective.
b) If the sensor(0604–001393) is defective, replace it.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
M1-4211
► Error message
Input System Failure #M1-4211 : Pull Tray 2 out and insert it.
► Symptom
1) Remove tray2 and re-install it.
2) If the problem persists, turn the machine off then on.
3) Enter SVC mode. Execute pickup motor test.

4) If the pick up motor operation is abnormal, turn the machine off.
6) Check if the connection between pickup drive unit2 and main board is secure.
7) If the connection is OK, replace the pickup drive unit(JC93-00442A).

(Refer to 3.3.15. Pick-up Drive Unit)

a) Check if the photo sensor in the pickup unit2 is defective.
b) If the sensor(0604–001393) is defective, replace it.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
M1–5111
M1-5112
► Error message
► Symptom
Paper in the tray1 is less than 10%. / The photo sensor is defective.
1) Remove tray 1. Load paper in the tray. And insert tray 1.
2) If paper is loaded but error message has not disappeared, check the following:
a) Turn the machine off. Open the Side Cover.
b) Remove Pick-Up Unit1.
c) If the photo sensor is contaminated, clean it.
d) If the photo sensor is defective, replace it(0604–001393).

e) If the actuator is defective, replace it(JC66-03199A).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
M1–5211
M1–5212
► Error message
► Symptom
Paper in the tray is less than 10% of specification. / The photo sensor is defective.
1) Remove tray 2. Load paper in the tray, and insert the tray 2.
2) If paper is loaded but error message has not disappeared, check the following :
a) Turn the machine off. Open the Side Cover.
b) Remove Pick-Up Unit2.
c) If the photo sensor is contaminated, clean it.
d) If the photo sensor is defective, replace it(0604–001393).

e) If the actuator is defective, replace it(JC66-03199A).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
M1–5612
► Error message
Paper is empty in MP Tray. Load paper.
► Symptom
Paper in the MP tray is less than 10%. / The photo sensor is defective.
1) Load the paper in the MP tray.
2) If paper is loaded but error message has not disappeared, check the following :
(Refer to 3.3.22.3. MP unit)
a) If the photo sensor is contaminated, clean it.
b) If the photo sensor is defective, replace it(0604–001393).
c) If the actuator is defective, replace it(JC66-03217A).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
M2–1124
M2–1125
► Error message
Paper jam inside of machine.
► Symptom
Paper jam has occurred inside the machine. (Feed drive unit is defective / Feed 1 sensor is defective.)
• M2–1124 : The leading edge of the paper has not reached the feed 1 sensor within the specified time.
• M2-1125 : The paper has not left from the feed 1 sensor within the specified time.
1) Open the side cover. Remove the jammed paper.
2) If jammed paper occurs continually, check the following.

a) Enter SVC mode. Execute feed motor test. If the motor operation is normal, go to step d).
b) Remove the rear cover. Check if the feed motor cable is connected correctly.
c) If the connection is OK, replace the feed drive unit(JC93-00444A).
(Refer to 3.3.16. Feed Drive unit)
d) If the feed motor operation is normal, check the feed 1 sensor.

e) If the sensor operation is abnormal, check the harness.
f) If the connection is OK, replace the feed sensor(0604-001381).

(Refer to 3.3.25. Feed sensor)

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
M2–1134
M2–1135
► Error message
► Symptom
Paper jam has occurred inside the machine. (Feed drive unit is defective / Feed 2 sensor is defective.)

a) Enter SVC mode. Execute feed motor test. If the motor operation is normal, go to step d).
b) Remove the rear cover. Check if the feed motor cable is connected correctly.
c) If the connection is OK, replace the feed drive unit(JC93-00444A).
(Refer to 3.3.16. Feed Drive unit)
d) If the feed motor operation is normal, check the feed 2 sensor.

f) If the connection is OK, replace the feed sensor 2 (0604-001381).

(Refer to 3.3.26. Feed Unit)

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
M2–1211
M2–1213
M2–1214
► Error message
► Symptom
Paper jam has occurred inside the machine. (Regi. roller drive is defective / Regi. sensor is defective.)
• M2–1211 : When the machine is warming-up, jammed paper inside machine is detected.
• M2–1213 : The leading edge of the paper has not reached the regi. sensor within the specified time.
• M2-1214 : The paper has not left from the regi. sensor within the specified time.

a) Enter SVC mode. Execute Regi. motor test. If the motor operation is normal, go to step d).
b) Remove the rear cover. Check if the Regi/MP motor cable is connected correctly.
c) If the connection is OK, replace the Regi./MP drive unit(JC93-00443A).
(Refer to 3.3.16. Regi./MP Drive unit)
d) If the motor operation is normal, check the regi. sensor.

f) If the connection is OK, replace the regi. sensor (0604-001381).

(Refer to 3.3.27. Registration Unit)

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
M2–1331
M2–1333
M2–1334
M2–2111
M2–2113
M2–2114
► Error message
Paper jam inside of machine
Paper jam at the top of duplex path
► Symptom
Paper jam has occurred inside the machine.
1) Open the side cover. Remove jammed paper.
2) If the problem persists, check the following:

a) Check the Regi sensor harness. If the harness is normal, replace the Regi. sensor (0604-001381).
(Refer to 3.3.27. Registration Unit)
b) Check the sensors in the Side Unit. If the harness is normal, replace the defective sensor (0604-001393 ).
(Refer to 3.3.22.1. Fuser out sensor / 3.3.22.2. Duplex sensor and Curl sensor)

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
M3–1411
► Error message
Paper jam in exit area.
► Symptom
Paper jam has occurred around the fuser unit.(At power-on / warm up , the machine detected paper jam in Inner
tray Exit Sensor.)
1) Open the side cover. Remove jammed paper.

a) Open the side cover. Check if the connector is connected correctly.
b) Remove the JOB-SEPARATOR. Check if the photo sensor is assembled correctly.
c) Check if ACTUATOR-EXIT is assembled correctly. If the ACTUATOR-EXIT (JC66-02533A) is deformed or

broken, replace it.
d) If the photo sensor(0604-001393) is defective, replace it.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
M3–1413
M3–1414
► Error message
Paper jam in exit area.
► Symptom
Paper jam has occurred around the fuser unit.(Job separator connection is defective. / Actuator-Exit is defective.)

a) Open the side cover. Check if the connector is connected properly.
b) Remove the JOB-SEPARATOR. Check if the photo sensor is assembled correctly.
c) Check if ACTUATOR-EXIT is assembled correctly. If the ACTUATOR-EXIT (JC66-02533A) is deformed or

broken, replace it.
d) If the photo sensor(0604-001393) is defective, replace it.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
M3–2230
M3–2430
► Error message
Output tray is full. Remove printed media.
► Symptom
There is too much paper in output bin tray or inner tray.
• M3-2230 : There is too much paper in output bin tray.
• M3-2430 : There is too much paper in inner tray.
1) Remove the paper from output bin tray or inner tray.
2) If this error ccurs continually, check the following.

a) Check if the bin-full sensor and actuator is assembled correctly.
b) Check if the bin-full sensor(0604–001393) is defective.

4. Troubleshooting
4.5.6. Sx-xxxx type error code
► Error Code
S1–1113
► Error message
Video System Failure #S1-1113: Turn off then on.
► Symptom
The system has some problems due to CPU overheating.
2) Wait until the machine is cool, and then turn the machine on.
3) If the problem persistss, turn the machine off again.

(Refer to 3.3.2 Rear Cover)
5) Replace the main board(JC92–02429A).

(Refer to 3.3.7 Main Board)
NOTE
Insert the MSOK to the new main board.
6) Assemble the rear cover. Turn the machine on.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
S1–1313
► Error message
The clock became initial time. Set a time again.
► Symptom
Saved time is invalid
1) Set up the time and reboot the machine.
a) Select “Machine Setup” on touch screen.
b) Select “General Setting”.
c) Select “Date and Time” and set the time.
2) If the problem persistss, check the following.

a) Remove the rear cover.
b) Remove the fax holder from the main board.
c) Measure the voltage of the battery. If the battery is normal, the measured value is over 3V.
3) If the battery is normal, replace the main board(JC92–02429A).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
S1–2111
► Error message
► Symptom
The machine can’t detect memory during booting.


NOTE
Insert the MSOK to the new main board.
5) Assemble the rear cover. Turn the machine on.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
S1–2411
S1–2421
S1–2422
► Error message
HDD System Failure #S1-2411: Turn off then on.
► Symptom
Hard Disk is not installed in the machine. / Hard Disk is defective.
1) Check if the HDD is installed correctly.
a) Remove the rear cover.
b) Check if the HDD cable is connected correctly.
2) If the problem persistss, replace the HDD(JC59–00035A).

(Refer to 3.3.32 HDD)

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
S1–2433
S1–2443
S1–2444
S1–2445
S1–2446
S1–2447
S1–2448
S1–2449
► Error message
► Symptom
HDD partition is full or corrupted.
1) Enter SVC mode. Select “System Recovery” in Service Function menu.
(Refer to 4.4.6.8 System Recovery)
2) Execute hard disk format and firmware re-installation.

(Refer to 4.3. Updating Firmware)


4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
S1–2434
S1–2435
S1–2436
S1–2437
S1–2438
S1–2439
► Error message
HDD Error #S1-2434. Check users guide.
► Symptom
HDD partition or memory is full.
NOTE
• S1-2434 : Addresses in Address book / User data in User profile
• S1-2435 : Documents in Document box / Jobs in Secure job list / Fonts / Forms
• S1-2436 : System Logs
• S1-2437/3438/3439 : Printing Error / No Paper in Tray
1) Enter SVC mode. Select “Hard Disk Maintenance” in Service Function menu.
(Refer to 4.4.6.2 Hard Disk Maintenance)
2) Execute hard disk format.


4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
S1–2510
S1–2511
S1–2520
S1–2521
S1–2523
S1–2540
► Error message
MSOK System Failure #S1-2510: Turn off then on.
MSOK System Failure #S1-2511: Turn off then on.
MSOK Failure: #S1-2520. Call for service.
MSOK Failure: #S1-2521. Call for service
PPM data is incorrect. Call for service & change MSOK
MSOK Failure: #S1-2540. Call for service & change MSOK
► Symptom
MSOK is not installed properly. / MSOK is defective.
2) Check if the MSOK is inserted correctly. Remove and reinstall it.


4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
S1–3110
► Error message
► Symptom
The main board is defective.
► Error Code
S1–4111
► Error message
► Symptom
The main board can’t send the data through the network channel.
1) Check if the green LED of the network port is on.
2) If not, unplug and reconnect the network cable.


4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
S1–4311
► Error message
► Symptom
The USB device chip is defective.
3) Remove and disassemble the OPE unit.

(Refer to 3.3.6 OPE Unit)
4) Replace the OPE main board(JC92–02436A).
5) Assemble the OPE unit.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
S1–5521
► Error message
FDI device is not installed. Install the device.
► Symptom
The machine can’t detect the FDI device.
1) Install the FDI device.
2) If the FDI device is already installed, update the firmware for main board.
(Refer to 4.3. Updating Firmware)

4) Check the connection between FDI device and main board.
5) If the FDI device(CLX-KIT10F) is defective, replace it..
6) If the problem persistss, replace the main board(JC92-02429A).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
S2–1211
S2–2311
S2–3110
► Error message
Engine System Failure: #S2-1211. Turn off then on
► Symptom
The main board is defective.
► Error Code
S2–3114
► Error message
Engine System Failure #S2-3114: Turn off then on.
► Symptom
ACR error has occurred.
1) Execute “ACR calibration” manually.
(Machine Setup > General Settings > Image Management > Auto Color Registration)
2) Clean the ACR sensor.

(Refer to 3.2.1.1. Cleaning the ACR/CTD sensor window)
3) If the problem persistss, replace the main board(JC92-02429A).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
S2–4210
► Error message
Front door is open. Close it.
► Symptom
Front cover or Side cover is opened.
1) Close the front cover correctly.
2) Check if the cover open sensor connector is connected properly. Reconnect it.
3) If the sensor is defective, replace it.

(Refer to 3.3.30. Side Cover Open Switch.)

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
S2–4410
► Error message
Right door is open. Close it.
► Symptom
Front cover or Side cover is opened.
1) Close the side cover correctly.
2) Check if the cover open sensor connector is connected properly. Reconnect it.
3) If the sensor is defective, replace it.

(Refer to 3.3.31. Front Cover Open Switch.)
► Error Code
S2–5111 / S2–5112 / S2–5120 / S2–5131 / S2–5132 / S2–5133 / S2–5135 / S2–5136 / S2–5161 / S2–5164 / S2–5210 /
S2–5240
► Error message
Failed to adjust the color registration
► Symptom
ACR execution is failed.
2) If the problem persists, check the followings.
• Check if the ACR sensor is contaminated or defective. Clean the ACR sensor or replace it.
• Remove and reinstall the ITB unit. If the problem persists, replace the ITB unit.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
S3–3121
► Error message
Scanner is locked.
► Symptom
Scanner module does not move.
1) Turn off the machine then on. Check if the scanner module works normally.
2) If the initial operation does not occurred normally, turn the machine off.
3) Remove the scan glass.

(Refer to 3.3.29.2. Scan glass)
4) Check if the home position sensor cable is connected correctly.
5) Remove the scan rear cover. Check if all cables on scan joint board are connected correctly.
6) If the connection is OK, replace the scan joint board(JC92-02447A).

(Refer to 3.3.29.1. Scanner joint board)

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
S3–3211
► Error message
Scan System Failure #S3-3211: Turn off then on.
► Symptom
DADF is not connected or communication error occurs with CIP6 board.
1) Turn the machine off then on. If the problem persists, check the following:
2) Turn the machine off again.
3) Remove the scan rear cover. Check if the connector on scan joint board is connected correctly.
4) Remove the DADF rear cover. Check if the connector on DADF board is connected correctly.
(Refer to 3.3.28.4. DADF main board)
5) If the connection is OK, replace the DADF board(JC92-02446A).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
S4–3111
► Error message
Fax System Failure: #S4-3111. Install fax modem card again
► Symptom
Fax card is not installed properly. / Fax card is defective.
1) Remove and reinstall the fax card.
2) If the fax card is defective, replace it.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
S5–3111
► Error message
UI System Failure #S5-3111:Turn off then on.
► Symptom
Communication error between main board and OPE board has occurred.
2) Check if the OPE cable is connected to the main board correctly.
3) Remove and disassemble the OPE Unit.

(Refer to 3.3.6 OPE Unit)
4) Check if the OPE cable is connected to the OPE board correctly.
5) If the connection is OK, replace the main board(JC92–02429A).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
S6–3122
► Error message
Network cable is disconnected. Check it.
► Symptom
Network cable is disconnected.
1) Check if the green LED of the network port is on.
2) If not, unplug and reconnect the network cable.


4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
S6–3123
S6–3128
S6–3229
S6–322A
► Error message
This IP address conflicts with that of other system. Check it.
802.1x authentication failed. Please Contact the System Administrator.
The IPv4 address assigned to wireless LAN conflicts with that of other system. Check it.
The IPv6 address assigned to wireless LAN conflicts with that of other system. Check it.
► Symptom
Network error. (IP address conflicts with that of another system. / Communication error / There is no response when
checking the ping test.)
• Change the machine’s IP address.
1) Select “Machine Setup” on the touch screen.
2) Select “Networking Setting”.
3) “Log-In”.
4) Select “TCP/IP”.
5) Select the proper item for your machine.
6) Select “IP Setting”.
7) Select the proper item for your machine.
8) Change the IP address.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
S6–3224
S6–3225
S6–3226
S6–3227
► Error message
This IP address conflicts with that of other system. Check it.
802.1x authentication failed. Please Contact the System Administrator.
► Symptom
BOOTP or DHCP server has a problem or IP address assignment is abnormal.
• Check the BOOTP or DHCP server.
• If the server is normal, check the network setting.
► Error Code
S7–1110
► Error message
► Symptom
24V power is abnormal.
1) Check the 24V pin on SMPS board. If it is abnormal, replace the SMPS board.
2) Check the related cable.
3) If the SMPS is normal, replace the main board.
► Error Code
S7–2110
► Error message
Fuser Failure: #S7-2110. Turn off then on
► Symptom
Heater control relay is abnormal.
1) Turn the machine off. Re-install the fuser unit, then turn the machine on.
2) If the problem persists, replace the Fuser unit(110V : JC91-01064A, 220V : JC91-01063A).
(Refer to 3.2.2.5 Fuser unit)

4. Troubleshooting
4.5.7. U1-xxxx type (Fuser) error code
► Error Code
U1–2113
U1–2119
► Error message
Fuser Unit Failure: #U1-2113.
► Symptom
The thermistor can’t measure temperature. The hear-roller will not heat-up.
(Refer to 3.2.2 Fuser unit)
2) Remove the fuser unit. After openinging the jam cover, check if jammed or wrapped paper is in the fuser unit.
3) If the problem persists, check the following :

(Refer to 3.3.23. Fuser unit)
a) Check if the Halogen lamp (110V : 4713-001630 / 220V : 4713–001631) is broken or disconnected.
b) Check if the AC connection of the Halogen lamp is disconnected or contaminated.

4. Troubleshooting
c) Check if the thermostat(4712-001098) is disconnected.
d) Check if the non-contact type thermistor(1404–001453)is broken.
5) If the problem persists, replace the Main board(JC92-02429A) or FDB board(110V : JC44-00210A, 220V :
JC44-00211A), SMPS(110V : JC44-00093A, 220V : JC44-00100A)

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
U1–2115
► Error message
Fuser Unit Failure: #U1-2115. Turn off then on.
► Symptom
The pressure control unit(Cam unit)of the fuser is abnormal.
(Refer to 3.2.2. Fuser Unit)

(Refer to 3.3.23. Fuser Unit)
a) When the side-cover closes, check if the operation sound of the pressure control unit occurs.
b) Check if the parts of the pressure control unit are abnormal.
- Check if the shape of the CAM-REAR(JC66-03299A)) is broken.
- Check if there are abnormal parts of the pressure control unit.
c) Check if the fuser-motor is abnormal via SVC mode.

3) If the problem persists, replace the Fuser unit(110V : JC91–01064A, 220V : JC91–01063A)
4) If the problem persists, replace the pressure control unit or cam-motor or Main board(JC92-02452A).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
U1–2132
U1–2135
► Error message
► Symptom
Temperature of the fuser increases abnormally.
2) Check if the power voltage is normal. (Is the voltage during the operation ±10% of the rated voltage?)
3) Remove the fuser unit. After openinging the jam cover, check if jammed or wrapped paper is in the fuser unit.
4) If the problem persists, Check the following :


4. Troubleshooting
d) Check if the non-contact type thermistor(1404–001453) is broken.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
U1–2141
U1–2142
► Error message
► Symptom
Temperature of the thermistor is higher than the maximum allowable temperature.
3) Remove the fuser unit. After opening the jam cover, check if jammed or wrapped paper is in the fuser unit.

a) Check if the non-contact type thermistor(1404–001453) is broken.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
U1–2316
U1–2317
► Error message
► Symptom
Temperature of the fuser changes abnormally.

c) Check if the thermistat(4712-001098) is disconnected.
d) Check if non-contact type thermistor(1404–001453) is broken.

4. Troubleshooting

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
U1–2335
U1–233A
► Error message
Fuser Unit Failure: #U1-233A.
► Symptom
Temperature of the thermistor is abnormally low.


4. Troubleshooting
d) Check if the non-contact type thermistor(1404–001453) is broken.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
U1–2337
U1–233D
► Error message
Fuser Unit Failure: #U1-233D.
► Symptom
When the fuser warms-up, the temperature of the thermistor is abnormally low.
(Refer to 3.2.2 Fuser unit)
4) If the problem persists, Check the follows.


4. Troubleshooting
d) Check if thenon-contact type thermistor(1404–001453) is broken.

4. Troubleshooting
4.5.8. U2-xxxx type (LSU) error code
► Error Code
U2–6121
U2–6122
U2–6123
► Error message
LSU Failure #U2-6121: Turn off then on.
► Symptom
LSU motor does not operate or it operates abnormally. Motor ready signal is abnormal.
1) Turn the machine off then on. Check for the LSU motor operation sound during warm-up.
2) Print a demo page to check that the machine operates normally.

a) If the LSU motor makes a sound,
i) Enter SVC mode to check the LSU motor ready signal.
( Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Test Routines)
• Press 1,2,3 number keys simultaneously. When the password dialog box appears, enter “1934” and
press the “OK” button.
ii) Select “LSU Motor1 Run Ready”. ( Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Test Routines >
110-0000)
iii) Press ‘Start’ button. Check that the status has changed to ‘Executing -> Low -> High’.
iv) If the status has not changed, the motor ready signal is abnormal. Replace the LSU. (JC97-04010A) (Refer
to 3.3.5. LSU in chapter 3)
b) If the LSU motor does not makes a sound,
i) Turn the machine off and open the side cover. Unplug and reconnect the LSU cable. Check that the LSU
motor make a sound after turning the machine on.

4. Troubleshooting
ii) Turn the machine off and remove the rear cover. Unplug and reconnect the LSU cable on main board.
Check that the LSU motor make a sound after turning the machine on.
iii) If the LSU cable(JC39-01688A) is defective, replace it. Check that the LSU motor make a sound after
turning the machine on.
iv) If the problem persists, replace the LSU(JC97-04010A).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
U2–6142
U2–6143
► Error message
► Symptom
Hsync signal of the LSU is abnormal.
1) Turn the machine off then on. Check for the LSU motor operation sound during warm-up.
2) Print a demo page to check that the machine operates normally.

a) Turn the machine off and open the side cover. Unplug and reconnect the LSU cable. Print a demo page to
check that the machine operates normally.
b) Turn the machine off and open the side cover. Unplug and reconnect the LSU cable on main board. Print a
demo page to check that the machine operates normally.
c) If the LSU cable(JC39-01688A) is defective, replace it. Check that the LSU motor makes a sound after turning
the machine on.
d) If the problem persists, replace the LSU(JC97-04010A).

4. Troubleshooting
4.5.9. U3-xxxx type error code
► Error Code
U3–3211
U3–3213
U3–3214
U3–3311
U3–3313
U3–3314
► Error message
Original paper jam inside of scanner
► Symptom
Jam has occurred inside the DADF unit.
1) Open the DADF cover. If there is jammed paper, remove it.
2) If this error occurs continually, check the DADF regi. sensor(0604-001393) and regi actuator(JC66–03148A). If
their operation is abnormal, replace the defective part.
3) If the regi sensor is OK, check the scan sensor(0604-001393) and scan actuator(JC66–03210A). If their operation is
abnormal, replace the defective part.
4) Check if the regi. clutch operates normally. Check if the clutch cable is connected correctly. If the
clutch(JC47–00033A) is defective, replace it.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
U3–3413
U3–3414
► Error message
Original paper jam inside of scanner.
► Symptom
2) If this error occurs continually, check the following:

a) Check if the Regi. actuator(JC66–03148A) operates normally.
b) Check if the Regi. sensor cable is connected correctly.

c) If the connection is OK, replace the Regi. sensor(0604-001393).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
U3–3513
U3–3514
► Error message
Original paper jam inside of scanner.
► Symptom

a) Check if the scan actuator(JC66-03210A) operates normally.
b) Check if the scan sensor cable is connected correctly.

c) If the connection is OK, replace the scan sensor(0604-001393).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
U3–3611
U3–3613
U3–3614
U3–3713
► Error message
Original paper jam in the exit area of scanner
► Symptom

a) Check if the exit actuator(JC66-03184A) operates normally.
b) Check if the exit sensor cable is connected correctly.

c) If the connection is OK, replace the exit sensor(0604-001393).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
U3–4210
► Error message
Top door of scanner is open.
► Symptom
DADF cover is open.
1) Close the DADF cover properly.
2) If this error occurs continually, Check the following:

a) Check the DADF cover open sensor(0604-001393) and its harness. If there is a defective part, replace it.
b) If both of them are normal, check the Cover-Open Rib. If it is broken, replace the Cover-Open(JC63-03273A).

4. Troubleshooting
4.6. Image quality problems and solutions
Print-quality defects can be attributed to printer components, consumables, media, internal software, external software
applications and environmental conditions.
To successfully troubleshoot print-quality problems, as many variables as possible must be eliminated.
The first step is to generate prints using printable pages embedded in the printer on laser paper. The paper should be from
an unopened ream that has been acclimated to room temperature and you should ensure that genuine Samsung Toner
is installed in the printer.
Samsung A/S chart (A3)

4. Troubleshooting
[1] Grid pattern For adjusting margin and magnification

[2] Black patches For adjusting skew error
[3] Barcode For checking the reproduction of barcode
[4] Note area For recording the date, conditions, etc.
[A] Halftone band For checking banding and jitter (K 50%)
[B, L] Resolution patterns For checking resolution
[C, D, Images For checking color reproduction
E]
[F] Map image For checking fine line reproduction
[G] Color patches For checking color reproduction and uniformity
[H] Gradation pattern For checking tone reproduction of 7 colors (C, M, Y, K, R, G, B/ 10~100%)
[I] Color/Mono text For checking the reproduction of color, mono text
[J] Multilingual Feature For checking the reproduction of small text
[K] White Gap pattern For checking color to color, color to mono white gap
[M] Rulers For checking the magnification error (unit : cm)
[N] Rulers For checking the magnification error (unit : inch)

4. Troubleshooting
How to analysis the defect image

See the next flow chart.
TIP
1) According to the part remain life, cause can vary. Check the part remain life.
2) Check the defect whether periodic or not.
P O W E R !O N
C h e c k ! S e t ! S t a t u s ! & ! P a r t s ! L if e
1 .! C h e c k !O P E ! L E D
2 .! P r i n t ! R e p o r t
3 .! P r in t ! T e s t ! P a g e
A n y !I m a g e !
D e fe c t?
zft
A s s u m e !D e f e c t ! T y p e ! & !
C au ses
op T e s t !a ! c a u s e
P r in t !T e s t !
P a g e ,! C le a r ?
zft
V e r if ic a t io n
( 2 ~ 3 !T im e s )

4. Troubleshooting
4.6.1. Vertical Black Band
A. Typical faulty images
B. Troubleshooting procedure
Step Cause Action
1 Charge Roller(CR) is contaminated. Check if CR is contaminated or not.
If there are some problems, replace Drum unit.

(Refer to 3.3.2.1.)
2 ITB belt is contaminated. Check if ITB belt is contaminated or not.
• ITB cleaning is poor.
• ITB Cleaning-Blade is partially broken.
If there are some problems, replace the ITB Cleaner.

(Refer to 3.2.2.3.)
3 Scanner unit is contaminated. Wipe the contaminated part surface with a soft cloth.
• Scan glass contamination. (Refer to 3.3.29.4.)
• Mirror contamination.
• CCD sensor contamination. CAUTION
Fragile parts!

4. Troubleshooting
4.6.2. Vertical White Band, Light Band
Step Cause Action
1 A foreign substance is stuck between Developing Pull out a foreign substance.
Roller(DR) and Blade. • Make the hook shape sheet. (Transparency sheet
• The toner on Magnetic-roller is empty partially. is recommended. )
• Put the hook into the gap between DR and Blade.
• Pull out a foreign substance.
2 The Carrier of Developer unit is insufficient. Replace the Developer Unit.

• Check the toner remain.
• Check the toner layer on Roller-Magnetic of
Developer Unit is uniform or not.
(Refer to 3.3.2.2.)

4. Troubleshooting
Step Cause Action
3 The path of laser beam is blocked. Clean the LSU window.

Foreign substance is on the LSU window. (Refer to 3.2.1.2.)
4 OPC is scratched. Replace the Drum Unit.

(Refer to 3.2.2.1.)

4. Troubleshooting
4.6.3. Horizontal periodic Black Band or Dot
Step Cause Action
1 Horizontal periodic dot. (CR, 37.7mm) Wipe the surface of contaminated part with a soft cloth
• The surface of the charge roller(CR) is and alcohol.
contaminated. Replace the Drum unit.
• CR is scratched. (Refer to 3.3.2.1.)
2 Horizontal periodic black band.(CR, 37.7mm) Replace the Drum Unit.

• CR is inferior in quality. (Refer to 3.3.2.1.)
3 OPC is damaged. Replace the Drum Unit.
(Refer to 3.3.2.1.)

4. Troubleshooting
4.6.4. Horizontal periodic Light/Dark Band or Dot
Step Cause Action
1 Horizontal periodic band (OPC, 94.2 mm) As some time passes, most of this trouble will disappear.
• OPC was exposed for a long time. If not, replace the Drum Unit.
• OPC is damaged by high voltage in a short time. (Refer to 3.3.2.1.)
2 Horizontal periodic light/dark band (Roller-magnetic, Replace the Developer Unit.
31.4mm) (Refer to 3.2.2.2.)
• Roller-magnetic is inferior in quality.
• V-groove of Roller-magnetic surface is not
uniform.

4. Troubleshooting
4.6.5. Foggy Image
Step Cause Action
1 Voltage of OPC is abnormally low. Replace Drum unit.
(Refer to 3.3.2.1.)
2 HVPS operates abnormally. Replace HVPS board.
• HVPS is damaged or broken. (Refer to 3.3.3.)
3 Toner is over supplied. Replace Toner cartridge.
• TC-sensor operates abnormally. (Refer to 3.2.2.2.)
4 Voltage of OPC is abnormally low. Check the T1 connection in HVPS.
• T1 Voltage is abnormally high. Check if T1–roller spring in ITB is connected correctly.
Replace HVPS board.
(Refer to 3.3.3.)

4. Troubleshooting
4.6.6. Light Image
Step Cause Action
1 TRC operates abnormally. Perform TRC 3~4 times.
(Refer to 4.4.5.6.)
2 Poor transfer has occurred. Make the jam artificially during print job. Check the
image on transfer belt.
If the image on transfer belt is normal, refer to the
Blurred image section.
3 Toner is empty. Check if the toner is remained efficiently. If not, Replace
Toner is abnormally supplied. Toner cartridge.
(Refer to 3.2.2.2.)
Check if the Toner supply shutter is opened.
4 Output voltage of HVPS is abnormally low. Replace HVPS board.

• Color density becomes low. (Refer to 3.3.3.)
5 TC down and Toner spills Replace developer unit.
(Refer to 3.2.2.2.)
6 Toner spills by Eraser. Check if Eraser is contaminated.
Replace Drum Unit or Developer Unit.
(Refer to 3.2.2.2.)

4. Troubleshooting
4.6.7. Blurred Image
Step Cause Action
1 Humidity of the circumstances and paper. Change the paper with new and better grade.
2 T2 transfer voltage is low. Turn up the T2 transfer voltage.
(Refer to 4.4.6.9.)
3 Connection between HVPS and THV is incorrect. Check if the connection between T2 high voltage
terminal and HVPS THV terminal is correct.
Check if the connection of HVPS and ITB is correct.
If not, replace HVPS or ITB.

4 HVPS operates abnormally. Replace HVPS
(Refer to 3.3.3.)

4. Troubleshooting
4.6.8. Incorrect color registration
Step Cause Action
1 ACR sensor is contaminated. Clean the ACR sensor.
(Refer to 3.2.1.1.)
2 Circumstances is changed. Perform the OPC-ACR.
(Refer to 4.4.5.6.)
3 Check if the skew is occurs at the cassette or feeding rollers. Adjust the skew manually.
(Refer to 4.7.)

4. Troubleshooting
4.6.9. Uneven pitch and jitter image
Step Cause Action
1 Under 3 mm periodic jitters or horizontal bands has Check if the foreign substance at the drive gears.
occurred. Grease the gears.
• Developer unit gears.
• Drum unit gears.
• Main drive unit gears.
If the problem persists, replace the abnormal units.
• Developer unit.
• Drum unit.
• Main drive unit.
2 Under 1 mm periodic jitter or horizontal bands has Check if the LSU is assembled correctly. If not, remove
occurred. and tighten the screws.
(Refer to 3.3.5.)
If the problem persists, replace LSU
(Refer to 3.3.5.)

4. Troubleshooting
4.6.10. Skewed image
Step Cause Action
1 • Cassette is not installed properly. Reinstall the cassette properly.
• Too much paper is loaded in the cassette.
• The cassette guide is not set properly.
2 The surface of pick up/ reverse/ forward roller is Clean or replace the contaminated roller.
contaminated or worn out. (Refer to 3.2.2.7.)
3 If the skewed image occurs for copy job, check the Reinstall the DADF unit.
DADF installation. Adjust DADF skew.
(Refer to 4.8.)

4. Troubleshooting
4.6.11. Blank copy
Step Cause Action
1 LSU operation error Check LSU connector for proper connection.
2 All connectors on HVPS board are connected correctly. Reconnect.
3 Check if the related parts are broken. Replace the HVPS board or Main board or LSU.
4 Check if the connection between scan joint board and Reconnect the harness.
main board is OK. If the connection is OK, replace the main board.

4. Troubleshooting
4.6.12. Poor fusing performance
Step Cause Action
1 Check the paper type. Check the paper type on control panel is same as paper
Depending on what type of paper used, print speed user uses.
varies. (Refer to 2.2.7.)
(ex)
• Plain (71~90g/), Thick (91~105g/) : Full Speed
• Heavy weight (106~175g/) : Half Speed
• Envelope (75~90 g/), Label (120~150 g/) : Half
Speed
2 The fuser unit is worn out. Replace the fuser unit.
3 Check if the surface of the fuser belt & pressure roller Replace the fuser unit.
is scratched.
4 Check if the temperature control system has problems. Check the Non-contact thermistor sensor.
• Thermistor is broken or operates abnormally
• Halogen lamp is broken or operates abnormally.
Check the Halogen lamp.

(Refer to 4.5.7. U1–2113)
If you find some problems, replace the broken parts or
Fuser unit.
5 Check if the pressure control system operates properly. Check the pressure control system.
(Refer to 4.5.7. U1–2115)
The problem persists, replace Fuser unit.
6 Paper is wrapped on the Heating roller. Remove a wrapped paper and print the demo page.
If there are some problems on the printout, replace Fuser
unit.

4. Troubleshooting
4.6.13. Stain on the paper back side
Step Section Check item Result Action
1 Transfer Roller Assy Is the transfer roller dirty or worn out? Yes Clean or replace the Transfer roller
Assembly.
2 ITB Unit Is there any stain caused by a poor Yes Clean the transfer belt.
cleaning, etc. on the transfer belt? If the problem persists, replace ITB unit.
(Refer to 3.2.2.6.)
3 Is the transfer belt cleaning blade in Yes Take off the transfer belt and check if
proper contact with the transfer belt? the transfer belt cleaning blade pressure
spring and the pressure hook are installed
properly.
(Refer to 3.2.2.6.)
4 Fuser Unit Are the fuser belt and pressure roller Yes Clean the fuser belt and pressure roller.
dirty?
5 Check the pressure roller surface is Yes Replace Fuser unit.
damaged or scratched. (Refer to 3.2.2.5.)

4. Troubleshooting
4.7. Adjusting the LSU skew error
1) Check the skew error

a) Execute the ACR.
(Machine Setup > General Settings > Image Management > Auto Color Registration)
b) Print the ACR report.

(SVC(Tech) mode > Information > Print Reports > Auto Color Registration)
c) Check [Y] [M] [C] Skew Data in ACR report.
2) Adjusting the skew error

a) Open the front cover. Remove the waste toner container.
b) There are 3 skew holes for YMC color. Insert the (+) screw driver and adjust CW, CCW referred to adjustment
amount
i) The standard value for skew is 200. If the skew data in ACR report, the skew adjustment is unnecessary.
ii) Adjustment method
• Skew Data <200 : Rotate the driver in a counterclockwise direction.

- ex) Skew Data is 192. : 200-192=8 Click CCW rotation
• Skew Data = 200 : No need to adjustment.
• Skew Data > 200 : Rotate the driver in a clockwise direction.

- ex) Skew Data is 213. : 213–200=13 Click CW rotation
NOTE
1 Click is equal to 1/7 dot.

4. Troubleshooting
3) Check the skew error again.

a) Execute the ACR after the skew adjustment.
b) Print the ACR Report.
c) Check the [Y] [M] [C] skew error.
d) If the value for YMC is in 200±7, complete the skew adjustment.
NOTE
If value can not meet the target, repeat the step1~3.

4. Troubleshooting
4.8. Adjusting the DADF skew
1) Stand the DADF unit. Loosen 4 screws securing the b) If the skew image is like a below sample, adjust
right hinge unit slightly. the hinge unit down. (1 scale => 0.9 mm skew
adjustment)
2) Adjust the position of the DADF hinge as the skew

status.
a) If the skew image is like a below sample, adjust
the hinge unit upward. (1 scale => 0.9 mm skew
adjustment)
3) Detach the DADF sponge after adjusting the skew.

Place the DADF sponge on platen glass. And then close
the DADF unit to stick the sponge.

4. Troubleshooting
4.9. Troubleshooting Guide

NOTE
The service engineer can download all troubleshooting guides in this section from TSP(Technical Support Portal) site.
(http://tsp.samsung.com)
No Problem Description Troubleshooting Page

1 Noise of DADF Hinge / Crack of DADF Hinge / DADF can’t be fixed as open 4–226
2 Job pause problem 4–228
3 Toner cartridge detection error 4–229
4 Scan to PC login failure 4–231
5 OPE Panel operation failure 4–232
6 Machine makes noise when paper print out 4–233
7 DADF paper jam (Multi-feed) 4–234
8 Scanner Locked / #U1-2115 error 4–235

9 Job blocking problem 4–236
10 Recognition error of the side cover problem 4–237
11 LCD touch problem 4–238
12 ACR fail problem 4–239
13 Loud noise sound of LSU motor 4–240
14 Script error in Internet Explorer 4–241
15 Tray1, Tray2, MP Tray can not pick up the paper. 4–242
16 Exit DADF Jam 4–243
17 Paper source setting problem in Visio program 4–244
18 Acoustic noise in Fuser unit 4–246
19 SMPS output voltage drop error 4–247
20 HDD makes a loud noise. 4–248
21 Machine can not feed the paper. 4–249
22 Networking is not working. 4–251
23 LCD is blinking when turning on the power. 4–252
24 Device does not perform initial setup 4–253
25 TC Calibration Error Occurs 4–254
26 How to adjust image distortion 4–255
27 Incorrect time setting when a device's language is Chinese, French, Finnish, 4–256
or Danish
28 94 mm periodic jitter occurs in printed document 4–257
29 Line Skew occurs due to internal module of scanner 4–258
30 706 Error(Paper Jam) occurs 4–259
31 Image registration problem occurs after ACR (Auto Color Registration) 4–260
32 How to handle TRC error & ACR 4–261
33 Paper Jam occurs due to Registration ROLLER-IDLE of DADF 4–262
34 Polaris Color - Removing debris from the Developer Unit. 4–263

4. Troubleshooting
No Problem Description Troubleshooting Page

35 DADF is not recognized and an S3-3211 error occurs or copying must be 4–264
performed from the platen.
36 The ADF does not recognize a piece of paper. 4–265
37 Blur occurs on Color printout 4–266
38 "toner cartridge is not installed." error occurs 4–267
39 The soft keyboard window doesn't display in ACR 4–268

4. Troubleshooting
1) Noise of DADF Hinge / Crack of DADF Hinge / DADF can’t be fixed as open
• Symptom :
- When ADF is opened or closed, the noise from its hinge happened.
- DADF hinge is cracked.
- When the DADF unit is lifted to access the platen glass, the unit should remain at a 50° angle (± 10°). DADF unit
does not remain open as expected.
• Troubleshooting
1) Remove the DADF connector cover.
2) Remove the connector and 1 screw.
3) Lift up and remove the DADF unit.
4) Remove 4 screws from the each hinge unit. And then replace the hinge unit with new one.

4. Troubleshooting
5) Reassemble the DADF unit again.
• Part Code Information

Part Code Description
JC97-03995A DADF-HINGE L
JC97-03996A DADF-HINGE R

4. Troubleshooting
2) Job pause problem

• Symptom : Job is paused.
• Cause :
- User press the stop key.
- During job pausing process, job status is wrong.
• Troubleshooting
1) During job pausing process, keep valid state of pause process.
a) Pausing → Paused
b) If user press cancel, paused → canceling → canceled.
c) If user press continue, paused → resuming → progressing.

4. Troubleshooting
3) Toner cartridge detection error

• Symptom : Toner cartridge is installed, but “Not Install” message occurs.
• Cause :
- Toner cartridge is not installed properly.
- CRUM harness of the toner cartridge is defective.
- CRUM PBA or CRUM Chip is defective.
- CRUM connection(Modular connector) is defective.
- CRUM Joint PBA is defective.
- Bad connection between the main board and the CRUM Joint PBA
• Troubleshooting
1) Toner cartridge install problem
- Check if the toner cartridge is installed properly.
- If the cartridge comes out automatically from set, check the cartridge fixing hook.
- If there are some problems of hook, replace cartridge cap or cartridge.
2) CRUM harness problem of the toner cartridge

- Check if CRUM harness of the toner cartridge is connected correctly.
Check if modular jack of the toner cartridge is broken or assembled abnormally.
- If the modular jack harness is defective, replace it with new one.

If the modular jack is entered to the toner cartridge, pull out it with hands.
3) CRUM PBA problem or CRUM data broken

- Replace the toner cartridge with new one.
4) CRUM connection(Modular connector) installation problem

a) Open the front cover. Pull out the toner cartridge.
b) Check the CRUM connection (Modular connector) is installed properly.

4. Troubleshooting
c) If the modular connector is not installed properly, open the rear cover and re-install.
5) CURM Joint PBA problem

- If CRUM Joint PBA has some problems of the modular jack pin or the main board interface connector etc,
replace the PBA with new one like No.4.
6) Bad connection between the main board and the CRUM Joint PBA
- Check the connection between the main board and the CRUM Joint PBA.
If the connection is bad, replace the harness or the CRUM Joint PBA or main board.

4. Troubleshooting
4) Scan to PC login failure

• Symptom : Login failure popup is displayed when the user selects their Scan ID in the Scan to PC menu.
• Cause :
- Anti-virus program blocks executable files if it tries to communicate with external device but it is not digitally
signed.
- Due to 3rd part library, boost ASIO does not work in certain user environment, EPM is not able to receive login
event from MFP.
NOTE
If any network security device blocks SNMP protocol communication, login will be failed
• Troubleshooting
1) If Login Failure problem is happened and Easy Printer Manager lower than 1.03.45.01 version is installed on
customer PC, please update Easy Printer Manager to the latest version (from Download Center of Samsung web site)
2) Launch Easy Printer Manager and check whether ‘Enable Scan from Device Panel’ is checked in the Scan to
PC Settings menu.
3) Even though ‘Enable Scan from Device Panel’ is checked but still Login Failure is occurred, please check SNMP
communication between PC and MFP has been blocked or not and then allow SNMP communications.
4) If your EPM is equal or higher than 1.05.10.00 but you faced Login Failure issue, Please execute attached
S2PCTroubleshooter and then click the ‘Run diagnose’ button in the ‘diagnose’ tab. Once diagnose is performed,
click the ‘Save Log As’ to get debug log. This debug log would be great help for us to analyze the problem.

4. Troubleshooting
5) OPE Panel operation failure

• Symptom : Numeric key pad operation is abnormal.
• Cause : The burr direction of the ground OPE is wrong. There is a tendency that the burr pushes the touch screen panel.
• Troubleshooting
- Replace the Ground OPE.

4. Troubleshooting
6) Machine makes noise when paper print out

• Symptom : Machine makes noise when paper print out
• Cause :
- Lack of grease in gear-train
- Old type gear is assembled.
• Troubleshooting
1) Enter the service mode.
Press the 1, 2, 3 keys simultaneously, and enter the password ‘1934’.
2) Execute the fuser motor test.

(Service Mode > Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Test Routines > Fuser Motor Forward)
3) Remove the fuser unit. And execute the fuser motor test again.
4) If the machine still makes noise, replace the “DRIVE-FUSER EXIT” Assy.
Model Part Code

CLX-9201/9251/9301 Series JC93-00441A
SCX-8123/8128 Series JC93-00449A
5) If not, replace the fuser unit.

4. Troubleshooting
7) DADF paper jam (Multi-feed)

• Symptom : Paper stops between the ADF roller and the registration roller of the DADF and a paper jam occurs.
• Troubleshooting
Guide pickup replacement is required when a Regi Out Jam occurs during multi-feeding. This also stabilizes paper path.
NOTE
The friction pad is also replaced when the Guide Pickup is replaced.
[Replacement Procedure]
1) Open the Cover-Open Assembly.
2) Remove the DADF separation pad then replace it with new one.
3) Remove the Guide Pickup by pressing the side as shown below.
4) Assemble the new Guide Pickup.
5) Update the firmware as the latest version.

4. Troubleshooting
8) Scanner Locked / #U1-2115 error

• Symptom : Paper stops between the ADF roller and the registration roller of the DADF and a paper jam occurs.
• Cause : All 24V channels output voltage is off (24V output voltage is nearly 0V) and 5V channels output is normal.
• Troubleshooting
1) Check all 24V output channels (24VS1, 24VS2, 24VS3, 24VS4) whether 24V voltage comes out or not.
2) If 24V voltage doesn’t come out, check ‘24V on/off signal pin’ on the main board.
a) The voltage at ‘24V on/off signal pin’ is 0V. → Main board and signal is normal.
b) The voltage at signal pin is 4~5.3V → Main board and signal is abnormal.
3) If Main board and signal is normal and all 24V output channels are nearly 0V, check other parts( i.e. Fuser, motor,
scanner harness, etc.) driven by 24V voltage before replacing the SMPS.
4) If Main board and signal is normal and just one or two or three 24V output channels are nearly 0V, inspect some
harness from abnormal 24V output channel before replacing the SMPS.
5) If Main board and signal is abnormal and all 24V output channels are nearly 0V, inspect the harness, connector and
main board.

4. Troubleshooting
9) Job blocking problem

• Symptom : Job is blocking (in case of scanning completion)
• Cause :
- User press stop key during scanning.
- During job pausing process, scanning is completed.
• Troubleshooting
1) During job pausing process, lock the state, check whether scanning or printing is completed.

4. Troubleshooting
10) Recognition error of the side cover problem

• Symptom : The side cover is closed, but the open message of the side cover displays on LCD.
• Cause : The spring plate of the side cover open sensor is deformed by the deformation of the stopper of the side cover.
• Troubleshooting
1) Replace the side cover open sensor Assy or deform the spring plate to normal shape.

4. Troubleshooting
11) LCD touch problem

• Symptom : During Ready or Job processing , Touch LCD does not work.
• Cause :
- Touch screen panel calibration problem
- Touch screen panel connection interface problem
- UI PBA problem
• Troubleshooting
1) Execute the touch screen calibration.
a) Turn off the machine.
b) While pressing the number 0 on numeric keys, turn the machine on. Wait until calibration screen appears.
c) Press centre of mark + following order 1~5. Use your finger. Perform 2 times.
d) If there is no problem, “Complete” will appear on LCD and reboot the machine. When making a mistake, start
again from the step 1.
2) Check the touch screen panel flat cable connection on UI PBA.
3) If the connection is OK, replace the UI PBA with new one.

4. Troubleshooting
12) ACR fail problem

• Symptom : Set UI indicates ACR fail message.
• Cause : The brokenness of reflection mirror
• Troubleshooting
1) Check the assembly condition inside of LSU.
2) If the reflection mirror is deviated, replace the LSU.

4. Troubleshooting
13) Loud noise sound of LSU motor

• Symptom : The machine makes some noise like a siren from LSU motor in printing mode.
• Cause : LSU motor defect
• Troubleshooting
1) Enter the service mode and execute the LSU motor test.
2) If the LSU motor run sound is loud, replace the LSU.
3) If not, check the other unit.

4. Troubleshooting
14) Script error in Internet Explorer

• Symptom : Some script error occurs and the machine can not print anything. – IE 9 or later version.
• Cause : In protected mode, the “RegOpenCurrentUser” function with write authority returns error or access denied.
Can not write on the HKEY_CURRENT_USER registry.
• Troubleshooting
1) Download the latest driver and install it.

4. Troubleshooting
15) Tray1, Tray2, MP Tray can not pick up the paper.

• Symptom : Tray1, Tray2, MP Tray can not pick up the paper.
• Cause :
- Bad harness connection on the main board
- Connector defect of the main board
• Troubleshooting
1) Check the harness connection. If the harness is not connected correctly, reconnect it.
2) Check the connector 26 & 27 on main board.

If the connector has some problem of soldering, replace the main board.

4. Troubleshooting
16) Exit DADF Jam

• Symptom : When copy or scan images using DADF, exit jam is occurred even if there is no jam.
• Cause :
- Exit actuator is not returned. (Low resetting force of exit actuator spring.)
• Troubleshooting
1) Remove the DADF rear cover, DADF front cover, DADF cover-open Assy, Stacker.
(Refer to the disassembly chapter in service manual.)
2) Replace the exit actuator spring.

4. Troubleshooting
17) Paper source setting problem in Visio program

• Symptom : In Visio program, the setting of paper source is not affected though the paper source of print driver is
changed to Tray1, Tray2 etc
• Cause :
- Visio program set the source in application setting.
- Application setting is have more priority than print driver setting (Another Vendor is same behavior)

4. Troubleshooting
• Troubleshooting
1) Click the “Page setup” in file menu in Visio application.
2) Click the “Setup” button.
3) Change the Paper source which you want to use.

4. Troubleshooting
18) Acoustic noise in Fuser unit

• Symptom : Acoustic noise from fuser assembly in early stage of printing
• Cause : Fuser belt edges is damaged.
• Troubleshooting
1) Replace the fuser unit with new one.

4. Troubleshooting
19) SMPS output voltage drop error

• Symptom : Some error messages occur on the OPE(C3-1312,S3-3121,M1-4111,M1-4211).
• Cause : 24V channels output voltage drop to under 21.6V and 5V channels output is normal.
• Troubleshooting
1) Check all 24V output channels (24VS1, 24VS2, 24VS3, 24VS4) whether 24V voltage comes out or not.
2) If 24V voltage doesn’t come out, check ‘24V on/off signal pin’ on the main board.
a) The voltage at ‘24V on/off signal pin’ is 0V. → Main board and signal is normal.
b) The voltage at signal pin is 4~5.3V → Main board and signal is abnormal.
3) If Main board and signal is normal and all 24V output channels are nearly 0V, check other parts( i.e. Fuser, motor,
scanner harness, etc.) driven by 24V voltage before replacing the SMPS.
4) If Main board and signal is normal and just one or two or three 24V output channels are nearly 0V, inspect some
harness from abnormal 24V output channel before replacing the SMPS.
5) If Main board and signal is abnormal and all 24V output channels are nearly 0V, inspect the harness, connector and
main board.

4. Troubleshooting
20) HDD makes a loud noise.

• Symptom : The Hard Disk Drive makes a loud noise when working.
• Cause : HDD itself has defects.
• Troubleshooting
1) Replace the HDD with new one.

4. Troubleshooting
21) Machine can not feed the paper.

• Symptom : The machine can not feed the paper from Tray1 or Tray2.
• Cause :
- Feed motor problem
- Feed motor connection problem
- Main board defect
• Troubleshooting
1) Check the Feed motor operation.
a) Open the side cover, and push the cover switch with paper forcibly.
b) Enter the service mode.

(Press the 1, 2, 3 keys simultaneously and enter the password (1934).)
c) Select the menu below.

(EDC Mode > Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Test Routine > Feed motor > on/off )
Check the two feed rollers operating status.
d) If the feed rollers can not rotate, open the rear cover and check the motor and gears.

4. Troubleshooting
2) Check the connection between the main board(CN27) and feed motor.
3) If the problem persists, replace the main board.

4. Troubleshooting
22) Networking is not working.

• Symptom : Network is not working suddenly.
• Cause :
- Network line itself is not working properly.
- Network configuration is wrong.
- Some related electronic components have the defect in the main board.
• Troubleshooting
1) Do a ping test after connecting the network line which was used in the SET to a PC to check the network line itself.
2) Do a ping test after connecting the network line to the SET. If it is okay, check the network configuration which may
set wrong by some users without notice.
3) If the result of the ping test is not good, then open the rear cover and see the main board if there are some visible
defects on the network related components such as connector(CN16), capacitor(C192), and any other components
nearby. Surge voltage from the outside may cause the defects.
4) If those components have visible defects, then the main board should be changed.

4. Troubleshooting
23) LCD is blinking when turning on the power.

• Symptom : LCD is blinking when turning on the power.
• Cause : OPE board defect
• Troubleshooting
1) Check assembling the LCD harness.
2) Replace the OPE board with new one.

4. Troubleshooting
24) Device does not perform initial setup

• Symptom : Factory clear or memory clear is performed. Device does not perform initial setup after rebooting.
Firmware version with problem
- UI : V5.08.10.04_20120605.19 or earlier
- Main F/W: V11.11.06.02 06-29-2012 or earlier
• Cause : S/W defect
• Troubleshooting
1) Turn off the device.
2) Open side cover.
3) Turn on the device as Power Key of UI is pressed.
4) Complete System Recovery (HDD format) and reboot the device.

4. Troubleshooting
25) TC Calibration Error Occurs

• Symptom :
The error shown below occurs when engine firmware V1.20.26 or later is applied:
- C8-2210 (Y) / C8-3210 (M) / C8-4210 (C) /C8-5210 (K)
• Troubleshooting
1) Download the PRN file from TSP site.
(http://tsp.samsung.com > Knowledge > Technical Resource > Troubleshooting Guide > TG-12070009 )
2) Send the PRN file to the device.

- ipsend: Ipsend IP_Address CLEAR_TC_CAL_ERROR.prn
- Usblist2: Usblist2 CLEAR_TC_CAL_ERROR.prn
3) Wait about 10 seconds after sending PRN file. Perform Power Off and On.

4. Troubleshooting
26) How to adjust image distortion

• Symptom :
Image distortion occurs when paper is fed from DADF.
• Troubleshooting
1) Loosen the 4 screws of the left hinge then loosen the 4 screws of the right side. Adjust the DADF.
2) Perform a copy job from the DADF and see if image distortion occurs. Repeat steps 1 and 2 if there is distortion.
3) If image distortion is removed then tighten the hinges’ screws.

4. Troubleshooting
27) Incorrect time setting when a device's language is Chinese, French, Finnish, or Danish
• Symptom :
Time setting is incorrect after initial setting when a device's language is Chinese, French, Finnish, or Danish.
• Cause :
Time is not correct by the same time length as the gap from GMT due to wrong time zone function.
• Troubleshooting
During initial settings, change time zone to (GMT) UK before date and time setting.
1) If you select Chinese, French, Finnish, or Danish as the language from Initial Settings,
you have to change the Time Zone to (GMT) UK before date and time setting.
2) Click "Timezone" during the Device Date/Time step of Initial Setting.
NOTE
Date and time setting should be done after timezone settings.
3) Select (GMT) UK.
4) Set date and time.
NOTE
If you have already done initial setting with these 4 languages,

change Time Zone to (GMT) UK
and set the date and time again from Machine Setup > General Settings > Date & Time > Date & Time.

4. Troubleshooting
28) 94 mm periodic jitter occurs in printed document

• Symptom :
94 mm periodic jitter occurs in printed document.
• Troubleshooting
1) Perform a printout for each color with “Check Drum Prn” file.
2) Check the period of jitter with a ruler and figure out the type of fault.
3) Switch the organic photo conductor drum (OPC) with another OPC of another color.
If this resolves the problem, replace the OPC only.
4) Check the gear of the main drive is changed (damaged) or if there is an alien substance.
If the gear is changed (damaged) then replace the main drive.
If an alien substance is found then remove it.
5) Replace the imaging unit that causes the problem.

4. Troubleshooting
29) Line Skew occurs due to internal module of scanner

• Symptom :
Line skew occurs when platen copy is performed.
• Troubleshooting
1) Open DADF. Remove 5 screws. Remove Scan glass.
2) Use vernier calipers to check & record difference between Front and Rear of FR Module from Scan left exterior.
3) Use vernier calipers to check & record difference between Front and Rear of HR Module from Scan left exterior.
4) As the result,
- If difference of FR is +4 mm and HR is +2mm, (or -4 / -2),
a) Remove pulley screw slightly with allen wrench with size 2mm.
b) Measure length from left-right exterior of FR module with vernier calipers and make it the same and lock it.
c) Make difference of left-right smaller than 0.5mm.
It is OK if difference is smaller than 1mm after locking the screw. (HR needs to be checked)
CAUTION
4 screws (2 front pulleys, 2 rear pulleys) need to be tightly locked. Need to be locked with 7kgf*cm torque.
If it is too strong then pulley can be broken, if it is too weak it can be unlocked.
- If difference of FR is +4 mm and HR is -1mm ~ +1mm

a) Where front screw is located when it is seen from the front of device. /
Where rear screw is located when it is seen from the rear of device.
b) Normally distance between head of screw and Heat Sink is about 1mm. Loosen screw and align FR.
Tighten screw and verify alignment with vernier calipers.

4. Troubleshooting
30) 706 Error(Paper Jam) occurs

• Symptom :
706 Error(Paper Jam) occurs while using Polaris inner finisher.
• Troubleshooting
1) Refer to the guide from the TSP site.
(http://tsp.samsung.com > Knowledge > Technical Resource > Troubleshooting Guide > TG-13020002)

4. Troubleshooting
31) Image registration problem occurs after ACR (Auto Color Registration)
• Symptom :
Image registration problem occurs after ACR.
• Cause :
LSU (Laser Scanning Unit)
• Troubleshooting
1) Perform ACR.
(Home > Machine Setup > General Settings > Image Management > Auto Color Registration)
2) Print ACR Report.

(Service Mode > Information > Print Reports > Auto Color Registration)
Succeed or Failed for ACR: [1152] → Registration cannot be adjusted by ACR.
a) Check if Skew data of ACR Report is changed.
b) Check if OPC surface of Y/M/C is OK. → Check if it is scratched or torn.
c) Print and check separated Y/M/C color and see if it is OK.
d) Find “Succeeded or Failed for ACR” from ACR report.
- If the value is 1152 like the above report, ACR cannot be done. LSU need to be replaced.
- Succeeded or Failed for ACR: [0] → ACR was performed OK [OK]
- Succeeded or Failed for ACR: [1] → ACR was not performed OK [Fail]

4. Troubleshooting
32) How to handle TRC error & ACR

• Symptom :
Abnormal color density (thick, thin) / Color registration is wrong.
• Troubleshooting
1) If color density of print is wrong, perform TRC and print out TRC report.
2) Check the TRC error from the TRC report.

- Mode column format :
▪ F = Full TRC
▪ S = Normal TRC
- Error column format : 1X0 where the last digit indicates the color that is out of range.
▪ 1X0 : Sensed value from Y is abnormal.
▪ 1X1 : Sensed value from M is abnormal.
▪ 1X2 : Sensed value from C is abnormal.
▪ 1X3 : Sensed value from K is abnormal.
3) Check the followings for the corresponding color.

- Check if the toner motor is working normally.
▪ Enter Tech Mode (press 1, 2, 3 simultaneously then type in 1934)
(Diagnostics > Engine > Diagnostics > Engine Test Routines > Toner Dispense Motor On/Off)
111-0000(Y), 111-0010(M), 111-0020(C), 111-0030(K)
- Check if toner supply is blocked.

- Check if toner seal is removed.
- Check if the transfer roller is installed properly.
- Print the ACR report. Check the ACR is succeeded.
Succeeded or Failed for ACR Result

ACR - 0 = Success
- 256 = LED calibration failed which is performed before ACR for pattern
sensing.
→ ACR sensor is contaminated or ACR sensor is defective.
PWM of sensor LED LED Calibration Result (LED value, max- 255, min – 0)
If ACR result is 256 and PWM value is 179 then it is a sensor fault or a control
board fault.
Skew Number of clicks to adjust for LSU skew
(Default: 200 → does not need to be adjusted) 7 clicks = 1 dot.
Too low - 190: needs to be adjusted counter-clockwise by 10 clicks
Too high - 210: needs to be adjusted clockwise by 10 clicks
If the value is between 193~217 then it does not need to be adjusted

4. Troubleshooting
33) Paper Jam occurs due to Registration ROLLER-IDLE of DADF

• Symptom :
Paper Jam occurs due to Registration ROLLER-IDLE of DADF
When a document jam occurs during original document scanning, the registration sensor and spring tension need to be
checked. Otherwise the Registration ROLLER-IDLE needs to be checked.
• Cause :
Screw was tightened too much during DADF COVER assembly. Cover plastic presses Registration ROLLER-IDLE and
it cannot rotate smoothly, causing a paper jam.
• Troubleshooting
1) Open DADF Cover.
2) Rotate “Registration ROLLER-IDLE” by hand.

At this time which is close to screw does not rotate smoothly and rotates smoothly.
3) If roller does not rotate smoothly, loosen screw until roller does rotate smoothly.
4) When loosening screw still does not allow roller to rotate well, remove DADF cover and scrape away contact point
with a knife until roller rotates smoothly. Install DADF and adjust screw .
[How to perform above step 4]
a) Remove the DADF cover.
b) Remove the DADF pick up Assy.
c) Use a razor knife to shave the cover area which is binding with the Registration ROLLER-IDLE.

4. Troubleshooting
34) Polaris Color - Removing debris from the Developer Unit.

• Symptom :
Line occurs on the paper moving direction.
• Cause :
Debris on developer unit causes line on print
• Troubleshooting
1) Remove the developer unit.
2) Disassemble the developer unit cover (pay attention not to destroy lock) Empty developer out on clean paper.
3) Remove lumps with the Jig from mag roller.
4) Pay attention & clean the circled area where oil can cause build-up in the Fuser.

4. Troubleshooting
35) DADF is not recognized and an S3-3211 error occurs or copying must be performed from
the platen.
• Symptom :
- DADF installation is not recognized.
- Polaris Color Model (which has HDD) - S3-3211 error occurs and copy must be performed using the platen.
- Polaris Monochrome Model - copy must be performed using the platen.
• Cause :
DADF power cable fails.
• Troubleshooting
1) Reassemble the DADF power cable and if it does not solve the problem, replace the cable (JC39-01867A)
2) Adjust harness and make it fixed with cable tie.

4. Troubleshooting
36) The ADF does not recognize a piece of paper.

• Symptom : An original document does not feed when loaded on the ADF. (Scan is started from platen glass.)
• Troubleshooting
1) Open the DADF cover-open
2) Pull the DADF pick up Assy to the front.
3) Remove the old STOPPER.
4) Assemble the new STOPPER.

4. Troubleshooting
37) Blur occurs on Color printout

• Symptom : Blur occurs on the color printout.
• Troubleshooting
1) Enter EDC Mode → Service Functions → TR Control Mode.
2) Select [T2 Control Mode].
3) Select the paper setting based on the site. (Paper Group, Paper Side, Paper Direction)
4) Raise value for T2 PWM and see if blur problem is resolved.
5) When the problem persists after changing the [T2 Control Mode] values , change the [T1 Control Mode] values.
6) Decrease the value for each color and see whether the symptom disappears.
In this case, [-4] was applied and solved the blur.
7) As there can be variation for each device, change T1, T2 and observe the results.

4. Troubleshooting
38) "toner cartridge is not installed." error occurs

• Symptom :
Error Report shows “Toner Not Install (C1-x411)”
- C1-5411 - “Black toner cartridge is not installed. Install it”
- C1-2411 - “Yellow toner cartridge is not installed. Install it”
- C1-3411 - “Magenta toner cartridge is not installed. Install it”
- C1-4411 - “Cyan toner cartridge is not installed. Install it”
• Cause :
Toner does not fit in the device as the size of the toner container is too small.
• Troubleshooting
1) Change the parts below.
- Toner Catridge Latch(Black) : JC96–08350A
- Toner Catridge Latch(Cyan) : JC96–08349A
- Toner Catridge Latch(Magenta) : JC96–08347A
- Toner Catridge Latch(Yellow) : JC96–08348A

4. Troubleshooting
39) The soft keyboard window doesn't display in ACR

• Symptom :
Soft Keyboard is not shown when ACR is configured.
• Troubleshooting
1) Procedure
a) Go to service mode.
b) Do not use the soft keyboard when logging on to the service mode.
c) Click the Editbox of ACR.
d) Confirm Keyboard.
2) Root Cause
a) The Keyboard type of ACR editbox is set up in the wrong way
b) There is no default settings value of the Keyboard.
3) Resolution
a) Setting the defined keyboard value.
i) Before
ii) After
4) Self-solution
a) Click editbox when logging in.

4. Troubleshooting

5. System Diagram
5. System Diagram
CN18 CN34
o ½ ¡ ¢ £ ® o
o ®£§ o
o ® ¥ ¢ ¤ ¢ ®¡ § o
o ¥ ®¢ ¤ ¢ ½ ®¡ ® o
o ® ½ £ £ o
o ® £ ® ¡ ¨ ½ £ £® o
o ® ® ¨® § £ ¥ ®¢ o
o ® ½ ® ¨® £ o
o ® ½ £ £® ¢ © ¥ o
o ® ½ £ £® ¡ ¥ o
® ½ ¥ o
¥ o
o
o
o

½ ¡ ® ¢ ©
½ ¡ ® ¢ ©
CN7 CN36
o ½ ¡ ¢ £ ® ¢ ¡ o
® o ® ¢ ¡ ® £ § o
®
¤ ¢ o ° ± »´ o ® ¢ ¡ ® ¡ § o
½¡ ¢ £ ½¡ ¢ £ ½ ® ¡ ® ¢ ¡ o
o
CN13 ½ £ £ ® ¢ ¡ o
o ¥ ®¢ o
o o
o ¥ o
¦ ¤ o ¦ ¤ ¥ o
½¦ ¤ o ½¦ ¤ ¥ o
Æ ¸Á´ o ¥ ® ¥ o
¥ ®
o o
¥ ® o ¥ ® o
¥ ® o ¥ ® o
¥ ® o ¥ ®
¢ ¡ ®
¢ ¡ Æ ¸Á´ ¦ Æ ¸Á´ ¢ ¡ ®

CN35
¢ o o
¢ ® ¢ o o ¢ ® ¢
o o
¢ ® ¢ o o ¢ ® ¢
o o
¢ ® ½ ¢ ¢ o o ¢ ® ½ ¢ ¢
o o
¢ ® ¢ o o ¢ ® ¢
®¥ ¢ o o ® ¥ ¢
¢ ® o o ¢ ®
®¥ ¢ o o ® ¥ ¢
¢ ® ¢ ® CN22 £
¥ ® o ¥ ®
o Æ ¸Á´
½ £ £®£ ® ¢ o ½ ¤ ¢ ¡ ® ¢
¥ ® o ¥ ® £
CN20 £ ® ¡ o o £ ® ¡ o
o ®¥ o Æ ¸Á´ ®¥
o ¢ £ ®£ § ® o
o ¢ £ ®£ § ® £ ® ¡ o £ ® ¡ o
o ½ ¶ ¸½ ´
¢ £ o ¢ ¸¶ ½ ° » o ¢ £ ®¡ § ®
u
o ¢ £ ®¡ § ®
o
° ¸½
o CN15
£ ® o
¥ ® ¡ o
CN2 o Æ ¸Á´ ¡ oÂ ´ ½ Â ¾ Á
o
¤ ¢ ¡ o ¢ £
£ ®¢ o
o ¥ ®¢ £ ® o
¢ £ o ¾ Æ ´ Á o

£ ® o
£ ®¢ o
£ ® o Æ ¸Á´ £ oÂ ´ ½ Â ¾ Á
o
¥ ® ¡ o
£ ® o
¥ ® ¡ o
o Æ ¸Á´ ¡ oÂ ´ ½ Â ¾ Á

£ ®¢ o
£ ® o
Æ ¸Á ´
® ¡ ®£ o
CN4 Æ ¸Á´ ¦ Æ ¸Á´ £ ´ ¼ ¿ oÂ ´ ½ Â ¾ Á

© ¡ ® ¡ ¢ ¢ ® o © ¡ ® ¡ ¢ ¢ ®
½ ¤ ¢ ¡ ® ¢
o
o ¥ ®
o ¤ ¢ ¡
o ¡
® ® ¡ ¨ o ® ® ¡ ¨
¥ o ¥
® ¤ ¢ ¡®¡ ¨
Æ ¸Á´
o ® ¤ ¢ ¡ ®¡ ¨
¤ ¢ ¡® ¥ o ¤ ¢ ¡ ® ¥
o
® ¤ ¢ ¡ ® o ® ¤ ¢ ¡ ®
® ¤ ¢ ¡ ® o ® ¤ ¢ ¡ ®
o ¤ £® ®¢ ¢
¢ ¢ o ° ½ Æ ¸Á´ o ½ £ £ ® ®¢ ¢
o
o
½ ® ¥®¢ ¢® Æ ¸Á´ o ½ ®¥ ®¢ ¢® CN17 o ¥ ®
o ¥ ® o o ®¥ ® ¡ ¤
o ½ ¡ ® ¢ © ®¥ ® ¡ ¤ o o ½ ¤ ¢ ¡ ® ¢
o
Æ ¸Á´ o
½ ¤ ¢ ¡ ® ¢ o
° ¿ ´ Áo Â ¸É ´ o Â ´ ½ Â ¾ Á
Æ ¸Á´ o ® ¡ ® ¢ © o ¢ ® ¡ ¤ ® ¤ ¢ ¡
o
o ® ¥ ¢ Æ ¸Á´ ¢ ® ¡ ¤ ® ¤ ¢ ¡
¢ ® ¡ ¤ ® ¤ ¢ ¡ o
o ½ ¡ ® ¢ © ¢ ® ¡ ¤ ® ¤ ¢ ¡ o
o o
° ¿ ´ Áo Â ¸É ´ o Â ´ ½ Â ¾ Á Æ ¸Á´ o ® ¡ ® ¢ ©
®£ ® ¤ £ o
o ® ¥ ¢ ®£ ® ¤ £ o Æ ¸Á´
o ´ ½ Ã´ Á
o ® ¤ £ ®£
Á° Æ
o
o ®£ ® ¤ £ o
Ä ¼ ¸³ ¸ÃÈ o Â ´ ½ Â ¾ Á
Æ ¸Á´ o ® ¤ £ ® ¤ ®£ ® ¤ £ o
o ® ¥ ¢ £ ¡ ® £ ¡ o
¢ ¢ £ ¡ ® £ ¡ o
CN30 £ ¡ ® ¢ o Æ ¸Á´
Æ ¸Á´

o ¢
¥ o ¥ £ ¡ ® ¢
o ¥
¥
Æ ¸Á ´ o ¥
Æ ¸Á´ £ ¡ o £ ¡
o ¥
o ¥
o ¥
Æ ¸Á´
£ ¡ o ¢
¥
o
¥ o
o
¥
Æ ¸Á´ o
o ¤ ¢ ¡

¥


5. System Diagram
CN10
® § £
® § £ o
½ ® § £
½ ® § £ o Æ ¸Á´
½ ® § £
½ ® § £ o
® § £
® § £ o
¡ ® ® £
¡ ® ® £ o
® ® £
® ® £ o
½ ¡ ¨ ® ® £
½ ¡ ¨ ® ® £ o
½ ® ® £
½ ® ® £ o
® ® £
® ® £ o Æ ¸Á´ ¡ ® ® £
¡ ® ® £ o

o

o
¥
¥ o
¥
¥ o
o
¥ ¡ ® ® ¢ o Æ ¸Á´ ¥ ¡ ® ® ¢
½ ¥ ¡ ® ® ¢ o ½ ¥ ¡ ® ® ¢
®£ o ®£
½ ®£ o ½ ®£
½ ®£ o
Æ ¸Á´ ½ ®£
®£ o ®£
¡ ® ® ¤ ¢ ¡ o ¡ ® ® ¤ ¢ ¡
® ® ¤ ¢ ¡ o ® ® ¤ ¢ ¡
½ ¡ ¨ ® ® ¤ ¢ ¡ o ½ ¡ ¨ ® ® ¤ ¢ ¡
½ ® ® ¤ ¢ ¡ o ½ ® ® ¤ ¢ ¡
® ® ¤ ¢ ¡ o ® ® ¤ ¢ ¡
¡ ® ® ¤ ¢ ¡ o Æ ¸Á´
¡ ® ® ¤ ¢ ¡

¥ ¥
¥ ¥

¤ £® ® ¤ ¢ ¡ Æ ¸Á´ ¤ £ ® ® ¤ ¢ ¡
½ £ £® ® ¤ ¢ ¡
° ¸½ ½ £ £ ® ® ¤ ¢ ¡
¡ ¥
¡ ® ® o ¡ ® ®
® ® o ® ®
CN32 ½ ¡ ¨ ® ® o ½ ¡ ¨ ® ®
¡ ® ® ½ ® ® o ½ ® ®
o ¡ ® ®
® ® ® ® o ® ®
o ® ® Æ ¸Á´ ¡ ® ®
½ ¡ ¨ ® ® ¡ ® ® o
o ½ ¡ ¨ ® ®
½ ® ® o
o ½ ® ®
® ® o
Æ ¸Á´ o ® ®
¡ ® ® ¥ ® o ¥ ®
o ¡ ® ®
¥ ® o ¥ ®
o
o
o
¥ ½ ¡ ®¡ o Æ ¸Á´ ½ ¡ ®¡
o ¥
¥ ¥ ® o ¥ ®
o ¥
® ¡ ® ¤ £ o ® ¡ ® ¤ £
¡ ® ® o ¡ ® ®
¥ ® o Æ ¸Á´ ¥ ®
® ® o ® ®
® ® ¤ £ o
½ ¡ ¨ ® ® o ½ ¡ ¨ ® ® ® ® ¤ £
½ ® ®
¥ ® o Æ ¸Á´ ¥ ®
o ½ ® ®

® ® o ® ®
Æ ¸Á´
¡ ® ® o ¡ ® ®
o
o
¥ o ¥
¥ o ¥
¡ ® ® o ¡ ® ®
® ® o ® ®
½ ¡ ¨ ® ® o ½ ¡ ¨ ® ®
½ ® ® o ½ ® ®
® ® o ® ®
Æ ¸Á´ o ¡ ® ®
¡ ® ® ½ ¶ ¸½ ´
o u

° ¸½
¥ ¥
¥ ¥
¡ ® ® ¡ ® ®
® ® ® ®
½ ¡ ¨ ® ® ½ ¡ ¨ ® ® CN38
½ ® ® ½ ® ® ½ ®£ ¡ ® o ½ ® £ ¡ ®
® ® ® ® o Æ ¸Á´
¡ ® ®
Æ ¸Á´ ¡ ® ® £¾½´Á
¥ ® o Æ ¸Á´ ¦ ¥ ® £ ¾ ½ ´ Áo
o Æ ¸Á´

£ ¡ ® ¤ £ o £ ¡ ® ¤ £
¥ ¥ ½ ®£ ¡ ® o ½ ® £ ¡ ®
¥ ¥ Æ ¸Á´
o £¾½´Á
¥ ® o Æ ¸Á´ ¦ ¥ ® £ ¾ ½ ´ Áo
Æ ¸Á´

o
£ ¡ ® ¤ £ o £ ¡ ® ¤ £
® ¥® ¡ ¤ o ® ¥ ® ¡ ¤
¢ ® ¡ ¤ ® ££ o ¢ ® ¡ ¤ ® ££
Æ ¸Á´

Æ ¸Á´ ¢ ® ¡ ¤ ® ££
¢ ® ¡ ¤ ® £ £ o
CN12 o

¥ ® o ¥ ® ® ¥® ¡ ¤ o ® ¥ ® ¡ ¤
® ¡ ¢ ¡
Æ ¸Á´

Æ ¸Á´ ¢ ® ¡ ¤ ® ££
o ® ¡ ¢ ¡ ¢ ® ¡ ¤ ® ££ o Æ ¸Á´ Æ ¸Á´
® ¥ ® ¡ ¤ o ® ¥ ® ¡ ¤ ¢ ® ¡ ¤ ® £ £ o ¢ ® ¡ ¤ ® ££
¢ ® ¡ ¤ ® ¥ o ¢ ® ¡ ¤ ® ¥ o
¢ ® ¡ ¤ ® ¥
Æ ¸Á´

Æ ¸Á´
o ¢ ® ¡ ¤ ® ¥ ½ ®£ ¡ ® o ½ ® £ ¡ ®
o o Æ ¸Á´

¥ ® o ¥ ® ¥ ® o £¾½´Á
Æ ¸Á´ Æ ¸Á´ Æ ¸Á´ ¦ ¥ ® £ ¾ ½ ´ Áo
® ¡ ¢ ¡ o ® ¡ ¢ ¡ o Æ ¸Á´

® ¥ ® ¡ ¤ o ® ¥ ® ¡ ¤ £ ¡ ® ¤ £ o £ ¡ ® ¤ £
¢ ® ¡ ¤ ® ¥ o ¢ ® ¡ ¤ ® ¥ ½ ®£ ¡ ® o ½ ® £ ¡ ®
¢ ® ¡ ¤ ® ¥
Æ ¸Á´

Æ ¸Á´ o ¢ ® ¡ ¤ ® ¥ Æ ¸Á´
o
o
£¾½´Á
¥ ® o Æ ¸Á´ ¦ ¥ ® £ ¾ ½ ´ Áo
¥ ® o ¥ ® o Æ ¸Á´
¨
® ¡ ¢ ¡
Æ ¸Á´

Æ ¸Á´ o ® ¡ ¢ ¡ £ ¡ ® ¤ £ £ ¡ ® ¤ £
® ¥ ® ¡ ¤ o ® ¥ ® ¡ ¤ ® ¥® ¡ ¤ ® ¥ ® ¡ ¤
¢ ® ¡ ¤ ® ¥ o ¢ ® ¡ ¤ ® ¥ ¢ ® ¡ ¤ ® ££ ¢ ® ¡ ¤ ® ££
¢ ® ¡ ¤ ® ¥
Æ ¸Á´

Æ ¸Á´ o ¢ ® ¡ ¤ ® ¥
Æ ¸Á´

Æ ¸Á´ ¢ ® ¡ ¤ ® ££
¢ ® ¡ ¤ ® £ £
o
¥ ® o ¥ ® ® ¥® ¡ ¤ ® ¥ ® ¡ ¤
® ¡ ¢ ¡
Æ ¸Á´

Æ ¸Á´ o ® ¡ ¢ ¡ ¢ ® ¡ ¤ ® ££
¢ ® ¡ ¤ ® ££ Æ ¸Á´ Æ ¸Á´
® ¥ ® ¡ ¤ o ® ¥ ® ¡ ¤ ¢ ® ¡ ¤ ® £ £ ¢ ® ¡ ¤ ® ££
¢ ® ¡ ¤ ® ¥ o ¢ ® ¡ ¤ ® ¥
¢ ® ¡ ¤ ® ¥
Æ ¸Á´

Æ ¸Á´ o ¢ ® ¡ ¤ ® ¥

CN39
o
£ ® ¥ o £ ® ¥
Æ ¸Á´

Æ ¸Á´ ¥
¥ o
£ ¢ ®¥ £ o £ ¢ ®¥ £
o
£ ® ¥ o £ ® ¥
CN40 Æ ¸Á´

Æ ¸Á´ ¥
¥ o
¥ ® o ¥ ® £ ¢ ®¥ £
£ ¢ ®¥ £ o
Æ ¸Á´ o
o
® ¢ ¡ o ® ¢ ¡ £ ® ¥
£ ® ¥ o Æ ¸Á´ Æ ¸Á´
¥ ® o ¥ ® ¥
¥ o
Æ ¸Á´ o
£ ¢ ®¥ £ o £ ¢ ®¥ £
® ¢ ¡ o ® ¢ ¡
o
¥ ® o ¥ ® £ ® ¥
£ ® ¥ o
Æ ¸Á´ o Æ ¸Á´

Æ ¸Á´ ¥
¥ o
® ¢ ¡ o ® ¢ ¡ £ ¢ ®¥ £
£ ¢ ®¥ £ o
¥ ® o ¥ ®

Æ ¸Á´ o
® ¢ ¡ ® ¢ ¡

5. System Diagram
CN27 CN19
¥ ® o ¥ ® ¥ ®
Æ ¸Á´ ¦ Æ ¸Á´ o ¥ ®¢
½ ¡ ® £¨ o ½ ¡ ® £¨ ½ ¡ ® § £ Æ ¸Á ´ ¦ Æ ¸Á´
¥ ®
o ¥ ® ¥ ®¢ o ½ ® ¤ ® § £
Æ ¸Á´ ¦ Æ ¸Á´
o o
½ ¡ ® £
o ½ ¡ ® £ ½ ® ¤ ® § £ o
½ ¡ ® Æ ¸Á´ ¦ Æ ¸Á´ o ® § £ o
½ ® § £ o ® § £
¥ ® o ½ ¡ ®
® ¤ ½ ® § £ o ½ ® § £
o ¥ ® Æ ¸Á´ ½ ® § £
½ ® ¤ o ® ¤ ® § £ o Æ ¸Á´ ¦
½ ® ¤
Æ ¸Á´ ® § £
o ½ ® ¤ ¦ ®¡ £¤ ¡ ® ¤ § o
® ¤ ¥ ® o ¦ ®¡ £¤ ¡ ® ¤ §
o ½ ® ¤ Æ
¦

Æ ¥ ®
® ¤ o ® ¤ ¥ ® o
¥ ®
½ ® ¤ o ® ¤ o
½ ® ¤
Æ ¸Á´ o ½ ® ¤ ½ ¡ ® § £ o
Æ ¸Á´
½ ¡ ® § £
® ¤ o ½ ® ¤ ¥ ®¢ o ¥ ®¢
¥ ®
o ® ¤ o Æ ¸Á ´
¦
Æ ¸Á´
Æ ¸Á´ ¦ Æ ¸Á´ o ¥ ® ½ ® ¤ ® § £ o ½ ® ¤ ® § £
½ ¡ ® £¨
o ½ £ £ ® § £ o
¥ ®
o ½ ¡ ® £¨ o
Æ ¸Á´ ¦ Æ ¸Á´ o ¥ ® o
v½ ³
½ ¡ ® £ § £
o o
½ ¡ ® Æ ¸Á´ ¦ Æ ¸Á´ o ½ ¡ ® £ o
¥ ® o
® o ½ ¡ ®
½ ® o ¥ ®
½ ®
Æ ¸Á´ o ®
® ½ ®
½ ®
®

¢

CN26
¥ ®¢ o ¥ ®¢
o Æ ¸Á ´ ¦ Æ ¸Á´
½ ¡ ® ® £¨ o ½ ¡ ® ® £ ¨
¦ ® ®¢
¦ ® ®¢ o Æ ¸Á ´ ¦ Æ ¸Á´
¥
¥ o
® ¤
® ¤ o
½ ® ¤
½ ® ¤ o Æ ¸Á´
½ ® ¤ o ½ ® ¤
® ¤
® ¤ o
¥ ®
¥ ® o
Æ ¸Á ´ ¦ Æ ¸Á´
o
½ ¡ ® ¤ ¢ ¡® ¤ £
½ ¡ ® ¤ ¢ ¡® ¤ £ o
o
o
o
¥ ® o
CN23 o ¥ ®
o ¤ £ ® ® ¢ ¤ ½ ¡ ® ¤ ¡ o Æ ¸Á´
o ½ £ £® ®¢ ¤ ¥ ® o ½ ¡ ® ¤ ¡
o o ¥ ®
o ¤ £ ® ® ¢ ¤ ½ ¡ ® ¤ ¡ o Æ ¸Á ´ ¦ Æ ¸Á´
o ½ £ £® ®¢ ¤ ¥ ® o ½ ¡ ® ¤ ¡
o o ¥ ®

o ½ ¡ ® ® ¤ § o Æ ¸Á´
¥ ¡ ® ® ¡ £ Æ ¸Á´ ¦ Æ ¸Á´
o ¥ ¡® ® ¡ £ ¤ £ ® ® ¤ § o ½ ¡ ® ® ¤ §
½ ¥ ¡ ® ® ¡ £ ¤ £® ® ¤ §
o ½ ¥ ¡® ® ¡ £ ½ £ £ ® ® ¤ o
® ¥ ¢ ¤ ¢ o ®¥ ¢ ¤ ¢ o Æ ¸Á ´ ¦ Æ ¸Á´ ½ £ £® ® ¤
Æ ¸Á´ o ¤ £ ® ® ¤ §
½ £ £ ® ¦ ¢ £ ® ¢ £ ¤ £® ® ¤ §
o ½ £ £ ® ¦ ¢ £ ® ¢ £ ½ £ £ ® ® ¤
o ½ ¶ ¸½ ´ Æ ¸Á ´ ¦ Æ ¸Á´ ½ £ £® ® ¤

®¦ ¢ £ ® ¥ o ® ¦ ¢ £ ® ¥ u
Æ ¸Á´ Æ ¸Á´
®¦ ¢ £ ® o ®¦ ¢ £ ® ° ¸½
¥ ® o ¥ ®
®¦ ¢ £ o ®¦ ¢ £
½ ®¦ ¢ £ ½ ®¦ ¢ £
½ ®¦ ¢ £
Æ ¸Á´ ½ ®¦ ¢ £
®¦ ¢ £ ®¦ ¢ £
¢ ¤
CN11
½ £ £ ® ¢ ¤ o o ½ £ £®¢ ¤
¥¢
¥ o o ¥
¥ o o ¥ CN25
o o ¦ ® ¥® o ¦ ® ¥ ®
½ ¢ £ ¡ £ ® ¢ ¤ ® ¤ £ o o ½ ¢ £ ¡ £ ® ¢ ¤ ® ¤ £ ¦ ® £ ¥ o ¦ ® £ ¥
½ ¡ ¨ ® ¢ ¤ ® o o ½ ¡ ¨ ® ¢ ¤ ® ¦ ® ®¥ o ¦ ® ® ¥
® ¢ ¤ ® ¤ £ o o ®¢ ¤ ® ¤ £ ½ ® o ½ ®
¥ ® ® ¢ ¤ o o ¥ ® ® ¢ ¤ ¦ ® ® ¡ o ¦ ® ® ¡
¥ ® ® ¢ ¤ o o ¥ ® ® ¢ ¤ ¦ ® ¥ o ¦ ® ¥
®¢ ¤ ®£ o o ® ¢ ¤ ®£ ¦ ® ¤ ¢ ¡ ® ¢ o ¦ ® ¤ ¢ ¡ ® ¢
o o ¦ ®¢ ¦ o ¦ ®¢ ¦
¢ ¤ ® ® ¦ ¡ ® ¤ £ o o ¢ ¤ ® ® ¦ ¡ ® ¤ £ ¦ ®£ ¥ o ¦ ®£ ¥
o o ¦ ® £ ¥ ® o ¦ ®£ ¥ ®
½ ® ¤ £ o o ½ ® ¤ £ ® £ ¥ ® o ®£ ¥ ®
½ ¢ ® ® ¤ £ o o ½ ¢ ® ® ¤ £ ® ¥ ¢® o ® ¥ ¢®
o o ¦ ® ¥® o ¦ ® ¥ ®
½ ¢ ¨ ® o o ½ ¢ ¨ ® ¦ ® ¥® o ¦ ® ¥ ®
½ ¢ ¨ ® o o ½ ¢ ¨ ® ¦ ® ¥® o ¦ ® ¥ ®
o o ¦ ® £ ¥ o ¦ ® £ ¥
½ ¥ ® o o ½ ¥ ® ¦ ® £ ¥ o ¦ ® £ ¥
½ ¥ ® o o ½ ¥ ® ¦ ® £ ¥ o o ¦ ® £ ¥
o o ® ¥ o ® ¥
¢ ¤ ® ® ¦ ¡ ® ¤ £ o o ¢ ¤ ® ® ¦ ¡ ® ¤ £ ® ¥ o ® ¥
o o ® ¥ o ® ¥
½ ® ¤ £ o o ½ ® ¤ £ ® ¥ o ® ¥
½ ¢ ® ® ¤ £ o
o o ½ ¢ ® ® ¤ £ ¦ ® ¥ o ¦ ® ¥
o o ¦ ® ¥ o ¦ ® ¥
½ ¥ ® ½ ¥ ® ¦ ® ¥ o ¦ ® ¥
½ ¥ ® ½ ¥ ® ¦ ® ®¥ o ¦ ® ® ¥
¦ ® ®¥ o ¦ ® ® ¥
¢ ¤ ® ® ¦ ¡ ® ¤ £ ¢ ¤ ® ® ¦ ¡ ® ¤ £ ¦ ® ®¥ ¦ ® ® ¥
½ ® ½ ®
½ ® ¤ £ ½ ® ¤ £ ½ ® ½ ®
½ ¢ ® ® ¤ £ ½ ¢ ® ® ¤ £ ½ ® ½ ®
® £ ¥ ® £ ¥
½ ¥ ® ½ ¥ ® ® £ ¥ ® £ ¥
½ ¥ ® ½ ¥ ® ® £ ¥ ® £ ¥
® £ ¥ ® £ ¥
¢ ¤ ® ® ¦ ¡ ® ¤ £ ¢ ¤ ® ® ¦ ¡ ® ¤ £
CN37
½ ® ¤ £ ½ ® ¤ £ ¥ ® o ¥ ®
½ ¢ ® ® ¤ £ ½ ¢ ® ® ¤ £ ¥ ® o ¥ ®
¥ ® o ¥ ®
½ ¢ ¨ ® ½ ¢ ¨ ® ¥ ® o ¥ ®
½ ¢ ¨ ® ½ ¢ ¨ ® ¥ ® ® ¢ ¤ o ¥ ® ®¢ ¤
Æ ¸Á´
o
½ ¥ ® ½ ¥ ® o
½ ¥ ® ½ ¥ ® o
o


5. System Diagram
CN |
INTERRUP TO R
PHOTO
INTERRUP TO R
PHOTO
INTERRUP TO R
PHOTO
2
LED
APS SENSO R
APS SENSO R
DGND
DGND
P WM_WLE D_CT
2 4V
2 4V
1 1
¦ ® ® ¡ £ o
2 2
WLED CTL
CN |
3
CN1
LED

1 1
2 2 ¦ ® ® ¡ £ o
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
5
4
3
2
1

|
|
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
COVE R/HP SE NS OR
APS S ENSOR 1 _2
nCCD_HOME
DGND
5V_L
nFLAT_COVER_OP EN2
DGND
5V_L
nFLAT_COVER_OP EN1
DGND
5V_S
5V
nAPS SENSO R2
DGND
5V
nAPS SENSO R1
DGND
DGND
DGND
PWM_WLED_ CTL
24 V
24 V
WLED CTL
CN8
CN2
CN4
MAIN P BA SCAN_MTR_MS1
| SCAN_ MTR_ MS1
PWM_ SCAN_MTRCN28 PWM_SCAN_CN1 MTR
SCAN_MTR_DIR
SCAN I/F2 1 17 SCAN_
MAIN
MTR_
I/F CONN
DIR CN3
nEN_ SCAN_MTR 2 16 nEN _SCAN_ MTR SCAN MOTOR
SCAN_MTR_PLS 3 15 SCAN_ MTR_ PLS nB_SCAN_ MTR 1 6
PWM_ WHITE_ LED 4 14 PWM_WLED_ CTL 24 V 2 5
5 13 SCAN MOTOR
nFLAT _COVER _OPEN 2 nFLAT _ COVER_ OPEN2 B_ SCAN_MTR 3 4
6 12 A_ SCAN_MTR 4 3 (BIPOLAR STEP
nFLAT _COVER _OPEN 1 nFLAT _ COVER_ OPEN1 MOTOR)
nCCD_ HOME 7 11 24 V 5 2
nCCD_HOME
nAPS _ SENSOR2 8 10 nAPS _SENSOR 2 nA_SCAN_ MTR 6 1
nAPS _ SENSOR1 9 9 nAPS _SENSOR 1
nDETECT_ DADF 10 8 nDADF_ DETECT
nDETECT_ PAPER _DADF 11 7 nPAPER _DETECT
nSCAN_ READ 12 6 nSCAN _READ
DADF_ TXD 13 5 TXD_ DADF
DADF_ RXD 14 4
34 RXD_ DADF
18
15 3
nRST_ DADF 19 33 nRST _DADF
DGND 16 2
32 DGND
20
17 1
DGND 31 DGND
21
DGND 22 30 DGND
DGND 29 DGND
23
DGND DGND
24 28
3.3 VLP 25 27 3 .3V
DGND DGND
26 26
5V1 _WRKSRC_SCAN 5 VS
27 25
DGND DGND
28 24
5V1 _LP 5V
29 23
5V1 _LP 30 22 5V
DGND 31 21 DGND
24 V4 32 20 24 V
24 V4 33 19 24 V
24 V4 24 V
34 18
24 V4 24 V
SCAN_MTR_MS2 SCAN_ MTR_ MS2
S CAN JOINT P BA
n PAP ER_DETECT
n DADF_DETECT
nS CAN_ READ
n RST_DADF
DADF I/F 24 V
RXD_DADF
TXD_DADF
CN6
DG ND
DG ND
DG ND
DG ND
DG ND
DG ND
5VS
24 V
24 V
24 V
24 V
5V
5V
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
|

20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
S CAN J OINT I/F
NDETECT_P APE R_ D
|
NS ENS_ P_S CAN
CN1 1
CN7
NRST_ DADF
5 V PAPER SIZE SENSOR 1

DGND 2 3
NSENS _P _LENGTH 1 3 2 PHOTO
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
INTERRUPTER
RXD
5V 4
ADF
TXD
5 VS
13
2 4V
2 4V
2 4V
2 4V
2 4V
|
5V
5V
DGND 5 PHOTO
2
CN7 NSENS _P _LENGTH 2 6
1
INTERRUPTER
PICKUP_ REGI MOTOR CONN 5V 7 3
9 1 FGCK1
DGND 8 2
PHOTO
8 2 HW1 INTERRUPTER
7 3 HV1 NSENS _P _WIDTH1 9 1
3
4 HU1 5V 10 PHOTO
6 2
BLDC MOTOR 5 5 DGND DGND 11 INTERRUPTER
13
4 6 3.3 V NSENS _P _WIDTH2 12 PHOTO
5V 13 2
3 7 W1 INTERRUPTER
DGND 14 1
2 8 V1
1 9 U1 NSENS _P _WIDTH3 15
|
CN6
|
DADF P BA 5 VPAPER DRIVING SENSOR
DGND
NSENS _P _REGI
1
2
3

3
2
PHOTO
INTERRUPTER
5V 13
CN13 DGND 4 PHOTO
SCAN READ /CLUTCH 5 2
3
1 5V COVER OPEN 6 13
INTERRUPTER
PHOTO 2 DGND 5V PHOTO
2 7 2
INTERRUPTER 3 NSENS _P _SCAN DGND 8 INTERRUPTER
1 1
2 4 24 V NDETECT_PAPER _DAD
CLUTCH F 9
1 5 PICKUP _CLUTCH
2
CLUTCH 6 24 V
1 |
7 REGI_CLUTCH
CN8
EXIT IDLE SENSOR
5V 1 3
DGND 2 2 PHOTO
INTERRUPTER
NSENS _EXIT _ IDLE 3 1
CN2
1 DGND
MINICUBE2 |
2 nRESET
3 SOF 3_ DEBUG CN9
4 3 .3V EXIT SENSOR
5 SIF 3_ DEBUG 5V 1 3
DGND 2 2 PHOTO
6 NSCKF3 _DEBU INTERRUPTER
7 G NSENS _P _EXIT 3 1
8 HS_ DEBUG
9 FLMD1
1 FLMD0
0 - CN10
EXIT SOLENOID
24 V 1 2
PWM_EXIT _SOL 2 SOLENOID
1

This chapter contains the tools list, list of abbreviations used in this manual, and a guide to the location space required when
installing the printer. A definition of test pages and Wireless Network information definition is also included.
6.1. Tools for Troubleshooting
The following tools are recommended safe and easy troubleshooting as described in this service manual.
Tool Image Use Remark

Hand DVM Checking the fuser lamp. Service
Checking the SMPS fuse.
Spring hook When disassembling the spring Service

Small vacuum To remove the toner and contamination Service
inside of the machine.
Driver To tighten screws. Service

To remove the hinge of the cover.
Tweezers To unplug the pin connector of the fuser Service

unit.
To remove the E-ring.
Soft cloth To clean the rollers Service
To clean the frame and scan glass
Black soft cloth To cover the OPC drum Service
Install guide, User guide, When installing the machine. Installation

Admin guide
Software CD When installing the machine. Installation

Tool Image Use Remark

Test Chart To check the image quality Service
• A4 image, A3 image,
Skew
Spare Kit To fix the unit or parts Service

• Screw, E-Ring
Clamp To form the harness Service
Grease To remove the noise by gear. Service

• G-8050 : JC81–08663A (200g)
• SPY272 : JC81–08664A (100g)

6.2. Glossary
The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by understanding the terminologies commonly used with
printing as well as mentioned in this user’s guide and service manual.
802.11 is a set of standards for wireless local area network (WLAN) communication, developed by
802.11
the IEEE LAN/MAN Standards Committee (IEEE 802).
802.11b/g/n can share same hardware and use the 2.4 GHz band. 802.11b supports bandwidth up to 11
802.11b/g/n Mbps, 802.11n supports bandwidth up to 150 Mbps. 802.11b/g/n devices may occasionally suffer
interference from microwave ovens, cordless telephones, and Bluetooth devices.
Access Point or Wireless Access Point (AP or WAP) is a device that connects wireless communication
Access point devices together on wireless local area networks (WLAN), and acts as a central transmitter and
receiver of WLAN radio signals.
An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a scanning unit that will automatically feed an original
ADF
sheet of paper so that the machine can scan some amount of the paper at once.
AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple, Inc for computer networking. It
AppleTalk was included in the original Macintosh (1984) and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP
networking.
A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to represent the color of a single pixel in
a bitmapped image. Higher color depth gives a broader range of distinct colors. As the number of bits
BIT Depth
increases, the number of possible colors becomes impractically large for a color map. 1-bit color is
commonly called as monochrome or black and white.
A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows graphics subsystem (GDI),
BMP
and used commonly as a simple graphics file format on that platform.
Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to obtain its IP address automatically.
This is usually done in the bootstrap process of computers or operating systems running on them. The
BOOTP
BOOTP servers assign the IP address from a pool of addresses to each client. BOOTP enables 'diskless
workstation' computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced operating system.
Charge Coupled Device (CCD) is a hardware which enables the scan job. CCD Locking mechanism is
CCD
also used to hold the CCD module to prevent any damage when you move the machine.
Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When collation is selected, the device
Collation
prints an entire set before printing additional copies.
A control panel is a flat, typically vertical, area where control or monitoring instruments are displayed.
Control Panel
They are typically found in front of the machine.
It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing. For example, 5% coverage
means that an A4 sided paper has about 5% image or text on it. So, if the paper or original has
Coverage
complicated images or lots of text on it, the coverage will be higher and at the same time, a toner
usage will be as much as the coverage.
Comma Separated Values (CSV). A type of file format, CSV is used to exchange data between
CSV disparate applications. The file format, as it is used in Microsoft Excel, has become a de facto standard
throughout the industry, even among non-Microsoft platforms.
A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) is a scanning unit that will automatically feed and
DADF
turn over an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan on both sides of the paper.
Default The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box state, reset, or initialized.
A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking protocol. A DHCP
server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally,
DHCP
information required by the client host to participate on an IP network. DHCP also provides a
mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to client hosts.
Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM), a small circuit board that holds memory. DIMM stores all
DIMM
the data within the machine like printing data, received fax data.

The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a standard that allows devices on a home network to
DLNA
share information with each other across the network.
The Domain Name Server (DNS) is a system that stores information associated with domain names in
DNS
a distributed database on networks, such as the Internet.
A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head that runs back and forth
Dot Matrix Printer on the page and prints by impact, striking an ink-soaked cloth ribbon against the paper, much like a
typewriter.
Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and printing. Generally,
DPI
higher DPI results in a higher resolution, more visible detail in the image, and a larger file size.
Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection. Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables a
DRPD
user to use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers.
A mechanism that will automatically turn over a sheet of paper so that the machine can print (or
Duplex scan) on both sides of the paper. A printer equipped with a Duplex Unit can print on both sides of
paper during one print cycle.
Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a month. Generally the
printer has the lifespan limitation such as pages per year. The lifespan means the average capacity
Duty Cycle
of print-outs, usually within the warranty period. For example, if the duty cycle is 48,000 pages per
month assuming 20 working days, a printer limits 2,400 pages a day.
Error Correction Mode (ECM) is an optional transmission mode built into Class 1 fax machines
ECM or fax modems. It automatically detects and corrects errors in the fax transmission process that
are sometimes caused by telephone line noise.
Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as another. An emulator
duplicates the functions of one system with a different system, so that the second system behaves like
Emulation the first system. Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior, which is in contrast
to simulation, which concerns an abstract model of the system being simulated, often considering
its internal state.
Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local area networks (LANs). It defines
wiring and signaling for the physical layer, and frame formats and protocols for the media access
Ethernet
control (MAC)/data link layer of the OSI model. Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802.3. It
has become the most widespread LAN technology in use during the 1990s to the present.
A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer networking. It was included in the
EtherTalk
original Macintosh (1984) and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.
Foreign Device Interface (FDI) is a card installed inside the machine to allow a third party device
FDI such as a coin operated device or a card reader. Those devices allow the pay-for-print service
on your machine.
A File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a commonly used protocol for exchanging files over any network
FTP
that supports the TCP/IP protocol (such as the Internet or an intranet).
The part of a laser printer that fuses the toner onto the print media. It consists of a fuser belt and a
pressure roller. After toner is transferred onto the paper, the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to
Fuser Unit
ensure that the toner stays on the paper permanently, which is why paper is warm when it comes
out of a laser printer.
A connection between computer networks, or between a computer network and a telephone line. It is
Gateway
very popular, as it is a computer or a network that allows access to another computer or network.
A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image when color images are converted
Grayscale
to grayscale; colors are represented by various shades of gray.
An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots. Highly colored areas consist of
Halftone
a large number of dots, while lighter areas consist of a smaller number of dots.
Hard Disk Drive (HDD), commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk, is a non-volatile storage
HDD
device which stores digitally-encoded data on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces.

The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an international non-profit, professional
IEEE
organization for the advancement of technology related to electricity.
The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IEEE 1284 (IEEE). The term "1284-B" refers to a specific connector type on the end of the parallel cable that
attaches to the peripheral (for example, a printer).
A private network that uses Internet Protocols, network connectivity, and possibly the public
Intranet telecommunication system to securely share part of an organization's information or operations with
its employees. Sometimes the term refers only to the most visible service, the internal website.
An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that devices use in order to identify and
IP address
communicate with each other on a network utilizing the Internet Protocol standard.
The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a way of measuring the speed of a printer. An IPM rate indicates the
IPM
number of single-sided sheets a printer can complete within one minute.
The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for printing as well as managing print
jobs, media size, resolution, and so forth. IPP can be used locally or over the Internet to hundreds
IPP
of printers, and also supports access control, authentication, and encryption, making it a much more
capable and secure printing solution than older ones.
IPX/SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet Exchange. It is a networking
protocol used by the Novell NetWare operating systems. IPX and SPX both provide connection
IPX/SPX services similar to TCP/IP, with the IPX protocol having similarities to IP, and SPX having similarities
to TCP. IPX/SPX was primarily designed for local area networks (LANs), and is a very efficient
protocol for this purpose (typically its performance exceeds that of TCP/IP on a LAN).
The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an international standard-setting body
ISO composed of representatives from national standards bodies. It produces world-wide industrial and
commercial standards.
The International Telecommunication Union is an international organization established to standardize
and regulate international radio and telecommunications. Its main tasks include standardization,
ITU-T
allocation of the radio spectrum, and organizing interconnection arrangements between different
countries to allow international phone calls. A -T out of ITU-T indicates telecommunication.
ITU-T No. 1 chart Standardized test chart published by ITU-T for document facsimile transmissions.
Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression standard with no loss of accuracy
JBIG or quality, which was designed for compression of binary images, particularly for faxes, but can
also be used on other images.
Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a most commonly used standard method of lossy
JPEG compression for photographic images. It is the format used for storing and transmitting photographs
on the World Wide Web.
The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking protocol for querying and
LDAP
modifying directory services running over TCP/IP.
LED A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that indicates the status of a machine.
Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated with a network adapter. MAC
address is a unique 48-bit identifier usually written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (e.
MAC address
g., 00-00-0c-34-11-4e). This address is usually hard-coded into a Network Interface Card (NIC) by its
manufacturer, and used as an aid for routers trying to locate machines on large networks.
Multi Function Peripheral (MFP) is an office machine that includes the following functionality in one
MFP
physical body, so as to have a printer, a copier, a fax, a scanner and etc.
Modified Huffman (MH) is a compression method for decreasing the amount of data that needs to be
transmitted between the fax machines to transfer the image recommended by ITU-T T.4. MH is a
MH
codebook-based run-length encoding scheme optimized to efficiently compress white space. As most
faxes consist mostly of white space, this minimizes the transmission time of most faxes.
MMR Modified Modified READ (MMR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T T.6.

A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information, and also demodulates such a
Modem
carrier signal to decode transmitted information.
Modified Read (MR) is a compression method recommended by ITUT T.4. MR encodes the first
MR scanned line using MH. The next line is compared to the first, the differences determined, and then the
differences are encoded and transmitted.
A network operating system developed by Novell, Inc. It initially used cooperative multitasking to
NetWare run various services on a PC, and the network protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS
stack. Today NetWare supports TCP/IP as well as IPX/SPX.
Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for print using a laser
beam emitted from a laser printer, and it is usually green or rust colored and has a cylinder shape.
OPC An imaging unit containing a drum slowly wears the drum surface by its usage in the printer, and
it should be replaced appropriately since it gets worn from contact with the cartridge development
brush, cleaning mechanism, and paper.
The first example of something, such as a document, photograph or text, etc, which is copied,
Originals reproduced or translated to produce others, but which is not itself copied or derived from something
else.
Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) is a model developed by the International Organization for
Standardization (ISO) for communications. OSI offers a standard, modular approach to network
OSI design that divides the required set of complex functions into manageable, self-contained, functional
layers. The layers are, from top to bottom, Application, Presentation, Session, Transport, Network,
Data Link and Physical.
A private automatic branch exchange (PABX) is an automatic telephone switching system within a
PABX
private enterprise.
Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language (PDL) developed by HP as a
PCL printer protocol and has become an industry standard. Originally developed for early inkjet printers,
PCL has been released in varying levels for thermal, dot matrix printer, and laser printers.
Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format developed by Adobe Systems for
PDF
representing two dimensional documents in a device independent and resolution independent format.
PostScript (PS) is a page description language and programming language used primarily in the
PostScript(PS)
electronic and desktop publishing areas. - that is run in an interpreter to generate an image.
Printer Driver A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer to the printer.
The media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which can be used in a printer, a scanner, a
Print Media
fax or, a copier.
Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for determining how fast a printer works,
PPM
meaning the number of pages a printer can produce in one minute.
An interface for a device driver, this allows software to interact with the device driver using standard
PRN file
input/output system calls, which simplifies many tasks.
A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection, communication, and data transfer
Protocol
between two computing endpoints.
The Public-Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) is the network of the world's public circuit-switched
PSTN
telephone networks which, on industrial premises, is usually routed through the switchboard.
Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) is a protocol for remote user authentication
and accounting. RADIUS enables centralized management of authentication data such as usernames
RADIUS
and passwords using an AAA (authentication, authorization, and accounting) concept to manage
network access.
The sharpness of an image, measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The higher the dpi, the greater the
Resolution
resolution.
Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to share files, printers, serial ports,
SMB and miscellaneous communications between nodes on a network. It also provides an authenticated
Interprocess communication mechanism.

Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for e-mail transmissions across the Internet.
SMTP is a relatively simple, text based protocol, where one or more recipients of a message are
SMTP
specified, and then the message text is transferred. It is a client server protocol, where the client
transmits an email message to the server.
Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name of a wireless local area network (WLAN). All wireless devices
SSID in a WLAN use the same SSID in order to communicate with each other. The SSIDs are case-sensitive
and have a maximum length of 32 characters.
The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine which part of the
Subnet Mask
address is the network address and which part is the host address.
The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP); the set of communications
TCP/IP
protocols that implement the protocol stack on which the Internet and most commercial networks run.
Transmission Confirmation Report (TCR) provides details of each transmission such as job status,
TCR transmission result and number of pages sent. This report can be set to print after each job or only
after failed transmissions.
Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bitmapped image format. TIFF describes
image data that typically come from scanners. TIFF images make use of tags, keywords defining the
TIFF
characteristics of the image that is included in the file. This flexible and platform-independent format
can be used for pictures that have been made by various image processing applications.
A kind of bottle or container used in a machine like a printer which contains toner. Toner is a powder
used in laser printers and photocopiers, which forms the text and images on the printed paper. Toner
Toner Cartridge
can be fused by a combination of heat/pressure from the fuser, causing it to bind to the fibers in
the paper.
An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a TWAINcompliant scanner with a
TWAIN TWAIN-compliant program, a scan can be initiated from within the program. It is an image capture
API for Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems.
Uniform Naming Convention (UNC) is a standard way to access network shares in Window NT and
UNC Path other Microsoft products. The format of a UNC path is: \\<servername>\<sharename>\<Additional
directory>
Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents and resources on the Internet.
URL The first part of the address indicates what protocol to use, the second part specifies the IP address or
the domain name where the resource is located.
Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the USB Implementers Forum, Inc., to
USB connect computers and peripherals. Unlike the parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect
a single computer USB port to multiple peripherals.
A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears lighter when viewed by
transmitted light. Watermarks were first introduced in Bologna, Italy in 1282; they have been used by
Watermark
papermakers to identify their product, and also on postage stamps, currency, and other government
documents to discourage counterfeiting.
Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) is a security protocol specified in IEEE 802.11 to provide the same
WEP level of security as that of a wired LAN. WEP provides security by encrypting data over radio so that
it is protected as it is transmitted from one end point to another.
Windows Imaging Architecture (WIA) is an imaging architecture that is originally introduced in
WIA Windows Me and Windows XP. A scan can be initiated from within these operating systems by
using a WIAcompliant scanner.
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a class of systems to secure wireless (Wi-Fi) computer networks,
WPA
which was created to improve upon the security features of WEP.
WPA-PSK (WPA Pre-Shared Key) is special mode of WPA for small business or home users. A
shared key, or password, is configured in the wireless access point (WAP) and any wireless laptop or
WPA-PSK
desktop devices. WPA-PSK generates a unique key for each session between a wireless client and the
associated WAP for more advanced security.

The Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) is a standard for establishing a wireless home network. If your
WPS wireless access point supports WPS, you can configure the wireless network connection easily
without a computer.
XML Paper Specification (XPS) is a specification for a Page Description Language (PDL) and a new
document format, which has benefits for portable document and electronic document, developed
XPS
by Microsoft. It is an XML-based specification, based on a new print path and a vector-based
device-independent document format.

6.3. Polaris Training Frequently Asked Questions
< Index >

1) Training material shows different warm-up times from that of product specification.
2) Why is an ozone filter present in SCX-8128 Series, and not in CLX-9301 Series?
3) Is the initialization process such as color calibration necessary after initial set-up?
4) Why is Tray1 unable to accommodate A3/ledger size?
5) What is AMPV of CLX-9301 Series and SCX-8128 Series?
6) Why is wireless connectivity not supported on Polaris models?
7) Can you use a drum beyond its life expectancy?
8) Cosmos produces copies almost identical to originals, but Polaris shows deviation in color feel. Copy is more frequently
used than image print.
9) You say that power consumption is lower than competitors’ copiers, but how low is it compared to other electronic
products?
10) Is Polaris’ durability good?
11) According to experience with previous models, lifecycle of Toner Cartridge is satisfactory, but actual printable sheet
count seems lower than that of competitors. Is there a baseline for Toner Cartridge lifecycle?
12) What can happen if I add documents to the DADF while it is in use?
13) Is it possible to disable ACR ?
14) Can you install a 3rd party HDD drive to these machines?
15) For Polaris Mono Models, HDD is not a default option. Are storage related functions not supported? What features
are not supported?
16) When copying, can mono print be set as default color mode?
17) Compared to HP, oblique lines/thin lines and gray did not show properly. Is this improved in Polaris?
18) Do CLX-9301 Series and SCX-8128 Series support Super A3(SRA3) paper format?
19) Information on CRU, FRU & PM Parts lifecycle?
20) Will an empty toner cartridge or service item at end-of-life cause a hard error?
21) Can you print/copy if any one of the toner cartridges is empty?
22) Can the interval at which you receive an end-of-life message for service items be changed?
23) Will the machine display a hard error code when a service item reaches it expected life?
24) Will you receive a warning when a consumable or service item is nearing it’s life expectancy?
25) How is consumable an service item life tracked?
26) Will I lose counter information if the main board is replaced?
27) What is the interchangeable Drum Unit’s advantage?
28) What are the environment test conditions?
29) Do all Polaris models of Polaris support XOA?

30) HDD is option for SCX-8128 Series. Who is the target customer and what is the benfit of installing an HDD to this
series?
31) It is hard to separate faxes from copies because they are stacked in the same tray.
32) Can I move the shortcuts for copy/scan/fax to a specific page of the home screen?
33) Is there automatic paper size detection in a MP tray?
34) Is there a force-firmware mode for Polaris?
35) Does Polaris mono ship with the HDD SATA and power cables or will the connections come with the optional HDD?
< Answers >

Question No.1 Training material shows different warm-up times from that of product specification.
Answer Polaris warm-up time and booting time are as below.
• Warm-up(Sleep To Ready) : Polaris Color 25 sec/Mono 25 sec
• Booting Time(Power on to Ready) : Polaris Color 34 sec/Mono 25 sec
NOTE
Reference The Detail Specification Sheet
Question No.2 Why is an ozone filter present in SCX-8128 Series (Mono), and not in CLX-9301 Series (Color)?
Answer Corona charging method is non-contact type which emits ions generated by
Corona-discharging in air to OPC surface. In this process, ozone (ions) is generated in developer unit
area. After charging process, ozone filter collects ozone from developer unit. On the other hand, contact
charging type like roller-charging has no need to implement ozone filter, because there is no ozone produced
in developer unit.
※ Charging type
Reference Service Manual 2.5.2 Imaging Unit

Question No.3 Is the initialization process, such as color calibration necessary after initial set-up?
Answer When setting up initially, initializing process like TRC, ACR calibration is automatically performed. So there
is no need for the installer to do an extra initializing run.
But installer should manually adjust LSU Skew in case of left and right color-registration misalignment.
Please refer to Service Manual for details.
Reference • Calibration process in Polaris color : TRC ->ACR
• Calibration process in Polaris mono : No TRC, ACR
* Service Manual 4.4.5.6 Image Management
1) ACR(Auto Color Registration)
2) MCR(Manual Color Registration)
3) TRC(Auto Color Tone Adjustment)
Question No.4 Why is Tray 1 unable to accommodate A3/ledger size?

Answer In order to reduce the size of machine, MP Pick-up/Feeding Unit is moved inside the unit. It takes some
space of tray 1 area so it is shorter / narrower. (Percentage of A3 users: below 2%). It is able to feed A3
format from tray2 by default.
※ Canon C2020 uses same method.
Reference
Question No.5 What is AMPV of CLX-9301 Series and SCX-8128 Series?

Answer Recommended AMPV is as follows.
Reference Service Manual 2.2.1 General Specification
Question No.6 Why is wireless connectivity not supported on Polaris models?

Answer Stats show only about 1% of the users select wireless options.
Reference
Question No.7 Can you use a drum beyond its life expectancy?
Answer Drum Cartridge has no machine stop. So it is possible to use Drum Cartridge after end of life if there is no
problem with image quality. But if you want to limit Drum Cartridge's usage until its life cycle to ensure
image quality, you can turn-on the EIUL (End of Imaging Unit Life) function in service mode. And then
machine will stop after Drum Cartridge's end of life.
※ Polaris Color and Mono each ensures image quality until 50k (Color), 100k (Mono) impressions.
Reference Service Manual 2.2.8 Consumables

Question No.8 Cosmos produces copies almost identical to originals, but Polaris shows deviation in color feel. Copy is
more frequently used than image print.
Answer It is a problem that happens in initial products. And it was resolved by correcting of CMS table giving
similar color feel to Cosmos.
※ You can use color simulation function to control color feel when you print.
Reference
Question No.9 You say that power consumption is lower than competitors’ copiers, but how low is it compared to
other electronic products?
Answer For reference, power consumptions at power save are as follows:
• Polaris power consumption : 1.1-1.6W (Power save mode)
• Set-top box : 12.3 W
• TV : 1.3 W
• Internet Modem : 6 W
• Stand Air-conditioner : 5.8 W
• Heater : 5.8 W
• Audio Speaker : 5.6 W
• Home Theater : 5.1 W
• Video : 4.9 W
• Computer : 2.6 W
• General Printers : 2.2 W
It is useful to say that our product is highly efficient in electricity consumption comparing to competitors’,
but it is better to point out just how good it is compared to other electric products, so they can compare it to
other devices as well.
Reference We received inputs that compared to HP auto on/off, Samsung’s Sleep Mode Power does not show much
difference.
HP CP1025 model specifies under 1W electricity consumption at Auto Off. Samsung CLP-365 also specifies
under 1W at Sleep Mode, so there is no real advantages in Power Consumption.
Question Is Polaris’ durability good?

No.10
Answer You can refer to the test result of the Buyer’s Lab.

Question Is Polaris’ durability good?

No.10
Reference
Question No.11 According to experience with previous models, lifecycle of Toner Cartridge is satisfactory, but actual
printable sheet count seems lower than that of competitors. Is there a baseline for Toner Cartridge
lifecycle?
Answer For Copiers, Color uses 5 % BLI Patterns, and Mono uses 6 % BLI Patterns.
Minimum baseline for lifecycle is defined such as test conditions, set count, imaging unit count, etc.
In Korea, this Spec. is inspected by a third-party. Korea Customer Agency conducts its own tests, and if it
does not meet the Spec, it requests the company to rectify the spec.
In Toner Save Mode, it is saved up to approximately. 20 % and text only mode may be used by printing after
activating Save Mode. Configure Method: Eco Button Press, Default setting change in EPM and SWS.

Question No.11 According to experience with previous models, lifecycle of Toner Cartridge is satisfactory, but actual
printable sheet count seems lower than that of competitors. Is there a baseline for Toner Cartridge
lifecycle?
Reference < BLI Color 5% Pattern >
< BLI Mono 6% Pattern >
Question What can happen if I add documents to the DADF while it is in use?
No.12
Answer It may cause skew or jams to DADF
Reference

Question Is it possible to disable ACR?

No.13
Answer Yes, it may be disabled. It can be disabled per each execution condition.
But it is not recommended because default setting comes optimized.
• Page: 200 ~ 5000 (Default: 500)
• LSU Temp: 1 ~ 100 (Default: 3 degree Celsius)
• Ambient Temp: 1 ~ 100 (Default: 4)
NOTE
ACR Operating Time
Reference Service Manual 4.4.5.6 Image Management
Question Can you install a 3rd party HDD to these machines?

No.14
Answer Since compatibility test has not been performed, it may cause problems to the unit. Samsung does not provide
service support for unauthorized modifications to the device.
Reference
Question For Polaris Mono 23/28 PPM Models, HDD is not a default option. Are storage related functions not
No.15 supported? What features are not supported
Answer If there is no HDD, Share Folder function is not supported.
FAX's storage size reduction from 157 GB on HDD to 4 MB on flash memory. But 4 MB is enough because
80 sheets FAXs is as 1 MB by ITU-T No.1 Chart standard.
Reference Service Manual 2.2.3 Controller and Software Specification, Service Guide
Question When copying, can mono print be set as default color mode? It needs to be fixed even after power
No.16 On/Off.
Answer Default settings may be modified in Machine Setup. Alternatively, ‘Short Cut’ feature may be used to
create custom default setting. User Authorities must be configured through Job Account to prevent them
from changing settings.
It may be changed in Copy Setting within Machine Setup.
Detailed location is as follows: "1. Menu overview and advanced features > Machine setup > Other
settings > application settings > Copy Settings > Color Mode" value: Auto > Mono”.
Then, the setting change will remain even after power On/Off. This only changes the default setting, but users
still can change the setting before starting the jobs.
Reference Search in Admin Guide By “Color Mode”
Question Compared to HP, oblique lines/thin lines and gray did not show properly. Is this improved in Polaris?
No.17
Answer Oblique lines/Thin lines expression has been much improved, and it is currently equal to HP or better.
Reference Implementation of ReCP Technology (Edge Enhancement for Clean Page : Thin line expression
improvement, Resolution Enhancement : Oblique line expression improvement)

Question Do CLX-9301 Series and SCX-8128 Series support the Super A3 (SRA3) paper format?
No.18
Answer CLX-9301 Series and SCX-8128 Series do not support the Super A3(SRA3) paper format. Banner print
is not supported either.
※ SRA3: Supplementary Raw Type A3
Reference (Service Manual 2.2.7 Paper Handling Specification)
Polaris Specification : Ledger, A3, Letter, Legal, Oficio, Folio, A3, A4, JIS B5, ISO B5, Executive,
A5, Statement, Custom
Question Information on CRU, FRU and PM Parts life cycle?

No.19
Answer • CLX-9201/9251/9301 series
• SCX-8123/8128 series
Reference Service Manual 2.2.8 Consumables

Question Will an empty toner cartridge or service item at end-of-life cause a hard error?
No.20
Answer • There is no machine stop in consumables or PM part except Toner Cartridge.
• Toner Cartridges become Hard Stop mode when Toner Cartridge is empty.
If there is no machine stop in Toner cartridge, developer unit will be out of control due to toner density error.
Reference
Question Can you print/copy if any one of the toner cartridges is empty?
No.21
Answer No. If one of the color Toner cartridges become Hard Stop mode, the engine is not working.
Both Cosmos and Polaris have the same Hard Stop algorithm.
So In case of Hard Stop, both engines are not working.
Reference
Question Can the interval at which you receive an end-of-life message for service items be changed?
No.22
Answer All the PM parts including consumables have default warning time. And it can be adjusted in the range
5-30% in 1% increments (Threshold).
Reference Service Manual 4.4.3.2 Supply Status
Question Will the machine display a hard error code when a service item reaches it expected life?
No.23
Answer Consumables and PM part except Toner Cartridge have no Hard Stop mode. So they can work regardless of
machine's malfunction. On the other hand, because Toner Cartridge has Hard Stop mode to protect engine
from error, It is not allowed that User removes the Hard Stop mode of Toner Cartridge.
Reference
Question Will you receive a warning when a consumable or service item is nearing it’s life expectancy?
No.24
Answer Toner Cartridge brings pre-warning up based on the life information of its memory and there is machine stop
mode. OPC unit brings pre-warning up based on the life information of its memory and there is no machine
stop mode. PM Parts except Toner, — and OPC brings pre-warning up based on the life information of
machine memory and there is no machine stop mode.
Reference Service Manual 4.4.3.2 Supply Status (Pre-Warning Information)
Question How is consumable an service item life tracked?

No.25
Answer Toner Cartridge and Drum Units record life-cycle information in its memory.
And PM Parts records life-cycle information based on page count in machine memory.
Reference
Question Will I lose counter information if the main board is replaced?

No.26
Answer No, you will not. Life cycle information of machine is recorded on MSOK in a slot of main board. And you
should use existing MSOK even after the main board replacement. So life-cycle information is unaffected by
main board replacement.
※ MSOK: Master System Operator Key
Reference

Question What is the interchangeable Drum Unit’s advantage?

No.27
Answer Users generally use Black image more than color yellow, magenta, and cyan when they are printing. So users
can delay replacement cycle of black drum unit by interchanging black with color Drum Unit. Spare Drum
Units' storage such as money and space is minimized to one unit only.
Reference
Question What are the environment test conditions?

No.28
Answer • HH(High temperature and humidity): 30℃, 85%
• LL(Low temperature and humidity): 10℃, 10%
• NN(Normal temperature and humidity): 23℃, 55%
• Cycle Test : 15℃ 15% ↔ 26℃ 20% ↔ 20℃ 10% ↔ 26℃ 80% ↔ 23℃ 55%
Reference
Question Do all Polaris models support XOA?

No.29
Answer All Polaris Color models (CLX-9301NA, CLX-9251NA, CLX-9201NA) support XOA. But only
SCX-8128NX supports XOA among Polaris Mono models. SCX-8128NA and SCX-8123NA do not support
XOA.
Reference
Question HDD is option for SCX-8128 Series. Who is the target customer and what is the benefit of installing
No.30 an HDD to this series?
Answer If the HDD is not installed in SCX-8128 Series, it does not support the Shared Folder, Job Log and HDD
Spooling because that function need huge data memory. But general function that Scan to E-mail/SMB/FTP
is supported by using RAM. In case of FAX, it uses 4 MB flash memory without HDD. 4 MB is enough
because 80 sheets FAXs is 1 MB as ITU-T No.1 Chart standard.
Therefore, the target customer is
1) The customer who must save and scan the job log; government or security concerning company.
2) The customer who wants to use device as a file server.
3) The customer who wants print in LINUX and UNIX environment. LINUX and UNIX's print
process is to print after store whole job to HDD.
4) The customer who sends/receives FAXES more than 200 sheets at one time.
Reference
Question It is hard to separate faxes from copies because they are stacked in the same tray.
No.31
Answer You can separate faxes from copies by installing Job Separator (CLX-JST100). Then you can print faxes to
basic stacker and copies to inner tray respectively.
Reference
Question Can I move the shortcuts for copy/scan/fax to a specific page of the home screen?
No.32
Answer No, you cannot. It is possible to adjust the priority of functions like copy and scan. But it will be made
possible by a firmware update.
※ Setting: Machine setup > General Settings > Home Settings > Priority
Reference

Question Is there automatic paper size detection in a MP tray?

No.33
Answer There is no automatic paper size detection in a MP tray. You should manually select the MP tray's paper
format of the original.
※ Setting: Machine Setup > Tray Settings > Settings > MP Tray
Reference
Question Is there a force-firmware mode for Polaris?

No.34
Answer There is a force-firmware mode for Polaris Color only. You can go into force-firmware mode by turning on
the machine while opening the front door and right door and pushing the power button.
Reference
Question Does Polaris mono ship with the HDD SATA and power cables or will the connections come with the
No.35 optional HDD?
Answer The SATA cable and power cable are shipped with the optional HDD package. So you should assemble those
cables on the main board when you install the HDD.
Reference Service Manual 3.3.32.1 Installing the HDD

GSPN (GLOBAL SERVICE PARTNER NETWORK)
Area Web Site
Europe, MENA,
https://gspn1.samsungcsportal.com
CIS, Africa
E.Asia, W.Asia,
https://gspn2.samsungcsportal.com
China, Japan
N.America, S.America https://gspn3.samsungcsportal.com
This Service Manual is a property of Samsung Electronics

© 2013 Samsung Electronics Co.,Ltd.
Co.,Ltd.
All rights reserved.
Any unauthorized use of Manual can be punished under
Printed in Korea
applicable International and/or domestic law.
Code No.:

Samsung

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Samsung

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Samsung

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

A3 Color Copier

2. Product Specifications and Description

3. Disassembly and Reassembly

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

i Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2.5.3.2. Transfer belt drive ......................................................................................... 2 − 43

Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved. ii

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2.11.7. Eraser PBA ................................................................................................................ 2 − 87

iii Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3.3.4. Temperature Sensor ..................................................................................................... 3 − 16

Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved. iv

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3.3.29.3. APS sensor .................................................................................................. 3 − 53

v Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4.4.5.4. Adjustment .................................................................................................. 4 − 32

Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved. vi

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4.8. Adjusting the DADF skew....................................................................................................... 4 − 223

vii Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1.1. Safety warning

1) Only to be serviced by a factory trained service technician.

2) Use only Samsung replacement parts.

3) Laser Safety Statement

• Maximum power of energy output: 12 mW

4) Lithium battery not replaceable by user

Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved. 1-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1.2. Caution for safety

1.2.1. Toxic material

1.2.2. Electric shock and fire safety precautions

1-2 Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved. 1-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1.2.3. Handling precautions

1.2.4. Assembly and Disassembly precautions

3) Disconnect interface cables and power cables.

7) Handling of the OPC Drum

1-4 Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1.2.5. Disregarding this warning may cause bodily injury

1) Be careful with the high temperature part.

2) Do not put fingers or hair into the rotating parts.

4) Ensure the printer is installed safely.

Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved. 1-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1.3. ESD precautions

3) Use only a grounded tip soldering iron to solder or desolder ESDs.

1-6 Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2. Product Specifications and Description

2.1. Product Overview

• Printing Speed (Mono/Color)

Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved. 2-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine